Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout4.1.3_Appendix B_KES_SD Project Manual_MSBA SD SubmissionPROJECT MANUAL KITTREDGE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL North Andover, MA SD Outline Specifications August 26, 2025 - Submission for Cost Estimate December 12, 2025 - Revision 1 ARCHITECT Machado Silvetti 560 Harrison Ave Boston, MA 02118 Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1 PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000200 Outline Specifications DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 015100 Construction Indoor Air Quality Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Section 018110 Sustainable Design Requirements DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 024113.23 Utility Line Removal DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 05 - METALS Section 051200 Structural Steel Framing Section 053000 Metal Decking DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 101453 Traffic Signage DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 210000 Fire Protection Outline Section 210001 Fire Protection Narrative DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 220000 Plumbing Outline Section 220001 Plumbing Narrative DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 230000 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning Outline Section 230001 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning Narrative DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 260000 Electrical Technology Outline Section 2600001 Electrical Narrative DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 270001 Technology System Narrative Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 280000 Electronic Safety and Security System Narrative DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Section 312500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 321213 Heavy Duty Concrete Paving Section 321216 Asphalt Paving Section 321600 Curbs Section 321723 Pavement Markings Section 323223 Precast Modular Block Retaining Wall DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES Section 331000 Water Utilities Section 333000 Sanitary Sewerage Section 334000 Stormwater Utilities Section 334443 Water Quality Unity END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-1 DOCUMENT 000120 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION SCHEMATIC PHASE- CONSTRUCTION ASSEMBLIES AND SYSTEMS CONTENTS Project Description Element A - Substructure Element B - Shell Element C - Interiors Element D - Services Element E - Equipment & Furnishings Element F - Special Const. & Demo. Element G - Building Sitework Element Z - General PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1010 – Project Summary 1010.10 Summary of Work The existing Kittredge Elementary School, its support structures/facilities and all existing site works, excluding any trees that can be saved and an onsite relocation of the Kittredge Rock, will be demolished and removed from the site prior to new construction, providing an “open-site” for a new school building of approximately 65,500 S.F to be constructed. The new school will provide 1-5th grade education to 335 students in a new 2-story building, located at the north-west of the site, creating a large front lawn along Main Street. 1020 – Project Program 1020.10 Site Program The Site Program is described in Section 4.1.2.a and 4.1.2.b of the Schematic Design Binder. 1020.50 Facility Program The Facility Program is described in Section 4.1.2.a and 4.1.2.b of the Schematic Design Binder. 1030 – Project Criteria 1030.20 Code Analysis The Project will be designed in accordance with the following applicable codes: 1. 780 CMR: Massachusetts State Building Code, 10th Edition (2021 International Building Code) 2. 527 CMR: Massachusetts Fire Prevention Regulations (2021 NFPA 1) 3. M.G.L. Chapter 148 Section 26G – Sprinkler Protection 4. 521 CMR: Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Regulations Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-2 5. 2010 ADA Standards 6. 527 CMR 12.00: Massachusetts Electrical Code (2023 National Electrical Code) 7. 524 CMR: Massachusetts Elevator Code (ASME A17.1-2013/CSA B44-13: Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators) 8. 2021 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 9. 248 CMR: Massachusetts Plumbing Code 10. 2021 International Energy Conservation Code & Stretch Energy Code (225 CMR 23) 1030.50 Sustainable Design Requirements The Kittredge Elementary School will be designed and constructed in accordance with LEED Version 4 NC requirements. The Project’s sustainable goals are as follows: • To meet the energy efficiency requirements of the 225 CMR 23 Massachusetts Stretch Energy Code and Opt-in Specialized Code (MSBA Green Schools Program Policy 2023 Additional Reimbursement) • Achieve LEED Gold by maximizing EA Optimize Energy Performance points • Meet energy use intensity (EUI) of 25 kBtu/ft2/yr 1040 – Existing Conditions 1040.30 Assessment Environmental Site Assessment: A Phase I – Environmental Site Assessment was completed on the existing site and can be found in Section 4.1.2.f of the Schematic Design Binder. This assessment flagged the potential location of a 10,000 gallon oil tank on site, alongside a leaking oil-filled circuit breaker, with additional due diligence on these items planned for the Design Development Phase. Hazardous Materials Investigation: A hazardous materials investigation was performed at the existing Kittredge Elementary School and can be found in Section 4.1.2.f of the Schematic Design Binder. This report identified materials containing asbestos at floor tiles, pipe insulation, cement and ceiling panels at existing building roof access, Asphalt roof assembly and exterior window caulking. This report also identified Lead Paint across various locations in the existing building. 1040.50 Subsurface Investigation Preliminary subsurface investigation was performed at the existing site and can be found in Section 4.1.2.g of the Schematic Design Binder. This report recommended that all topsoil, fills, asphalt and remnants of demolished buildings and other underground structures be removed and replaced with structural fill. 20: PROPOSAL, BIDDING AND CONTRACTING Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-3 2010 – Delivery Method • General Contractor with Filed Sub-Bid Contractors as required by Massachusetts Public Bid Laws. o Anticipated Trade-Bid categories:  MASONRY  MISCELLANEOUS AND ORNAMENTAL IRON  WATERPROOFING, DAMPPROOFING AND CAULKING  ROOFING AND FLASHING  METAL WINDOWS  GLASS AND GLAZING  TILE  ACOUSTICAL TILE  RESILIENT FLOORS  PAINTING  ELEVATORS  PLUMBING  FIRE SUPPRESSION  HVAC  ELECTRICAL WORK 2020 – Qualification Requirements • Bidders for General Construction and Sub-trades shall be DCAM certified for their category of work. 2030 – Proposal Requirements: Not Applicable. 2040 – Bid Requirements • Bidding procedures according to Massachusetts Public Bid Laws 2050 – Contracting Requirements • Contracting procedures according to Massachusetts Public Bid Laws 30: COST SUMMARY 3040 – Alternates: • Double-glazed insulated glass units • Reduce quality/cost of 33% of Decorative CMU. • Removal of 33% of Raised Brick Coursings • Make Gym and Media Center Roofs Flat Roofs with Parapet and TPO. • Reduce Interior Glazing by 33% • Reduce Design Articulation in upper part of Gym, Cafetorium, Media Center by 25%. • Reduce amount of Clerestory by 25% Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-4 • Reduce number of skylights by 25% • Swap Epoxy Terrazzo in common spaces for LVT or other resilient floor. • Reduction in classroom case work by 20% (cabinets over the cubbies). • Change Standing Seam Mtl Roof to Asphalt Shingle • Change Bi-Fold door to overhead segmented garage door in Art Classroom. • Remove floating teacher desk/cabinet furniture from classrooms. • Remove third (leave two) HDMI plates in each classroom.3050 – Unit Prices: Not Yet Determined A. SUBSTRUCTURE A10: FOUNDATIONS A1010 – Standard Foundations Vertical and blindside applications of self adhered sheet waterproofing at foundation walls and underslab Bituminous dampproofing at foundation walls not requiring waterproofing Crystalline waterproofing at inside of elevator and sump pits B. SHELL B10: SUPERSTRUCTURE Refer to Structural Specifications following this document B20: EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE B2010 – Exterior Walls • Exterior facing, typical: Combination of utility brick unit masonry, decorative CMU, Stone masonry, custom finish, custom dimension terracotta block, and other cladding including but not limited to: Formed metal wall panels and soffits. • Architectural precast window frame surrounds. • Thermal and moisture protections: Extruded polystyrene and mineral wool board and batt insulation and self-adhered rubberized asphalt membrane air/vapor barrier. • Back-up wall: Cold-formed metal framing and gypsum sheathing. B2020 – Exterior Windows and Louvers Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-5 • Aluminum windows, fixed and operable • Insulating glass assemblies: Three panes of ¼-inch glass with ½-inch argon-filled space, and solar control low-e coating. o Security glazing at selective locations. • Aluminum storm-proof louvers finished to match windows. B2030 – Exterior Doors • Stile-and-rail aluminum doors with aluminum frames at vestibules (at all curtain wall locations. • Hollow metal Doors. • Bi-folding hydraulic opening doors. • Sectional Doors with glazed panels. B2040 – Curtain Wall • 6-inch deep framing, field glazed with triple pane insulating glass assemblies, including argon-filled space, and low-e coating. B30: ROOFING B3010 – Roof Coverings • TPO membrane roofing, typical: Fully adhered, 60 mil thick white TPO; and with average tapered polyisocyanurate insulation, ½-inch gypsum protection board with glass mat facing and 6-mil reinforced vapor barrier. • Asphalt shingles including ridge vents, soffit vents, and snow guards. • Standing seam sheet metal galvalume roofing B3020 – Roof Openings • Roof access hatches and safety rails. • Plastic unit skylights B3030 – Miscellaneous Roof components • Entrance canopies. • Gutters, downspouts, and scuppers. • 2-coat Kynar aluminum roof edge and roof drainage metals. • Stainless steel through wall flashing Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-6 • Rooftop acoustical mechanical equipment screens, visual types required. C. INTERIORS C10: INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION C1010 – Partitions • Gypsum wallboard on steel studs, typical o Impact in Gym. • CMU, where shown on drawings: 8-inch thick, normal-weight. • Shaftwall. • Manual and electric folding panel partitions • Motorized Gymnasium divider curtains. C1020 – Interior Doors and Frames • Metal doors and frames, typical: Formed steel. • Double glass acoustic borrowed lites with laminated glass. • Wood doors, typical: Flush doors with factory-finished maple veneer and custom vision panels. • Door Hardware. • Transaction windows with bullet resistant glazing. C1030 – Fittings Specialties • Toilet Accessories. • Markerboard and tackboards. • Interior signage including building directory. • Solid plastic toilet partitions, floor mounted and overhead braced. • Custom transparent finish oak millwork including wood trim, custom wood benches, dwood cabinets, plastic countertops, solid surface countertops and stools, wall paneling, and closet and utility shelving. • Fire protection specialties. • AED devices and cabinets. • Corner guards. Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-7 • Facility fall protection C20: STAIRS C2010 – Stair Construction • Prefabricated steel structure • Steel pans with concrete fill with perforated risers. • Exterior ladders to all roof levels. C2020 – Stair Finishes • Steel structure and pans shop-primed for field painting. • Rubber treads, risers and landings. C30: INTERIOR FINISHES C3010 – Wall Finishes • Water-based latex system, typical: Primer with two finish coats • High-performance system for corridors, stairways, toilet rooms: Epoxy primer with two polyurethane finish coats • Wall coverings • Wall tile. C3020 – Floor Finishes • Stained and Polished Concrete • Carpet Tile. • Epoxy resinous flooring. • Athletic wood sports flooring in Gymnasium. • Floor tile. • Linoleum flooring. • Rubber wall base C3030 – Ceiling Finishes • Acoustical ceiling tile. • Drywall soffits. Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-8 • Acoustic baffles and panels. • Cubicle curtains and tracks. D. SERVICES D10 CONVEYING SYSTEMS D1010 – Elevators and Lifts • One electric traction passenger elevator, 3500 pound capacity. D20 PLUMBING Refer to Plumbing Outline Specification and Narrative following this document D30 HVAC Refer to HVAC Outline Specification and Narrative following this document D40 FIRE PROTECTION Refer to Fire Protection Outline Specification and Narrative following this document D50 ELECTRICAL Refer to Fire Protection Outline Specification and Narrative following this document D60: COMMUNICATIONS Refer to Fire Protection Outline Specification and Narrative following this document D70 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Refer to Fire Protection Outline Specification and Narrative following this document E. EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS E10: EQUIPMENT E1010 – Commercial Equipment • Description: Mobile and stationary commercial foodservice equipment. o Electric equipment and accessories shall conform to the standards of the National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or Electrical Testing Station (ETS). o Steam generating equipment and accessories shall conform to the standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). o Energy Star - Specified Energy Star rated equipment and appliances shall serve as the standard for all types of equipment and appliances whenever possible. • Design Requirements: • Work shall be in accordance with the governing health, building and safety, and fire protection codes and regulations. Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-9 • Standards of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) shall serve as guidelines for the work of this Section. • Refrigeration: o Fabricated walk-in rooms o Commercial refrigerators o Mobile milk coolers • Freezers: o Fabricated walk-in rooms o Commercial freezers • Food Storage Shelving: o Stainless steel wire o Open grid polymer mats on enamel steel wire supports o Aluminum dunnage racks • Work Tables and Preparation: o Stainless steel tables and sinks o Food slicer o Food processor • Cooking Equipment: o Ranges o Ovens o Kettles o Steamers o Braising pans o Exhaust hood • Serving Equipment: o Drop-in mechanical cold-pans o Drop-in hot wells o Food shields o Stainless steel counters o Hot holding cabinets • Sinks: o Hand washing sinks o Three compartment wash sink o Mop sink • Miscellaneous: o Staff lockers o Trash bins o Mobile carts o Condiment counters o Mobile cash registers E1070 Entertainment and Recreational Equipment E1090 – Other Equipment • Athletic equipment including: backstops, scoreboards, shot clocks, wall pads, practice cages, mat lift, volleyball, and divider curtains. • Telescoping stands E20: FURNISHINGS E2010 – Fixed Furnishings Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-10 • Recessed interior foot grilles and frames in vestibules, and recessed floor mats and frames at entrance corridors. • Manual and motorized operated window shades solar shading at typical locations and black-out type. • Horizontal blinds at interior borrowed lights and doors. E2030 – Manufactured Casework. • Wood storage cabinets with oak doors and drawers in classrooms and where indicated. F. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION F20: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION F2010 – Building Demolition • Demolish existing building and foundations. • Protect existing site improvements and other features to remain. G. BUILDING SITEWORK G10 SITE IMPROVEMENTS G20 SITE IMPROVEMENTS Refer to Specifications following this document G30 SITE UTILITIES Refer to Specifications following this document Z. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Z1010 – Administration Z1020 – Procedural General Requirements and Quality Requirements Z1030 – Temporary Facilities and Temporary Controls Z1040 – Project Closeout Z1050 – Permits, Insurance and Bonds Z1060 – Fees Z2010 – Bidding Requirements Design Contingency Kittredge Elementary School Machado Silvetti North Andover, MA August 26, 2025 OUTLINE SPECIFICATION 000120-11 End of Document Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 1 SECTION 015100 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. LEED EQp1, Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control: Prevent exposure of building systems to environmental tobacco smoke during construction. 2. LEED EQc3, Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Requirements for minimum indoor air quality (IAQ) performance standards during the construction period. 3. LEED EQc4, Indoor Air Quality Assessment: Requirements for assessment of minimum in- door air quality (IAQ) performance standards through either air testing before occupancy B. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to achieve certification, measured and documented according to the LEED Green Building Rating System, of the US Green Building Council. Refer to Section 018110 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, for certification level and certification requirements. C. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the designated Sections: 1. Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for photographic documentation require- ments, submittal requirements, temporary construction facilities, protection, and controls. 2. Section 017420 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT for demolition and construction waste management. 3. Division 23 - HVAC for coordination with HVAC requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Specification Section for specific requirements relating to indoor air quality. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. LEED EQp1, Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control: At a minimum, take the following measures: 1. Comply with Owner’s Non-Smoking Campus Policy. 2. Do not allow smoking in enclosed portions of the project site, on the rooftop, or in construc- tion trailers. a. This prohibition includes electronic cigarettes. 3. Locate exterior designated smoking areas at least 25 feet (7.5 m) away from entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. Provide signage for designated smoking areas, located within 10 feet of each entry. Provide ash receptacles and clean areas daily. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 2 B. LEED EQc3, Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: During construction, comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate with Owner’s current IAQ management plans and procedures. 2. Meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the recommended Control Measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guide- lines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, Second Edition, November 2007, Chapter 3. 3. If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a Mini- mum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 shall be used at each return air grille, as deter- mined by ASHRAE 52.2-2007. Replace filtration media immediately prior to occupancy, ac- cording to Division 23 - HVAC. C. LEED EQc4, Indoor Air Quality Assessment: Comply with one of the following requirements: 1. Option 1. Flush-Out: Conduct a flush-out after interior finishes and major VOC punch list items are complete. The flush-out must supply a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of the gross floor area while maintaining an internal tempera- ture of at least 60 deg F and no higher than 80 deg F and a relative humidity no higher than 60%. Conduct the flush-out either after before occupancy or during occupancy. 2. Option 2. Air Testing: Conduct IAQ testing for air contaminant levels in the building, after construction ends and before occupancy. i. Path 1. Particulate Matter and Inorganic Gases. Conduct the air test for particu- late matter and inorganic gases (carbon monoxide, PM 10, PM 2.5, and ozone). ii. Path 2. Volatile Organic Compounds. Perform a screening test for Total Volatile Organic Compounds. 1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 018113 Sustainable Design Requirements 1.5 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Indoor Air Quality Management Goals B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan C. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan Implementation Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 3 1.6 INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT GOALS A. The Owner has established that this Project shall prevent indoor air quality problems resulting from the construction process, to sustain long-term installer and occupant health and comfort. B. Protect the ventilation system components during construction and cleanup of contaminated com- ponents after construction is complete. C. Control sources of potential Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) pollutants by controlling selection of materi- als and processes used in project construction. D. With regard to these goals the Contractor shall develop, for Owner and Architect’s review, an IAQ Management Plan for this Project PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS: A. Construction IAQ Management Plan highlighting the five requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3, including a no- smoking policy. B. Photographs documenting construction IAQ management measures implemented during con- struction of each of the five SMACNA requirements. C. Cut sheets of filtration media used during construction and installed immediately prior to occu- pancy with MERV values highlighted. D. Submit a letter from the Contractor describing building flush-out procedures including actual dates of building flush-out, hours of ventilation, ventilation rates, and indoor temperature and humidity levels. 2.2 IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Develop a Draft Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan for the construction and pre-occu- pancy phases of the building as follows: (1) during construction meet or exceed the minimum re- quirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3, (2) Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage, and (3) conduct a building flush-out after construction ends and prior to occupancy. 1. The SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction provides an over- view of air pollution associated with construction, control measures, construction process management, quality control, communicating with occupants, and case studies. These guidelines can be accessed at www.smacna.org. Chapter 3 of the SMACNA Guidelines rec- ommends Control Measures in five areas: HVAC protection, source control, pathway inter- ruption, housekeeping, and scheduling. Review the applicability of each Control Measure and include those that apply in the Draft IAQ Management Plan. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 4 a. HVAC Protection: Shut down the return side of the HVAC system whenever possible during heavy construction. If the system must remain operational during construction in- clude the following strategies that apply: i. If conditioning is required during construction, use supplementary HVAC units instead of permanently installed equipment if possible. ii. Seal all ductwork, registers, diffusers, and returns with plastic when stored on site or not in service. Seal unfinished runs of ductwork at the end of each day iii. Fit the return side of the HVAC system with temporary filters. iv. Isolate the return side of the HVAC system from the surrounding environment as much as possible (e.g., place all tiles for the ceiling plenum, repair all ducts and air handler leaks). v. Damper off the return system in the heaviest work areas and seal the return sys- tem openings with plastic. vi. Upgrade the filter efficiency where major loading is expected to affect operating HVAC system. vii. Clean permanent return air ductwork per National Air Duct Cleaning Association standards upon completion of all construction and finish installation work. viii. If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 shall be used at each return air grille during construction, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. ix. Install new clean media just prior to substantial completion and occupancy that has a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13. b. Source Control: Keep sources of contaminants out of the building and have a plan to eliminate any that are introduced: i. Use low-toxicity and low-VOC materials to the greatest extent possible. ii. Develop protocols for the use of any high-toxicity materials. Isolate areas where high-toxicity materials are being installed and use temporary ventilation for that area. iii. Prevent exhaust fumes (from idling vehicles, equipment, and fossil-fueled tools) from entering the building. iv. Enforce the no-smoking job site policy. v. Protect stored materials from moisture because absorbent materials exposed to moisture during construction can mold and degenerate long after installation. Store materials in dry conditions indoors, under cover, and off the ground or floor. vi. If materials are improperly exposed to moisture, replace the material and con- sider testing air quality before occupancy to make sure no mold contamination has occurred. c. Pathway Interruption: Prevent contamination of clean spaces. Include the following strat- egies that apply: i. Use 100% outside air ventilation (when outside temperatures are between 55 de- grees F and 85 degrees F and humidity is between 30% and 60%) with air ex- hausted directly to the outside during installation of finishes and other VOC emit- ting materials. ii. Isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of other spaces, whether they are finished or not. Seal doorways, windows, or tent off areas as needed using tem- porary barriers, such as plastic separations. Provide walk-off mats at entryways to reduce introduced dirt and pollutants. iii. Use dust guards and collectors on saws and other tools. iv. Depressurize the work area to allow a differential between construction areas and clean areas. Exhaust to the outdoors using 100% outdoor air, if possible d. Housekeeping: Reduce construction contamination in the building prior to occupancy through HVAC and regular space cleaning activities. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 5 i. Maintain good job site housekeeping on a daily basis. Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency particulate filters and use sweeping compounds or wetting agents for dust control when sweeping ii. Store building materials in a weather tight, clean area prior to unpacking for in- stallation. iii. Check for possible damage to the HVAC system and Building assemblies from high humidity. iv. Clean all coils, air filters, and fans before testing and balancing procedures are performed. e. Scheduling: Specify construction sequencing to reduce absorption of VOC’s by materials that act as sinks or contaminant sources. Complete application of wet and odor-emitting materials such as paints, sealants, and coatings before installing sink materials such as ceiling tiles, carpets, insulation, gypsum products, and fabric-covered furnishings are in- stalled. i. Consider after-hours or weekend work if practical. 2. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from exposure to moisture through precipitation, plumbing leaks, or condensation from the HVAC system to prevent microbial contamination. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FLUSH-OUT As part of Indoor air quality management, the following requirements have to be met: FLUSH OUT: Provide a summary data log sheet indicating outside air cfm provided on an hourly basis during flush out. Provide cut sheets of filters use during flush out and verify re- placement air filters after flush out. Refer to Section 018113 for LEED requirements. Or AIR TESTING: Provide an IAQ Testing report that includes a narrative describing procedures and how locations were determined, and date/results of each test. A. Building Flush Out: Select one of the following two options (prior to occupancy or during occu- pancy), to be implemented after construction ends and the building been completely cleaned. All interior finishes, such as millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and movable furnishing, must be installed, and major VOC punch list items must be finished. a. Prior to Building Occupancy: Prime Trade Contractor shall install new filtration media and per- form a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet f outdoor air per square foot of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60ºF (15ºC) and no higher than 80ºF (27ºC) and relative humidity no higher than 60%. The duration of the flush-out must be calculated as follows: Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (ft2) X 14,000 cfm Duration (Days) = Cubic Feet needed/(air handler capacity/1440 minutes/day) i. Replace all outside air filtration media prior to occupancy. Filtration media shall have a MERV of 13 as determined by ASHRAE 52.2. b. During Occupancy: if occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the space may be occupied only after delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60ºF (15ºC) and no higher than 80ºF (27ºC) and relative humidity no higher than 60%. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 6 Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (CFM) per square foot of outdoor air or the design minimum outdoor air rate determined by the ASHRAE 62.1-2010 calculations determined in IEQ Prerequisite Minimum indoor Air Quality performance, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin at least three hours before occupancy and continue during occupancy. These con- ditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air has been delivered to the space. The duration of the flush-out must be calculated as follows: Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (ft2) X 3,500 cfm Cubic feet of outdoor air needed during occupancy = Area (ft2) X 10,500 cfm Duration (Days) = (Area (ft2) X 14,00 cfm)/(air handler capacity/1440 minutes/day) B. IAQ Testing: After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typi- cal for occupancy, conduct IAQ testing using protocols consistent with the methods in the table below for all occupied spaces. C. Use current versions of ASTM standard methods, EPA compendium methods, or ISO meth- ods, as indicated. D. Conduct all measurements before occupancy during normal occupied hours, with the building ventilation system started at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outdoor airflow rate for the occupied mode throughout the test. F E. or each sampling point where the concentrations exceed the limit, take corrective action and retest for the noncompliant contaminants ate the same sample points. Repeat until all re- quirements are met. Test for the particulate matter (PM) and inorganic gases listed in Table 1, using an allowed test method, and demonstrate the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in the table. Table 1. Contaminant (CAS#) Concentration Limit (µg/m3) Allowed Test Methods Carbon monoxide (CO) 9 ppm; no more than 2 ppm above outdoor levels ISO 4224 EPA Compendium Method IP-3 GB/T 18883-2002 for projects in China Direct calibrated electrochemical in- strument with accuracy of (+/- 2% ppm <50 ppm minimum accuracy). PM 10 ISO 14644-1:2015, cleanroom class of 8 or lower 50 μg/m3 Healthcare only: 20 μg/m3 Particulate monitoring device with accuracy greater of 5 micrograms/m3 or 20% of reading and resolution (5 min average data) +/- 5 µg/m 3 PM 2.5 12 μg/m3 or 35 µg/m3** Ozone 0.07 ppm Monitoring device with accuracy greater of 5 ppb or 20% of reading and resolution (5 min av- erage data) +/- 5 ppb ISO 13964 ASTM D5149 -– 02 EPA designated methods for Ozone Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 7 Perform a screening test for Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC). Use ISO 16000-6, EPA TO-17,or EPA TO-15 to collect and analyze the air sample. Calculate the TVOC value per EN 16516:2017, CDPH Standard Method v1.2 2017 section 3.9.4, or alternative calculation method as long as full method de- scription is included in test report. If the TVOC levels exceed 500 µg/m3, investigate for potential issues by comparing the individual VOC levels from the GC/MS results to associated cognizant authority health- basedlimits. Correct any identified issues and re-test if necessary. Additionally, test for the individual volatile organic compounds listed in Table 2 using an allowed test method and demonstrate the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in the table. Table 2. Contaminant (CAS#) Concentration Limit (µg/m3) Allowed Test Methods Formaldehyde 50-00-0 20 µg/m3 (16 ppb) ISO 16000-3, 4; EPA TO-11a, EPA comp. IP-6A ASTM D5197-16 Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 140 µg/m3 Benzene 71-43-2 3 µg/m3 ISO 16000-6 EPA IP-1, EPA TO-17, EPA TO-15 ISO 16017-1, 2; ASTM D6196-15 Hexane (n-) 110-54-3 7000 µg/m3 Naphthalene 91-20-3 9 µg/m3 Phenol 108-95-2 200 µg/m3 Styrene 100-42-5 900 µg/m3 Tetrachloroethylene 127-18-4 35 µg/m3 Toluene 108-88-3 300 µg/m3 Vinyl acetate 108-05-4 200 µg/m3 Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 106-46-7 800 µg/m3 Xylenes-total 108-38-3, 95-47-6, and 106-42-3 700 µg/m3 F. Draft IAQ Management Plan Review Meeting: Once the Owner and Architect have reviewed the Draft IAQ Management Plan and prior to construction at the site, schedule and conduct a meeting to review the Draft IAQ Management Plan and discuss procedures, schedules and specific re- quirements for IAQ during the construction and pre-construction phases of the building. Discuss coordination and interface between the Contractor and other construction activities. Identify and resolve problems with compliance to the requirements. Record minutes of the meeting, identify all conclusions reached and matters requiring further resolution. 1. Attendees: The Contractor and related Contractor personnel associated with the work of this section, including personnel to be in charge of the IAQ management program, Architect, Owner and such additional personnel as the Architect or Owner deems appropriate. G. Final IAQ Management Plan: Make any revisions to the Draft IAQ Management Plan agreed upon during the meeting identified in item (B) above and incorporate resolutions agreed to be made subsequent to the meeting. Submit the revised plan to the Owner and Architect for ap- proval within 10 calendar days of the meeting. 3.2 IMPLEMENTATION OF IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Manager: The Contractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and the IAQ Management Plan for the Project. B. Progress Meetings: Construction related IAQ procedures shall be included in the pre-construc- tion and construction progress meeting agendas. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 015100 - 8 C. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the IAQ Management Plan to the Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner, and the Architect. D. Instruction: The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of the IAQ procedures and ensure that all participants in the construction process understand the importance of the goals of the IAQ Management Plan. END OF SECTION 01 51 00 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 018119 Construction Indoor Air Quality 2. Section 018113 Sustainable Design Requirements 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 1.4 PERFORMANCE GOALS A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for recycling of 75 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work. Another option is to divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material with at least three material streams diverted. A third option is to divert 75% of the total construction and demolition material with at least four material streams diverted. B. Recycle Goals: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction waste as possible. Owner has established minimum goals for the following materials: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2 1. Demolition Waste: Material Percentage Diverted Asphaltic concrete paving 75% Concrete 50% Concrete reinforcing steel 50% Electrical conduit 70% Copper wiring 90% Lighting fixtures 80% Lamps 70% Ballasts 75% Electrical devices 75% 2. Construction Waste: Material Percentage Diverted Site-clearing waste 50% Masonry and CMU 95% Lumber 70% Wood sheet materials 80% Wood trim 65% Metals 100% Roofing 80% Insulation 65% Carpet and pad 70% Gypsum board 65% Piping 50% Electrical Conduit 80% Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3 3. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: Material Percentage Diverted Paper 100% Cardboard 100% Boxes 100% Plastic Sheet and Film 100% Polystyrene Packaging 100% Wood Crates 100% Plastic Pails 100% 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. 1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification (at least 5 materials, structural and nonstructural), waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. Identify at minimum five materials (both structural and nonstructural) targeted for diversion. Approximate the overall project waste that these materials represent. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located. 4. NOTE: Land clearing debris, excavated soil, an alternative daily cover are excluded from waste diversion goals. D. Specify whether materials will be source separated or commingled 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Submit reports by the 15th day of each month. Include the following information for the prior month in an editable excel format, except where indicated: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Recycling/ hauling location 4. Total quantity of waste in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, separated by material stream, in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (recycled) as a percentage of total waste. 7. PDF scans of all hauling tickets for the month 8. A sample report is attached at the end of this section. B. Final Waste Reduction Report that details all major waste streams generated, including disposal and diversion rates. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. C. Commingled waste shall be reported with Project specific diversion rates or taken to a USGBC Approved Certified Recycling Facility. A certified recycling facility must process and recycle commingled construction and demolition materials and receive independent third-party certification of their recycling rates. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect, LEED Consultant, General Contractor, and Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. Superintendent may be the waste management coordinator. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 6 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. D. Divert from landfill at a minimum 75% of construction and demolition waste, from at least four different material streams. 3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site or at landfill facility. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants" for use of chipped organic waste as organic mulch. C. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Division 329310 Section "Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcovers." for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch. D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 7 C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 1 SECTION 018110 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative requirements and procedures for compliance and documentation for BU Pardee School of Global Studies to obtain minimum LEED Gold for Building Design and Construction for (LEED-BD+C) certification under the US Green Building Council’s LEED BD+C - NC v4.0/4.1 (where indicated) rating system. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2. Section 017400 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 3. Section 018150 – CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 4. Section 019100 – GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 5. Section 312500 – SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 6. Divisions 03 through 12, 31, and 32 Sections: Specific requirements for materials in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. United States Green Building Council (USGBC): A non-profit group of leaders from every sector of the building industry working to promote buildings that are environmentally responsible, profitable and healthy places to live and work. The USGBC is administrator of the LEED Green Building Rating Systems. B. Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED): A green building rating system that provides independent third party verification of a project’s sustainability. C. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan: Plan developed by the contractor to provide a healthy and safe indoor environment for workers during construction as well as the building’s current and eventual occupants. The IAQ Management Plan must meet or exceed the recommendations of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3. D. Material Cost: The dollar value of materials being provided to the site, after any contractor mark- ups, inclusive of all transportation and tax fees but excluding equipment and labor costs. E. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): An independently verified report based on life-cycle as- sessment studies that have been conducted according to a set of common rules for each product category and then peer-reviewed. F. Cradle to Gate Assessment: Analysis of a product’s partial life cycle, from resource extraction (cra- dle) to the factory gate (before it is transported for distributi0on and sale). It omits the use and the disposal phases of the product. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 2 G. Cradle to Grave: Analysis of a product’s full life cycle, from resource extraction (cradle) to the dis- posal phase (grave). H. Life Cycle Assessment: An evaluation of the environmental effects of a product from cradle to grave, as defined by ISO 14040-2006 and ISO 14044-2006. I. Third-party Verified Corporate Sustainability Reports (CSR): A report that outlines the environmen- tal impacts of extraction operations and activities associated with the manufacturer’s product and the product’s supply chain. Corporate sustainability reports must be in line with one of the following: Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report, Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, U.N. Global Compact, and ISO 26000. J. Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): Products whose manufacturer has established measures to reclaim its products at the end of their useful life and to recycle them into the same product. K. Product Category Rules: A set of rules, requirements, and guidelines for developing Environmental Product Declarations. L. Program Operator: An organization that ensures EPDs meet the product category rules (PCRs) for the associated product category. The program operator doesn’t do the actual life-cycle assess- ments. UL Environment is the leading program operator in the United States. M. Product-Specific Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): A product with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 104044 that has at least a cradle to gate scope. N. Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): A product with a with third- party certification, including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicated recognized by the program operator. The product specific Environmental Product Declaration shall conform to ISO 14025, ISO 14040, ISO 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. O. Industry-wide Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): A product with a with third-party certifica- tion, including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicated recognized by the pro- gram operator. The industry-wide Environmental Product Declaration shall conform to ISO 14025, ISO 14040, ISO 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. Also referred to as a “generic” Environmental Product Declaration. P. Bio-based Materials: A product that meets the Sustainable Agriculture Network's Sustainable Agri- culture Standard. Bio-based raw materials shall be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Q. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Products such as particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF), plywood, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, and door cores that are a composite of wood and/or plant material pressed and adhered together. R. Chain of Custody (COC): Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer and supplier are certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 3 S. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of a material’s constituents that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre- consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer). a. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with other constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of the same product are not recycled materials. b. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as constituents in another manufacturing process are pre-consumer or post industrial recycled materials. c. Recycled content of materials shall be defined in accordance with the International Organization for Standardization document, ISO 14021-1999 – Environmental labels and declarations – self declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling). www.iso.org T. Pre-consumer Recycled Content: Matter diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process, determine as the percentage of material, by weight. U. Post-consumer Recycled Content: Waste generated by households or commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of a product that can no longer be used for its in- tended purpose. V. Regionally Extracted, Processed and Manufactured Materials: Materials that are extracted, har- vested, or recovered; processed; and manufactured within a radius of 100 miles (160 km) from the Project location. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the building product that is installed at the Project site. W. Health Product Declaration: A standard format for reporting product content and associated health information for building products and materials. X. GreenScreen® for Safer Chemicals: A method for comparative chemical hazard assessment and their potential effect on human health and the environment. Y. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC): Carbon compounds considered indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating, and/or harmful to the comfort and wellbeing of installers and occupants. Z. Wet Products: Materials and products installed in wet form, including paints, sealants, adhesives, and special coatings. 1.3 PROJECT GOALS A. The proposed project is designed to be sustainable, with the intent of incorporating the following qualities: 1. The project will minimize its effect on the environment by selecting environmentally friendly building materials and utilizing sustainable construction practices. 2. The project will provide a healthy and comfortable space for its occupants by developing and following an Indoor Air Quality Management Plan during construction, by selecting only non-toxic and low-emitting materials, and by designing the building’s systems to provide tenants with exceptional indoor air quality. 3. The finished project will consume significantly less energy and water than a typical code- compliant building through the use of premium efficiency equipment and designing efficient building systems. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 4 B. The proposed project is targeting a minimum SILVER from the US Green Building Council’s (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Building Design and Construction (LEED-BD+C) version 4.0 and version 4.1 (where indicated) Green Building Rating System. The following are expected of all contractors and sub-contractors: 1. Comply with LEED-NC version 4.0 and 4.1 (where indicated) requirements for those credits being targeted. 2. Refer to LEED Scorecard that follows this Section. 3. Refer to LEED Product Matrix that follows this Section. 4. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements. 1.4 MEETINGS A. Prime Contractor shall conduct LEED Certification meetings at 25%, 50% and 100% construction completion, in addition to those meetings outlined in Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination. 1. The meetings shall include, at a minimum: a. Prime Contractor’s Project Manager b. Owner’s Representative c. Prime Contractor’s LEED Representative d. All other attendees designated by Owner’s Representative e. Sub-Contractor Representatives as appropriate to stage of work 2. At a minimum, LEED certification goals and issues shall be discussed at the following meetings: a. Preconstruction Meetings b. Progress Meetings c. Subcontractor Meetings d. LEED Certification Meetings (outlined above). Meeting should be scheduled as a part of regularly scheduled job meetings on site. 1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination of Submittals: Coordinate LEED submittals with general submittal requirements as indicated in Section 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary hard copy submittals within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work indicating how the following requirements will be met. 1. Materials & Resources Prerequisite and Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Management complying with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management." 2. Materials & Resources Credit: Building product disclosure and optimization – sourcing of raw materials: list of proposed materials with recycled content, proposed regionally extracted, processed and manufactured materials, and proposed FSC-certified wood products 3. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: submit a draft copy of the plan for review, complying with Section 015100 – Construction Indoor Air Quality Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 5 C. Contractor is responsible for completion and transmittal of ALL construction-related tracking required for LEED certification including: 1. LEED Submittal Coversheets: All project submittals must be accompanied by a completed LEED coversheet. Submittal packages must also include documentation in support of the sustainability claims made on the LEED coversheet, including: a. Cost of each material or product, excluding labor and equipment b. From manufacturer, for each product‘s environmental attributes. The team’s sustainability consultant will be responsible for obtaining a report describing raw materials suppliers, complete content inventory for the product, and/or environmental product declaration. c. Highlight compliance with all requirements for low-emitting materials as noted in Section 2 (Products) 2. Providing and following an Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan. See Section 312500 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan. 3. Providing and following a Construction Waste Management Plan and ongoing documentation of construction and demolition waste recycling / salvage rates for all categories of waste. See Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management. 4. During construction, meet or exceed all applicable recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter See Section 015100 – Construction Indoor Air Quality 5. Providing monthly tracking and progress updates on the following credits. A sample Monthly Construction plan is provided at the end of this section. Alternative formats are acceptable as long as they include the following: 1. Materials & Resources Prerequisite and Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Man- agement A. Up to date GBCI CWM Calculator B. Waste slips/tickets 2. Materials & Resources Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials A. Up to date GBCI BPDO Calculator including value B. Number of EPDs to date C. Number of HPDs to date D. Percentage responsible sourcing of raw materials 3. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Low Emitting Interiors A. Up to date GBCI Low Emitting materials calculator including volumes and value 4. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Construction IAQ Management Plan A. Photos of IAQ measures (min 4 per month) 5. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment 6. Contractor to maintain Materials Credit Tracking Sheet monitoring the project’s progress towards targeted LEED Materials and Resources Credits. Tracking Sheet to be presented at construction meetings. GBCI’s Calculator should be utilized for this purpose. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 6 7. Contractor to maintain a Low Emitting Materials Tracking Sheet monitoring the project’s progress towards targeted LEED Indoor Environmental Quality Credits. Tracking Sheet to be presented at construction meetings. GBCI’s Calculator should be utilized for this pur- pose. 8. Contractor to package each submittal individually using a LEED Transmittal Cover Sheet verifying that submittals comply with LEED Requirements and that appropriate documen- tation is included. See sample provided. 9. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide itemized and total cost for ALL building materials un- der Divisions 2-10, 12, 31, and 32 used for Project, excluding labor and equipment. 10. Contractor to provide Commissioning Authority with a copy of approved submittals for all equipment to be commissioned as well as documentation requested by the Commissioning Authority which is necessary for the commissioning process. This may include: detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance proce- dures, full details of any owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. The actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority. 1.6 SPECIAL PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. In addition to the requirements of Section 012500 – Substitution Procedures, the special substitution requirements described here apply only to the LEED certification related materials and requirements and environmental products and procedures identified in this Section. B. Notify Owner and Architect when contractor wishes to substitute materials, equipment, or products that meet the aesthetic and programmatic intent of the Construction Documents and offer equivalent or increased environmental sensitivity to materials, equipment, or products specified to meet LEED requirements as indicated in the Construction Documents. C. Substitutions that may affect LEED certification must be clearly stated as such. D. Comply with the requirements of Substitution Procedures, except as follows: 1. Prior to submitting detailed information required under Section Substitution Procedures, submit the following for initial review by the architect. a. Product data including manufacturer’s names, address, and phone number. b. Include copy of Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if applicable. c. Description of the differences of the proposed substitution from specified product related to LEED requirements. Include description of environmental advantages of proposed substitution over specified product. d. The contractor is responsible for re-submittal of all calculations, and documenta- tion of products or material substitutions that affect LEED prerequisites and cred- its referenced in this Section, and any credits previously submitted as part of the project’s LEED Design Application Submittal, and all credits included in the LEED Construction Submittal. Products that do not meet these requirements should not be submitted for substitution. e. Substitutions of materials and products specified as part of the Contract docu- ments in the following areas (but not necessarily limited to these items) will require review and potential re-submittal of LEED Design Credit Application Pre-requisites and Credits: i. Irrigation System Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 7 ii. Rainwater Management System iii. Roofing products and materials iv. Plumbing fixtures and controls v. Interior and Exterior Lighting systems and controls vi. HVAC equipment, systems and controls vii. CO2 monitoring system viii. Acoustical Performance f. Substituted products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance by the owner. 2. Requests for Substitutions a. Submit a Submit a separate request for each LEED related product substitution. b. Identify product by Specification Section and LEED credit or credits, if applicable. c. List similar projects using product, dates of installation, and names of Contractor and Owner. d. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations, and reference Specification section and Article number. e. Include copy of Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if applicable. f. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product and amount of net change to Contract Sum. The cost data should be based on life cycle anal- ysis for each affected product including annual energy consumption and mainte- nance costs. g. State effect of substitution on construction schedule and changes required in other work of products. 1.7 LEED DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTALS A. For all credits: LEED documentation submittals must be prepared and submitted using the LEED- Online Credit web based application (https://www.usgbc.org/leedonline/) and minimum system requirements. B. Once the Contractor has joined the project through LEED-Online, the LEED Project Administrator will assign the LEED credits that the contractor is responsible for completing. a. NOTE: LEED Online is only accessible through Safari, Internet Explorer and Firefox at this time. b. NOTE: Each “Credit Form” is an editable Adobe pdf document. It may be completed or updated at any time prior to the LEED Construction Submittal. After you have completed documenting the credit, use the ‘Save’ button at the lower right hand cor- ner of the Form to save the data online. c. Additional submittal documentation and back-up requirements should be uploaded to the “File Uploads” section of LEED-Online following the required documentation sup- port for each credit. A. Sustainable Sites Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. Using the LEED Online Credit form, provide: a. A narrative describing the implemented erosion and sedimentation control measures and how these were maintained b. Photographic evidence of the implemented measures from various stages throughout construction. B. Water Efficiency Prerequisite and Credit Water Metering and Energy & Atmosphere Prerequi- site and Credit Energy Metering: Product Data and wiring diagrams for sensors and data col- lection system used to provide continuous metering of building energy and water consumption performance over time. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 8 C. Materials & Resources Prerequisite and Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Manage- ment: Comply with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management." Using the LEED Construction and Demolition Waste Calculator and the LEED Credit Form: a. Complete the construction waste calculation tables including: General description of each type/category of waste generated; location of receiving agent (recycler/landfill) for waste; quantity of waste diverted (by category) in tons or cubic yards. b. Provide a narrative describing the project’s construction waste management approach including a copy of the project’s construction waste management plan. Please provide any additional comments or notes to describe special circumstances or considerations regarding the project’s credit approach. c. Provide the Construction Waste Management Plan. d. Provide the hauling/recycling tags/tickets or receipts from the project e. Provide project-specific documentation of recycling rate for commingled facilities D. Materials & Resources Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization –Environmental Product Declaration- EPDs - Environmental Product Declarations Using the LEED Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Calculator and the LEED Online Credit Form: a. Provide a list of manufactures providing EPDs. b. Provide a list of each separate product holding an EPD. c. Provide copy of each EPD including statement type for each EPD. E. Materials & Resources Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials, Leadership Extraction Practices - Recycled Content Using the LEED Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Calculator and the LEED Online Credit Form: a. Provide the total project materials cost per “Project Materials Cost Data” in the Submittals section above. b. Provide a tabulation of each material used on the project that is being tracked for recy- cled content. The tabulation must include a description of the material, the manufacturer of the material, the product cost, the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer recycled con- tent percentage, and the source of the recycled content data. c. Provide a tabulation of each material used on the project that is being tracked for regional content. The tabulation must include a description of the material; the manufacturer of the material; the product cost; the percentage of the product by weight that meets both the extraction and manufacturer location criteria; distance between the project site and ex- traction/harvest/recovery site; and distance between the project site and final manufactur- ing location. d. Provide Manufacturer cut sheets, literature, or letters highlighting the overall post-con- sumer and/or post-industrial recycled content percentages (by weight) of each listed product e. Provide Manufacturer cut sheets, literature, or letters highlighting address location of each material’s extraction/harvest/recovery and manufacturing / processing sites AND a map (Yahoo Maps, Google Maps or equivalent) indicating distances from each location to the project site. F. Materials & Resources Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials, Leadership Extraction Practices - FSC Certified Wood Products. Using the LEED Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Calculator and the LEED Online Credit Form: a. Provide total of all new, permanently installed wood-based construction materials cost per “Project Materials Cost Data” in the Submittals section above. b. Provide a list of items (and/or components of products) claimed as FSC-certified, includ- ing product type, manufacturer, and the entity’s Chain of Custody (COC) certification number. (Each product name can then be cross-referenced with the manufacturer or ven- dor COC number during the LEED certification review.) Visit www.fscus.org/green_building for more information. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 9 c. Provide official proof of FSC Chain of Custody certification of all fabricators including, but not limited to, millworkers and cabinet-makers, who modify or alter the FSC wood prod- ucts before they are installed in the project. d. Provide materials invoices (showing costs) for each listed product G. Materials & Resources Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Material Ingre- dients- Material Ingredient Reporting- Material Ingredient Reporting Using the LEED Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Calculator and the LEED Online Credit Form: a. Provide a list of manufactures providing material ingredient reporting. b. Provide a list of each separate product providing material ingredient reporting. c. Provide copy of each material reporting statement including: Health Product Declaration, Cradle to Cradle Declare, ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Cradle to Cradle Material Health Certificate, or other USGBC approved program. H. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit low-Emitting Materials. Using the LEED Low Emitting Cal- culator and LEED Online Credit Form, provide the following: a. A listing of each interior applied paints and coating. Include the manufacture’s name, product name, specific VOC data (in g/L less water) for each product, and the corre- sponding allowable VOC from the referenced standard: California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017, using the applicable exposure scenario, VOC limits of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective February 5, 2016. Include cut sheets, MSDS, or other manufacturer’s data confirming compliance with the VOC limits. b. A listing of each indoor adhesive, sealant and sealant primer product used on the project. Include the manufacture’s name, product name, specific VOC data (in g/L less water) for each product, and the corresponding allowable VOC from the referenced standard, Cali- fornia Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017, using the appli- cable exposure scenario, or SCAQMD Rule 1168, October 6, 2017. Include cut sheets, MSDS, or other manufacturer’s data confirming compliance with the VOC limits. c. A listing of each composite wood and agrifiber product installed in the building interior, including those manufactured off-site, such as toilet partitions, backer board, door cores and engineered wood, including manufacture’s name and product name. Confirm that the product meets the low formaldehyde emissions that meet the EPA TSCA Title VI or Cali- fornia Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins. Include cut sheets or manufacturer literature or letters indicating the bonding agents for each composite wood and agrifiber material used in the project, showing that no added urea-formaldehyde res- ins were used in these products or meets ULEF criteria. d. A listing of each structural composite wood installed in the building interior, such as ply- wood, oriented-strand board, structural composite lumber, glued laminated timber, i- joists, cross-laminated timber, and finger-jointed lumber, including manufacture’s name and product name. Confirm that the product meets. Confirm that wood products are made with moisture resistant adhesives meeting ASTM 2559, have no surface treatments with added urea-formaldehyde resins or coatings, and are certified according to the appli- cable industry standard. Include cut sheets or manufacturer literature or letters indicating the bonding agents for each composite wood and agrifiber material used in the project, showing compliance with the applicable industry standard: i. Plywood: compliant in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard ‐ Structural Plywood (PS 1‐09), Voluntary Product Standard – Performance Standard for Wood‐Based Structural‐Use Panels (PS 2‐10), or one of the standards consid- ered by CARB to be equivalent to PS 1 or PS 2: (AS/NZS 2269, EN 636 3S (in- cluding CE label), Canadian Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 10 ii. Standards Association CSA O121 for Douglas fir plywood, CSA O151 for Cana- dian softwood plywood, for CSA O153 Poplar plywood, or CSAO325 for Con- struction sheathing) iii. Oriented strand board: specified with the Exposure 1 or Exterior bond classifica- tion in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard – Performance Standard for Wood‐Based Structural‐Use Panels (PS 2‐10) iv. Structural composite lumber: compliant in accordance with Standard Specifica- tion for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products (ASTM D 5456‐13) v. Glued laminated timber: compliant in accordance with Structural Glued Lami- nated Timber (ANSI A190.1‐2012) vi. I‐joists compliant in accordance with Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I‐Joists (ASTM D 5055‐ 13) vii. Cross‐laminated timber: compliant in accordance with Standard for Performance‐ Rated Cross‐Laminated Timber (PRG 320‐15) viii. Finger‐jointed lumber labeled “Heat Resistant Adhesive (HRA)” in accordance with the American Softwood Lumber Standard (DOC PS‐20 2015) e. A listing of flooring installed in the project. Include manufacturer’s documentation confirm- ing that the product has been tested and determined compliant in accordance with Cali- fornia Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017, using the appli- cable exposure scenario. f. A listing of ceiling products, including ceiling panels, ceiling tile, surface ceiling structures such as gypsum or plaster, suspended systems, and glazed skylights, installed in the project. Include manufacturer’s documentation confirming that the product has been tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017, using the applicable exposure scenario. g. A listing of insulation, including thermal and acoustic boards, batts, rolls, blankets, sound attention fire blankets, foamed-in place, loose-fill, blown, and sprayed insulation, installed in the project. Include manufacturer’s documentation confirming that the product has been tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Pub- lic Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017, using the applicable exposure scenario. I. Indoor Environmental Quality Credit Construction IAQ Management Plan. Provide the follow- ing: a. A copy of the project’s Indoor Air Quality Management Plan, highlighting the no-smoking policy b. Confirm if the permanently installed air handling equipment was used during construction. c. Six photographs at each of three different times during the construction period to highlight the implemented construction IAQ practices. d. List all filtration media (manufacturer, model number, MERV rating, location of installed filter) installed during construction and confirm that each unit was replaced prior to occu- pancy. e. A narrative describing protection measures for absorbent materials J. Indoor Air Quality Assessment: Provide the following: a. A Flush-out Report documenting the required volume and duration of the flush-out and describing the project’s specific flush-out procedures, with product data for filtration me- dia used during flush-out and during occupancy. OR b. A copy of the Air Testing Report documenting the procedures for air testing, the loca- tions, dates and results of each test. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 11 1.8 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 4. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. 1. For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath attached to door panel. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS A. Environmental Product Declarations: Provide at least 20 (after weighting) separate permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that met one of the criteria below. a. Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one whole product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. b. Product-specific Type III EPD -- Internally Reviewed. Products with an internally critically reviewed LCA in accordance with ISO 14071. Products with product-specific internal EPDs which conform to ISO 14025, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one whole product for the purposes of credit achievement calcu- lation. c. Industry-wide Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including ex- ternal verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. Products with industry-wide EPDs, which conform to ISO 14025, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement calculation. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 12 d. Environmental Product Declarations which conform to ISO 14025 and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. i. Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification and external critical review in which the manufac- turer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator are valued as 1.5 products for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. B. Environmental Product Declarations - Multi-Attribute Optimization: Use products that comply with one of the criteria below for 10%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project, or use at least 20 permanently installed products sourced from at least three different man- ufacturers. Products will be valued as below. a. Life Cycle Impact Reduction Action Plan (value at 50% by cost or ½ product) i. The manufacturer has produced a product specific LCA using EN 15804 or ISO 21930 for the product and has provided a publicly available action plan to mitigate or reduce life cycle impacts. The action plan must be product-specific using the specified PCR functional unit, be critically reviewed, and must include the following information: 1. Description of the LCA conducted including the dataset, software or plat- form used by manufacturer to complete the analysis. 2. Identification of the largest life cycle impact areas identified in the analysis and a narrative description of the impact areas targeted for reduction in the action plan. 3. Description of specific steps anticipated in implementation of the action plan. Include proposed changes in formulation or manufacturing pro- cesses that are planned as part of impact reduction strategy. 4. Specific dates and a full timeline for completion of all the steps described in the action plan. b. Life Cycle Impact Reductions in Embodied Carbon. i. Products that have demonstrated environmental impact reductions for the speci- fied functional unit based on a current third-party EPD or verified LCA that con- forms to the comparability requirements of ISO 14025 and ISO 21930. 1. The comparative analysis must show impact reduction in the global warm- ing potential (GWP) impact category and must include a narrative describ- ing how reductions in impacts were achieved. The published comparisons must be third-party verified (value at 100% by cost or 1 product). 2. The comparative analysis must show impact reduction(s) of at least 10% in the global warming potential (GWP) impact category and must include a narrative describing how the impact reductions were achieved. The pub- lished comparisons must be third-party verified (value at 150% by cost or 1.5 products). 3. The comparative analysis must show impact reduction(s) of at least 20% in the global warming potential (GWP) impact category, and demonstrate at least 5% reduction in two additional impact categories. A narrative de- scribing how the impact reductions were achieved is required. The pub- lished comparisons must be third-party verified (value at 200% by cost or 2 products). C. Leadership extraction practices: Provide products which meet at least one of the responsible ex- traction criteria below for at least 20%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed building products in the project. Products sourced (extracted, harvested, manufactured, and purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their cost. a. Bio-based materials. Bio-based products shall meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials shall be tested using ASTM Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 13 Test Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin material. b. New wood products. Wood products shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-approved equivalent. c. Materials reuse. Reuse includes salvaged, refurbished, or reused products. d. Recycled content. Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one- half the pre-consumer recycled content, based on cost. e. Extended producer responsibility (ie Cradle to Cradle Certified Products) Products pur- chased from a manufacturer (producer) that participates in an extended producer respon- sibility program or is directly responsible for extended producer responsibility. Products meeting extended producer responsibility criteria are valued at 50% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. D. Heath Product Declarations: Provide at least 20 (after weighting) separate permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that met one of the criteria below and demon- strate the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000 ppm). a. Manufacturer Inventory. The manufacturer has published complete content inventory for the product following these guidelines: i. A publicly available inventory of all ingredients identified by name and Chemical Abstract Service Registration Number (CASRN) and/or European Community Number (EC Number). ii. Materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property may withhold the name and/or CASRN/EC Number but must disclose ingredient/chemical role, amount and hazard score/class using either: 1. Greenscreen List Translator (LT) score and/or Full GreenScreen Bench- mark (BM) 2. The Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chem- icals rev.6 (2015) (GHS) a. The hazard screen must be applied to each trade secret ingredient and the inventory lists the hazard category for each of the health hazards included in Part 3 of GHS (e.g. “GHS Category 2 Carcin- ogen”). b. Health Product Declaration. The end use product has a published and complete Health Product Declaration with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard. c. Cradle to Cradle. Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle Certified™ under standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Bronze level or higher. d. Declare. The Declare product label meet the following requirements: i. Declare labels designated as Red List Free or Declared. ii. Declare labels designated as LBC Compliant that demonstrate content inventory to 0.1% (1000 ppm). e. ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard. The documentation from the assessor or scorecard from BIFMA must demonstrate the product earned at least 3 points under 7.5.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2014 or 3 points under 7.4.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2012. f. USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting the material ingre- dient reporting criteria. E. Health Product Declaration - Material Ingredient Optimization: Use permanently installed products from at least three different manufacturers that document their material ingredient optimization Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 14 using the paths below. Choose either compliant products, or select products that constitute at least 10%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project. a. Material Ingredient Screening and Optimization Action Plan (value at 50% by cost or ½ product) i. The manufacturer has screened the product to at least 1,000 ppm and has pro- vided a publicly available inventory meeting the requirements of Option 1 and com- pleted a detailed action plan to mitigate or reduce known hazards using the princi- ples of green chemistry. The action plan must be product-specific (not company, manufacturer or brand), and must include the following information: 1. Description of the screening or assessment platform used by manufacturer to complete the material ingredient screening and analysis. 2. Identification of the specific green chemistry principles targeted for imple- mentation in the action plan. 3. Description of specific steps anticipated in implementation of the action plan. Include proposed changes in formulation or manufacturing pro- cesses that are planned as part of green chemistry optimization strategy. 4. Specific dates and a full timeline for completion of all the steps described in the action plan. b. Advanced Inventory & Assessment (value at 100% by cost or 1 product): i. The end use product meets the requirements of any of the following: 1. Manufacturer Inventory or Health Product Declaration: The product has demonstrated a chemical inventory to at least 0.01% by weight (100 ppm) with no GreenScreen LT-1 hazards or GHS Category 1 hazards. The HPD or Manufacturer Inventory must be third party verified. 2. Manufacturer Inventory or HPD: The product has demonstrated a chemi- cal inventory to at least 0.01% by weight (100ppm) and at least 75% by weight of product is assessed using GreenScreen Benchmark assess- ment. The remaining 25% by weight of product has been inventoried. The GreenScreen assessment must be publicly available. The HPD or Manu- facturer Inventory must be third-party verified. 3. Declare labels designated as Red List Free that are third-party verified. 4. Cradle to Cradle. Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle Certified™ under standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Bronze level or higher. c. Material Ingredient Optimization (value at 150% by cost or 1.5 products) i. The end use product has demonstrated a product inventory and assessment of ingredients using any of the following programs: ii. Manufacturer Inventory or HPD: The product has demonstrated a chemical inven- tory to at least 0.01% by weight (100ppm) and at least 95% by weight of product is assessed using GreenScreen Benchmark assessment. No Benchmark 1 haz- ards (BM-1) are present in the end use product. The remaining 5% by weight of product not assessed has been inventoried and screened using GreenScreen List Translator and no GreenScreen LT-1 hazards are present in the end use product. The documents must be third party verified. iii. Cradle to Cradle. Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle Certified™ under standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Silver level or higher. d. USGBC approved program. i. Products that comply with USGBC approved building product optimization criteria for material ingredient optimization and/or advanced inventory & assessment path- ways. ii. For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at twice their base contributing cost (or number of products), up to a maximum of 200% of cost, or 2 products. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 15 2.2 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS A. Building products shall be in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2–2017, and comply with the VOC limits in Table 4-1 of the method. Addition- ally, the range of total VOCs after 14 days (336 hours) was measured as specified in the CDPH Standard Method v1.2 and is reported (TVOC ranges: 0.5 mg/m3 or less, between 0.5 and 5 mg/m3, or 5 mg/m3 or more). Laboratories that conduct the tests must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use. Products used in school classrooms must be evaluated using the classroom scenario, products used in other spaces must be evaluated using the default private office scenario B. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site shall meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective February 5, 2016. i. Interior Flat Coating or Primer – 50 g/L ii. Interior Non-Flat Coating or Primer – 50 g/L iii. Anti-corrosive/Anti-rust coating – 100 g/L iv. Primers/Sealers/ and Undercoaters – 100 g/L v. Clear Wood Finish: Lacquer- 275 g/L vi. Clear Wood Finish: Sanding Sealer -275 g/L vii. Clear Wood Finish: Varnish – 275 g/L viii. Clear Wood Finish: Brushing Lacquer- 275 g/L ix. Floor Coatings – 50 g/L x. Fire Protective Coatings – 150 g/L xi. Sealers and Under coaters – 100 g/L xii. Shellac: Clear – 730 g/L xiii. Shellac: Pigmented – 550 g/L xiv. Stain: 100 g/L xv. Concrete Curing Compounds: 100 g/L xvi. Japans/Faux Finishing Coatings: 350 g/L xvii. Magnesite Cement Coatings: 450 g/L xviii. Waterproofing Sealers – 100 g/L xix. Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealers – 100 g/L xx. Wood Preservatives – 350 g/L xxi. Low-Solids Coatings – 120 g/L xxii. Colorant – Architectural coatings – 50 g/L C. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall meet the applicable chemical content require- ments of SCAQMD Rule 1168, October 6, 2017, Adhesive and Sealant Applications, as analyzed by the methods specified in Rule 1168. The provisions of SCAQMD Rule 1168 do not apply to adhesives and sealants subject to state or federal consumer product VOC regulations. i. Indoor Carpet Adhesives - 50 g/L ii. Carpet Pad Adhesives - 50 g/L iii. Wood Flooring Adhesive – 100 g/L iv. Rubber Floor Adhesives - 60 g/L v. Sub floor Adhesives - 50 g/L vi. Ceramic Tile Adhesives - 65 g/L vii. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives - 50 g/L viii. Dry Wall and Panel Adhesives - 50 g/L ix. Cove Base Adhesives - 50 g/L x. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives - 70 g/L Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 16 xi. Structural Glazing Adhesives - 100 g/L xii. PVC Welding - 510 g/L xiii. CPVC Welding - 490 g/L xiv. ABS Welding – 325 g/L xv. Plastic Cement Welding - 250 g/L xvi. Adhesive Primer for Plastic - 550 g/L xvii. Contact Adhesive - 80 g/L xviii. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive - 250 g/L xix. Structural Wood Member Adhesive - 140 g/L xx. Top and Trim Adhesive - 250 g/L xxi. Metal to Metal - 30 g/L xxii. Plastic Foams substrate specific - 50 g/L xxiii. Porous Material (except wood) substrate specific - 50 g/L xxiv. Wood substrate specific - 30 g/L xxv. Fiberglass substrate specific - 80 g/L xxvi. Architectural Sealant - 250 g/L xxvii. Roadway Sealant - 250 g/L xxviii. Other Sealant - 420 g/L xxix. Architectural, Non-Porous – Sealant Primer – 250 g/L xxx. Architectural, Non-Porous– Sealant Primer – 775 g/L xxxi. Other– Sealant Primer 750 g/L D. If the applicable regulation requires subtraction of exempt compounds, any content of intentionally added exempt compounds larger than 1% weight by mass (total exempt compounds) shall be dis- closed. E. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene shall not be intentionally added in paints, coatings, ad- hesives, or sealants. F. Composite Wood Evaluation. Product meets one of the following: a. EPA TSCA Title VI or California Air Resources Board (CARB) ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or b. EPA TSCA Title VI or CARB ATCM formaldehyde requirements for no added formaldehyde resins (NAF). c. Tested per EN 717-1:2014 for formaldehyde emissions and complies with emissions class E1. d. Structural composite wood product made with moisture resistant adhesives meeting ASTM 2559, no surface treatments with added urea-formaldehyde resins or coatings, and certi- fied according to one of the following industry standards: i. Plywood: compliant in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard ‐ Structural Plywood (PS 1‐09), Voluntary Product Standard – Performance Standard for Wood‐Based Structural‐Use Panels (PS 2‐10), or one of the standards considered by CARB to be equivalent to PS 1 or PS 2: (AS/NZS 2269, EN 636 3S (including CE label), Canadian ii. Standards Association CSA O121 for Douglas fir plywood, CSA O151 for Cana- dian softwood plywood, for CSA O153 Poplar plywood, or CSAO325 for Construc- tion sheathing) iii. Oriented strand board: specified with the Exposure 1 or Exterior bond classification in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard – Performance Standard for Wood‐ Based Structural‐Use Panels (PS 2‐10) iv. Structural composite lumber: compliant in accordance with Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products (ASTM D 5456‐13) o Glued laminated timber: compliant in accordance with Structural Glued Laminated Timber (ANSI A190.1‐2012) Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 17 v. ‐joists compliant in accordance with Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I‐Joists (ASTM D 5055‐ 13) vi. Cross‐laminated timber: compliant in accordance with Standard for Performance‐ Rated Cross‐Laminated Timber (PRG 320‐15) vii. Finger‐jointed lumber labeled “Heat Resistant Adhesive (HRA)” in accordance with the American Softwood Lumber Standard (DOC PS‐20 2015) 2.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY A. Air filters treating outdoor air installed in the air handling unit shall have a MERV rating of 13 or higher. 2.4 WATER EFFICIENCY A. Install only EPA WaterSense Labeled water closets, showerheads, and urinals. Refer to Section 220000 - Plumbing. B. Install only ENERGY STAR clothes washers, dishwashers, and ice machines. C. No equipment or appliances that reject heat may use once through cooling with potable water. PART 3 - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION A. SS prerequisite: Comply with Division 31 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan" 3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. MR prerequisite and MR credit: Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Manage- ment." Divert at least 75% of construction and demolition waste from landfill from at least 4 material streams. 3.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PLAN – DURING CONSTRUCTION A. LEED IEQ credit Construction IAQ Management Plan: Comply with Division 1 Section “Indoor Air Quality Management” B. During construction Trade Contractor shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd Edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3). C. Temporary Construction Ventilation: Prime Trade Contractor shall Maintain sufficient temporary ventilation of areas where materials are being used that emit VOC’s, and maintain ventilation con- tinuously during installation, and until emissions dissipate after installation. If continuous ventilation is not possible via the building’s HVAC system(s) then ventilation shall be supplied via open win- dows and temporary fans, sufficient to provide no less than three air changes per hour. Prime Trade Contractor shall ensure that: a. The period after installation shall be sufficient to dissipate odors and elevated concentra- tions of VOCs. Where no specific period is stated in these Specifications, a time period of 72 hours shall be used. b. All areas shall be vented directly to outside. Areas shall not be vented to other enclosed areas. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 18 D. During dust producing activities (e.g. drywall installation and finishing) ventilation system shall be off, and openings in supply and return HVAC system shall be protected from dust infiltration. Pro- vide temporary ventilation as required. E. Preconditioning: Prior to installation, Prime Trade Contractor shall allow products which have odors and VOC emissions to off-gas in dry, well-ventilated space outside of building for 14 calendar days, in order to allow for reasonable dissipation of odors and emissions. F. Prime Trade Contractor shall complete all interior finish material installation prior to Substantial Completion to allow time for building flush out as described below. Submit notification to Owner’s Representative when all interior finish material installation is complete, highlighting the date of com- pletion. 3.4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PLAN – POST CONSTRUCTION A. Building Flush Out: Select one of the following two options (prior to occupancy or during occu- pancy), to be implemented after construction ends and the building been completely cleaned. All interior finishes, such as millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and movable furnishing, must be installed, and major VOC punch list items must be finished. a. Prior to Building Occupancy: Prime Trade Contractor shall install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet f outdoor air per square foot of gross floor area while maintaining an internal tempera- ture of at least 60ºF (15ºC) and no higher than 80ºF (27ºC) and relative humidity no higher than 60%. The duration of the flush-out must be calculated as follows: Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (ft2) X 14,000 cfm Duration (Days) = Cubic Feet needed/(air handler capacity/1440 minutes/day) i. Replace all outside air filtration media prior to occupancy. Filtration media shall have a MERV of 13 as determined by ASHRAE 52.2. b. During Occupancy: if occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the space may be occupied only after delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60ºF (15ºC) and no higher than 80ºF (27ºC) and relative humidity no higher than 60%. Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (CFM) per square foot of outdoor air or the design minimum outdoor air rate determined by the ASHRAE 62.1-2010 calculations determined in IEQ Prerequisite Minimum indoor Air Quality performance, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin at least three hours before occupancy and con- tinue during occupancy. These conditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air has been delivered to the space. The duration of the flush-out must be calculated as follows: Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (ft2) X 3,500 cfm Cubic feet of outdoor air needed during occupancy = Area (ft2) X 10,500 cfm Duration (Days) = (Area (ft2) X 14,00 cfm)/(air handler capacity/1440 minutes/day) B. IAQ Testing: After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typi- cal for occupancy, conduct IAQ testing using protocols consistent with the methods in the table below for all occupied spaces. a. Use current versions of ASTM standard methods, EPA compendium methods, or ISO methods, as indicated. b. Conduct all measurements before occupancy during normal occupied hours, with the building ventilation system started at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outdoor airflow rate for the occupied mode throughout the test. c. For each sampling point where the concentrations exceed the limit, take corrective action and retest for the noncompliant contaminants ate the same sample points. Re- peat until all requirements are met. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 19 Test for the particulate matter (PM) and inorganic gases listed in Table 1, using an allowed test method, and demonstrate the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in the table. Table 1. Contaminant (CAS#) Concentration Limit (µg/m3) Allowed Test Methods Carbon monoxide (CO) 9 ppm; no more than 2 ppm above outdoor levels ISO 4224 EPA Compendium Method IP-3 GB/T 18883-2002 for projects in China Direct calibrated electrochemical in- strument with accuracy of (+/- 2% ppm <50 ppm minimum accuracy). PM 10 ISO 14644-1:2015, cleanroom class of 8 or lower 50 μg/m3 Healthcare only: 20 μg/m3 Particulate monitoring device with accuracy greater of 5 micrograms/m3 or 20% of reading and resolution (5 min average data) +/- 5 µg/m 3 PM 2.5 12 μg/m3 or 35 µg/m3** Ozone 0.07 ppm Monitoring device with accuracy greater of 5 ppb or 20% of reading and resolution (5 min av- erage data) +/- 5 ppb ISO 13964 ASTM D5149 -– 02 EPA designated methods for Ozone Perform a screening test for Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC). Use ISO 16000-6, EPA TO-17,or EPA TO-15 to collect and analyze the air sample. Calculate the TVOC value per EN 16516:2017, CDPH Standard Method v1.2 2017 section 3.9.4, or alternative calculation method as long as full method de- scription is included in test report. If the TVOC levels exceed 500 µg/m3, investigate for potential issues by comparing the individual VOC levels from the GC/MS results to associated cognizant authority health- basedlimits. Correct any identified issues and re-test if necessary. Additionally, test for the individual volatile organic compounds listed in Table 2 using an allowed test method and demonstrate the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in the table. Table 2. Contaminant (CAS#) Concentration Limit (µg/m3) Allowed Test Methods Formaldehyde 50-00-0 20 µg/m3 (16 ppb) ISO 16000-3, 4; EPA TO-11a, EPA comp. IP-6A ASTM D5197-16 Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 140 µg/m3 Benzene 71-43-2 3 µg/m3 ISO 16000-6 EPA IP-1, EPA TO-17, EPA TO-15 ISO 16017-1, 2; Hexane (n-) 110-54-3 7000 µg/m3 Naphthalene 91-20-3 9 µg/m3 Phenol 108-95-2 200 µg/m3 Styrene 100-42-5 900 µg/m3 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Thornton Tomasetti August 26, 2025 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018110 - 20 Tetrachloroethylene 127-18-4 35 µg/m3 ASTM D6196-15 Toluene 108-88-3 300 µg/m3 Vinyl acetate 108-05-4 200 µg/m3 Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 106-46-7 800 µg/m3 Xylenes-total 108-38-3, 95-47-6, and 106-42-3 700 µg/m3 3.5 COMMISSOINING A. EA prerequisite and EA credit: Comply with Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Require- ments" LEED SCORECARD – follows LEED SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET – follows LEED MONTHLY REPORT TEMPLATE – follows END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL 024113.23- 1 SECTION 024113.23 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to the Town of North Andover Public Works Department Standards for Materials and Construction. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, and transportation required to complete all site preparation work as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or both. B. Include the following work: 1. Abandonment of existing storm drainage and their appurtenances. 2. Removal of existing storm drainage, sanitary sewer, and water utilities and their appurtenances. 3. Adjusting frame, grate, and rim elevations of existing storm drainage, sanitary sewer, gas, and water utilities to remain. 4. Cutting and capping of existing utilities to be abandoned. 5. Removal of gas utilities and their appurtenances per Gas Company requirements. 6. Removal/abandonment of Electric, Data Utilities and their appurtenances to be coordinated with site electrical consultant. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL. 3. Section 331000 – WATER UTILITIES. 4. Section 333000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE. 5. Section 334000 – STORMWATER UTILITIES. 1.3 LEED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL 024113.23- 2 1. LEED Submittal Requirements: a. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. b. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application c. As applicable submittals shall include the following. 1) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Dis- closure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content 2) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Dis- closure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs d. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures 1.4 PERMITS AND CODES A. All work shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, and laws of all local, state, and federal authorities having jurisdiction. All work necessary to make site preparation comply with such requirements shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. B. Procure and pay for all permits and licenses required for work under this Section. Give all required notices. C. Contractor shall not close or obstruct any roads, sidewalks, alleys, or passageways unless approved by the Owner and the Town of North Andover. Conduct all operations to interfere as little as possible with the use ordinarily made of roads, driveways, alleys, sidewalks, and other facilities near enough to the Work to be affected. No materials whatsoever shall be placed or stored within the site without approval of the Owner. D. Contractor shall register with “Dig Safe” 72 hours prior to construction. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain “Dig Safe” registrations and “Dig Safe” markings. Contractor shall comply fully with utility company requirements. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Locate, protect, and maintain benchmarks, monuments, control points, and project engineering reference points. Re-establish disturbed or destroyed items at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Perform site utilities work operations and the removal of debris and waste materials to ensure minimum interference with streets, walks, and other adjacent facilities. C. Obtain written permission from the Town of North Andover when required to close or obstruct roads, walks, and adjacent facilities. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL 024113.23- 3 D. Control dust caused by the work. Dampen surfaces as necessary. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities and the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). E. Protect existing buildings, paving, and other services or facilities adjacent to the site from damage caused by site work operations. Cost of repair and restoration of damaged items shall be at the Contractor’s expense. F. Protect and maintain lights, utility poles and services, valves, and other services, except items designated for removal. Provide for temporary relocation when required to maintain facilities and services in operation during construction work. G. Adjust rim elevations on utility access structures such as manholes, clean outs, and other structures and appurtenances to be flush with new grade elevations, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. H. When uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping or other utilities and services are encountered during site work operations, notify the applicable utility company and the Designer immediately to obtain procedure directions. Cooperate with the applicable utility company in maintaining active services in operation. I. Survey information of existing conditions is approximate. The Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of all survey information prior to construction and shall be responsible for carrying out all site work required to fully and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time shall be allowed on account of actual conditions inconsistent with those assumed, except as provided in GENERAL CONDITIONS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CONDITIONS A. Perform site utilities preparation work before commencing construction. B. Locate, protect, and maintain active utilities and site improvements to remain. Consult the records and drawings of adjacent work and of existing services and utilities which may affect site work operations. C. Provide necessary barricades, coverings, and protection to prevent damage to existing improvements to remain. D. Restore to original grades and conditions areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site utilities preparation work. E. Examine the areas and conditions under which site work is performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL 024113.23- 4 3.2 REMOVAL/ABANDONMENT OF EXISTING SITE UTILITIES IMPROVEMENT A. Remove and/or abandon existing site utilities improvements within the limit of work line as indicated on the Drawings. Include the following: 1. Miscellaneous utilities (i.e. gas, electric) 2. Water utilities and their appurtenances. 3. Storm drainage and their appurtenances. 4. Sanitary sewerage and their appurtenances. B. Existing Utilities: Information on the Drawings relating to existing utility lines and services is from the best sources presently available. All such information is furnished only for information and is not guaranteed. Excavate test pits as required to determine exact locations of existing utilities. C. Remove existing paving, including base material, as required to accommodate new construction. Saw cut existing paving in neat, straight lines to provide uniform, even transition from new to adjacent existing work. 3.3 FRAMES, GRATE, AND COVERS TO BE SALVAGED A. Existing frames, grates, and covers shall be carefully removed from existing structures. B. Existing frames, grates, and covers shall be cleaned and be free of any concrete, soil, or deleterious material. C. Existing frames, grates, and covers shall be stored and protected until they are used. D. Surplus frames, grates, and covers shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of at the Site Contractor’s expense. 3.4 UTILITIES STRUCTURES AND PIPES TO BE REMOVED A. Utilities structures and pipes (including asbestos/transite material if encountered) to be removed shall be completely removed and disposed of in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. B. The Contractor shall retain the services of a Massachusetts licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor to cut, remove water pipe in accordance with DEP 310 CMR 7.15. The Site Contractor will excavate enough soil in order to be within 6” of the pipe length to be removed. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor will be required to hand remove the remaining or final 6” of soil to fully expose the transite pipe. Work plan to be reviewed / coordinated with the project Hazmat Consultant. C. Utility pipes sections to be removed shall be cut and completely removed. Remaining, abandoned pipes shall be capped. D. Utility pipes to be abandoned shall be cut and capped at the respective mains unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. The base material for the structures shall be removed to a point 6 in. below the top of the existing subgrade. The cavity shall be completely filled in accordance with the applicable material for the specific area. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL 024113.23- 5 3.5 UTILITIES STRUCTURES TO BE RESET A. When the line or grade, or both the line and grade, of the structure require a change of 6 in. or less, the structure shall be adjusted to line and grade. The masonry shall be removed to such a depth as is necessary to make the adjustments and new masonry shall be constructed to conform to the proposed design. B. When the line and grade, or both the line and grade, of the structure require a change greater than 6 in., the structure shall be removed to such depths as is necessary and new masonry shall be constructed to conform to the new design. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove, haul from site, and legally dispose of all waste materials (including asbestos/transite material if encountered) and debris not required to be saved. Accumulation is not permitted. B. Maintain disposal routes clear, clean, and free of debris. C. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials is not permitted. D. Cover trucks used for hauling, follow approved routes, obtain disposal permits required, and pay all fees in connection with disposal of materials removed. E. Upon completion of site preparation work, clean areas of work, remove tools and equipment. Provide site clear, clean, and free of materials and debris and suitable for site construction operations. 3.7 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove and stockpile any/all utility structures indicated to be salvaged in the drawings. B. All removed materials, items, and equipment not indicated to be saved or returned to Owner shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of. C. Remove non-salvage materials from site as work progresses. Storage and sale of Contractor's salvage items on site is not permitted. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OUTLINE 033000-1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, related hand tools, and perform all operations required for complete installation of cast-in-place concrete and related work, as shown on the Drawings. 1.2 STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 “Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavy Weight Concrete.” B. ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.” C. ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” D. ACI 214 “Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compression Strength Test Results of Concrete.” E. ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.” F. ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.” G. ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” H. CRSI-WCRSI “Placing Reinforcing Bars.” I. AWS D1.4 “Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.” 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and placing drawings for all reinforcing steel. B. Furnish certified mill test reports for cement, metal reinforcing and welded wire fabric. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that the total chloride ion and sulfate content of each mix is within the specified limits. B. Test cylinders of concrete to verify strength. C. Verify for air content in accordance with ASTM C231-82. D. Testing and inspection shall be by an independent agency paid for by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The total chloride ion content shall not exceed 0.10% and the total sulfate content 0.5% by weight. B. Portland Cement ASTM C150 Type II. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OUTLINE 033000-2 C. Admixtures Air-entraining per ASTM C260. Other admixtures with prior written approval only. D. Water Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 2, Paragraph 2.3. E. Aggregate ASTM C33 including Appendix XI. F. Metal Reinforcing ASTM A615 Grade noted on Drawings. G. Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185. H. Vapor Barrier Polyethylene sheeting 6 mils thick of approved manufacture. 2.2 MIXES A. Design Mixes in accordance with ACI 211.1. B. Prepare design mixes prior to the beginning of work in accordance with ACI 301 Chapter 3 Paragraph 3.8 Method 1 or 2 and Paragraph 3.8.3. C. The strength of concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Structural Drawings. D. Air entrain all concrete exposed to weathering in accordance with ACI 301 Chapter 3 Paragraph 3.4 determined by volume as per ASTM C231. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING OUTLINE 051200-1 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES A. Structural steel for building construction and related anchors, fasteners, and connectors. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: AISC, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, and applicable regulations. B. Testing: Independent testing laboratory. C. Erection Tolerances: AISC standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Materials: 1. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 992. 2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 3. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. 4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501. 5. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020. 6. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 7. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 8. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, as applicable. B. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM A 959. 2. Electrodes for Welding: AWS Code. 3. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 1, red lead and oil. 4. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 2, red lead-iron oxide, oil alkyd. 5. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 13. 6. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand. 7. Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed ferrous aggregate grouting compound. 8. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed nonmetallic grouting compound, CE CRD- C621. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 METAL DECKING OUTLINE 053000-1 SECTION 05 30 00 METAL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements: A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Provide metal decking as shown or specified, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 Work Included: A. The work in this Section includes, but not limited to, the following: 1. Roof decking. 2. Floor decking. 1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: A. 03 30 00 – Cast-in Place Concrete. 1.4 Quality Assurance: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following (latest edition). a. AISI “Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”. b. AWS “Structural Welding Code”. c. SDI “Steel Roof Deck Design Manual”. 1.5 Submittals: A. General: 1. The timing, form and quantity of all submissions shall be developed and agreed between the Architect and Contractor at the commencement of the project. B. Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials: A. Metal Deck Floor Construction. 1. Metal deck for floor construction shall be profiled metal deck suitable for composite construction, complying with ASTM A-446-72 or ASTM A-535- 76. The deck should be galvanized in accordance with ASTM 525-76 with G-60 coating. B. Metal Deck for Roof Construction. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 METAL DECKING OUTLINE 053000-2 1. Metal deck for roof construction shall be profiled metal deck complying with ASTM A-611-72 Grade C with galvanized finish in accordance with ASTM-525-76 with G-60 coating. 2.2 Fabrication: A. Deck Section Requirements: Comply with the depth and gauge requirements, physical cross- sectional properties of the deck and basic design criteria indicated on the Contract Drawings and as listed below. 2.3 Quality Control: A. The Owner will engage, at his own expense, a Testing Agency to inspect metal decking installation and to submit reports to the Owner. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE 101453 - 1 SECTION 101453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section or implied on the drawings. C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform all work required to complete the work of the Section, as indicated. Signage work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Work under this section shall conform to the relevant provisions of MassDOT Specifications Section 828 of the "Supplementary Specifications for Traffic Signs and Supports. 2. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings of signage shall be submitted indicating size, shape, dimensions, letter style, method of anchoring, and spacing. 3. Material Selection and Samples: Submit samples showing the complete range of colors, 4. textures, and finishes available for all components required for construction. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 321216 – ASPHALT PAVING. B. Section 321723 – PAVEMENT MARKING. 1.4 LEED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: 1. LEED Submittal Requirements: a. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. b. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application c. As applicable submittals shall include the following. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE 101453 - 2 1) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Dis- closure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content 2) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Dis- closure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs d. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications). B. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) for Streets and Highways – 2012 Edition. C. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT) Highway Division – Amendments to the 2009 MUTCD and the Standard Municipal Traffic Code. D. Massachusetts Architectural Access Board (MAAB) 325 CMR. E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M268 Flat and Vertical Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control Applications F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength D4956 Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control G. Town of North Andover Department of Public Works / Highway Dept. Requirements 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: For each type of product required for the work of this Section, provide products of one manufacturer and source for consistency. B. Codes and Standards: Perform signage work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. C. Work under this section shall conform to the relevant provisions of MassDOT Specifications Section 828 of the "Supplementary Specifications for Traffic Signs and Supports.” 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings of signage shall be submitted indicating size, shape, dimensions, letter style, method of anchoring, and spacing. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE 101453 - 3 B. Manufacturer’s Product Data showing installation and limitations in use of each signage type. C. Samples shall be submitted showing the complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for all components required for construction. 1. Provide one sample of sign representative of the majority of signage required for the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGN PANELS A. Aluminum sign panels shall be Type A. Sign supporting hardware shall be aluminum or stainless steel. B. Type A Panels shall be fabricated from flat sheet Aluminum Alloy of the following types: 1. A-1 - Flat sheet sign panels shall be fabricated from aluminum sheeting meeting ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 5052-H38. Panels mounted with P-5 posts (square tube posts or U channel posts) shall be 0.08 in. (2 mm) thick. Panels mounted with single round breakaway posts shall be 6 mm thick. 2. A-2 – Flat sheet sections with extruded tabs shall be fabricated from: a. Sheeting 0.125 in. (3.18 mm) thick, ASTM B209, Alloy 3033-H18. b. Extruded parts ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6. 3. A-3 – Flat sheet sections with welded or flush riveted locking tabs and clips shall be fabricated from: a. Flat sheet ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 5052-H38. b. Extruded parts as specified by the Manufacturer. C. Type B Panels shall be fabricated of extruded Aluminum ASTM B221. Alloy 6063-T6 shall be 0.125 in. (3.18 mm) thick, 12 in. (305 mm) wide, and of bolted joint design. Only one 6 in. (152.4 mm) panel shall be used where the overall height of a sign requires one panel less than 12 in. (305 mm). D. Pressure sensitive reflective sheeting shall be applied in a manner specified for the manufacture of traffic control signs by the sheeting manufacturer and shall conform to AASHTO M268 and ASTM D4956 Type I – Engineer Grade. E. Each sign shall be permanently marked on the lower right corner of the back side with the month and year of installation and name of manufacturer. F. Ground mounted sign panels shall be secured to posts using 3/8 in. aluminum drive rivets. Stainless steel banding materials, brackets, and clips will be used for signs installed on light standards or mast arms. 2.2 SIGN POSTS A. Posts may be either the square tube post or U channel type - at the Contractor’s option. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE 101453 - 4 B. The furnished members shall be straighter and shall have a smooth uniform finish. It shall be possible to telescope consecutive sizes of tubes freely with minimum amount of play. C. Square Tube Posts 1. Square tube posts shall be square tube fabricated from 12 gauge hot-rolled carbon steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A1011, Grade 50. 2. Posts shall be 2-1/4 in. by 2-1/4 in. single posts for all signs less than or equal to 7.5 sq. ft. 3. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A653, Coating Designation G140 with a minimum coating of 1.4 ounces per square foot total of zinc on both sides under triple spot tests; or a minimum coating of 1.15 ounces per square foot total of zinc on both sides under triple spot tests and after all fabrication and re-galvanizing the posts shall be coated with a chromate conversion coating and sealed with an air-dried clear organic polymer topcoat. 4. Posts shall be welded directly in the corner by high frequency resistance welding or equal and externally scarfed to agree with standard corner radius of 5/32 in. plus or minus 1/64 in. The corner weld and holes shall be zinc coated after scarfing operations. Holes shall be 7/16 in. in diameter and shall be placed 1 in. on center. D. U Channel Posts 1. U-channel posts shall be fabricated from re-rolled rail steel or an equivalent steel and shall conform to the mechanical requirements of ASTM A499, Grade 60 and the mechanical requirements of ASTM A1. All steel U-channel posts shall weigh at least 4 pounds per foot and be entirely galvanized in accordance with MassDOT Specifications Section M7. Holes shall be 7/16 in. in diameter spaced at 1 in. on center and be punched prior to the galvanizing of the posts. 2. Breakaway capabilities shall be maintained via the use of a lap splice or slip base system. 3. All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A307, Grade A. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of MassDOT Specifications Section M7. 4. Steel posts, sign post anchors, anchor sleeves, slip bases, lap splices, and any related hardware shall all be from the same manufacturer. No mixing of brands shall be allowed. 2.3 SIGNS A. Handicap Parking signs (R7-8) shall be 12 in. x 18 in. with international symbol of accessibility; one per space, single faced. 1. Van spaces shall be so noted (R7-8a). 2. Signs shall comply with all MAAB requirements. B. Other signs: 1. See Drawings for all signs location. 2. STOP (R1-1), Do Not Enter (R5-1), and Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) signs shall be 30 in. x 30 in. 3. One way Arrow (R6-1R, R6-1L) plaques shall be 36 in. x 12 in. 4. Right or Left Turns (R3-5(R or L)) signs shall be 30 in. x 36 in. 5. EV signs shall be 12in x 18in Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE 101453 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Sign posts, foundations, and mountings shall be constructed so as to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind or displacement by vandalism. B. Install signs where indicated on plans and in conformance with MassDOT Specifications Section 828 and the MUTCD. C. Posts shall be installed directly into the ground using manual or pneumatic hammer to a minimum depth of 3 feet below grade. Driving caps shall be used to drive posts. D. Embed sign posts and sign post bases in concrete as indicated on the Drawings. E. Replace any base posts or sign posts damaged during driving or otherwise at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 1 Section 210000 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 CODES: A. All work installed under this Section shall comply with NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 25 and all local, state, county, and federal codes, laws, statutes, and authorities having jurisdiction. Include any and all permits, connection, and/or inspection fees in the bid. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work covered by this Section includes all Labor, Materials, and Operations in connection with the provision of a complete and operable Fire Protection System. Without limiting the generality thereof, the work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Fire Service from existing Municipal water main to inside the building. 2. A hydraulically designed automatic sprinkler system to provide 100% protection for the building. Prepare Working Drawings for approval of the Architect, the local authority having jurisdiction, and the owner's insurance company under stamp of an independent Registered Professional Engineer. 3. Double check valve assembly. 4. Fire department connection 5. pipe and fittings, valves, hangers, sprinkler heads, and system identification. 6. Flushing and testing of the entire system. 1.4 RELATED WORK: A. The following related work is to be performed under other Sections of the Specifications: 1. Excavation and backfill – DIVISION 33 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Maintain on the site at all times one (1) set of black or blue line on white drawings which shall at all times be accurate, clear, and complete, showing the actual location of all piping and equipment as installed in colored pencil. 1.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: A. Provide operating instructions to the Owner's designated representative. At the completion of the project, turn over to the Architect two (2) complete manuals. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 2 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SCHEDULES: A. Submit as outlined in Division 1 including working drawings and hydraulic calculations. 1.8 GUARANTEE: B. Guarantee all work free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. All materials and equipment furnished under this Subcontract shall be new, unused, first quality of a manufacturer of established reputation. Each valve, fitting, section of pipe, piece of equipment, etc., shall have cast or indelibly stamped thereon the manufacturer's name, pressure rating where applicable, type, etc. 1. Drains and test connections shall be provided in the systems. 2.2 SPRINKLER PIPING: A. Schedule 40 black steel pipe for 1-1/2" and smaller and Schedule 10 for 2" and larger. 2.3 SPRINKLERS: A. Sprinklers shall be manufactured by Tyco, Victaulic, Viking, or equal. B. Upright sprinkler heads in areas with no ceilings shall be Tyco Model "TY-FRB" Quick Response, upright natural brass finish heads. Include heavy duty sprinkler guards in all mechanical rooms and storage rooms. C. Sidewall heads shall be Tyco Model "TY-FRB" Quick Response with white polyester head and escutcheon. D. Pendent wet sprinkler heads shall be Tyco Model "TY-FRB" Quick Response recessed adjustable escutcheon, white polyester finish. E. Concealed heads shall be Tyco Model "RFII" Quick Response concealed type, 1-1/2 inch adjustment white cover plate. In special areas, as may be noted on the Drawings, provide alternate cover plate finishes. F. Use of flexible stainless steel hose with fittings for fire protection service that connect sprinklers to branch lines in suspended ceilings is acceptable. Flexible hoses shall be UL/FM approved and shall comply with NFPA 13 standards. Hose assemblies shall be type 304 stainless steel with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal hose diameter. Ceiling bracket shall be galvanized steel and include multi-port style self-securing integrated snap-on clip ends that attach directly to the ceiling with tamper resistant screws. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 3 2.4 ALARM FACILITIES: A. The wet system alarm device shall be Reliable or equal Model ‘E’ alarm valve with “E1” trimmings package to include Model ‘C’ water motor alarm and electric sprinkler alarm switch. 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTER: A. Double check valve assembly shall be State approved, U.L./F.M. approved, with iron body bronze mounted construction complete with supervised OS & Y gate valves and test cocks. Furnish two (2) spare sets of gaskets and repair kits. B. Double check valve assembly shall be of one of the following: 1. Watts Series 757-OSY 2. Wilkins 350A-OSY 3. Conbraco Series 4S-100 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS A. All work shall be installed in a first-class manner consistent with the best current practices. 1. All piping shall be installed true to line and grade, shall be grouped together, be parallel to each other. Utilize gang hangers wherever feasible. Group all valves together where feasible. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Protect all materials and equipment during shipment and installation, and properly handle and store at the job site so as to prevent damage, and upon completion of this work, clean all fixtures and equipment and replace damaged parts. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#92321/Page 1/December 12, 2025 TEL 508-998-5700 FAX 508-998-0883 email: info@g-g-d.com FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Schematic Design NARRATIVE REPORT The following is the Fire Protection system narrative, which defines the scope of work and capacities of the Fire Protection system, as well as, the Basis of Design. 1. CODES A. All work installed under Section 210000 shall comply with the MA Building Code and all state, county, and federal codes, laws, statutes, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. DESIGN INTENT A. All work is new and consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, facilities, and all operations and adjustments required for the complete and operating installation of the Fire Protection work and all items incidental thereto, including commissioning and testing. 3. GENERAL A. In accordance with the provisions of the Massachusetts Building Code, a school building of greater than 12,000 s.f. must be protected with an automatic sprinkler system. 4. DESCRIPTION A. The new building will be served by a new 6-inch fire service, double check valve assembly, wet alarm valve complete with electric bell, and fire department connection meeting local thread standards. B. The system will be a combined standpipe/sprinkler system with control valve assemblies to limit the sprinkler area controlled to less than 52,000 s.f. as required by NFPA 13-2019. Control valve assemblies shall consist of a supervised shutoff valve, check valve, flow switch and test connection with drain. C. All areas of the building, including all finished and unfinished spaces, combustible concealed spaces, all electrical rooms and closets will be sprinklered. D. All sprinkler heads will be quick-response, pendent in hung ceiling areas and upright in unfinished areas. E. Standpipes meeting the requirements of NFPA 14-2019 shall be provided in the Stage area. Fire department valves and cabinets will be provided on each side of the Stage in the Building. 5. BASIS OF DESIGN A. The mechanical rooms, kitchen and storage rooms are considered Ordinary Hazard Group 1. The Stage is considered Ordinary Hazard Group 2. All other areas are considered light hazard. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#92321/Page 2/December 12, 2025 B. Required Design Densities: Light Hazard Areas = 0.10 GPM over 1,500 s.f. Ordinary Hazard Group 1 = 0.15 GPM over 1,500 s.f. Ordinary Hazard Group 2 = 0.20 GPM over 1,500 s.f. C. Sprinkler spacing (max.): Light Hazard Areas = 225 s.f. Ordinary Hazard Areas = 130 s.f.. D. A hydrant flow test was performed on July 17, 2025, by GGD consulting Engineers with the following results: Static Pressure = 80 PSI Residual Pressure = 76 PSI Flow = 1,210 GPM Flow @ 20 PSI = 5,222 GPM Based on the results a fire pump will not be required for the project. 6. DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY A. Double check valve assembly shall be MA State approved, U.L./F.M. approved, with iron body bronze mounted construction complete with supervised OS & Y gate valves and test cocks. Furnish two spare sets of gaskets and repair kits. B. Double check valve detector assembly shall be one of the following: 1. Watts Series 757-OSY 2. Wilkins 350A-OSY 3. Conbraco Series 4S-100 4. Or equal 7. PIPING A. Sprinkler piping 1-1/2 in. and smaller shall be ASTM A-53, Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Sprinkler/standpipe piping 2 in. and larger shall be ASTM A-135, Schedule 10 black steel pipe. 8. FITTINGS A. Fittings on fire service piping, 2 in. and larger, shall be Victaulic Fire Lock Ductile Iron Fittings conforming to ASTM A-536 with integral grooved shoulder and back stop lugs and grooved ends for use with Style 009-EZ or Style 005 couplings. Branch line fittings shall be welded or shall be Victaulic 920/920N Mechanical Tees. Schedule 10 pipe shall be roll grooved. Schedule 40 pipe, where used with mechanical couplings, shall be roll grooved and shall be threaded where used with screwed fittings. Fittings for threaded piping shall be malleable iron screwed sprinkler fittings. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#92321/Page 3/December 12, 2025 9. JOINTS A. Threaded pipe joints shall have an approved thread compound applied on male threads only. Teflon tape shall be used for threads on sprinkler heads. Joints on piping, 2 in. and larger, shall be made up with Victaulic, or equal, Fire Lock Style 005, rigid coupling of ductile iron and pressure responsive gasket system for wet sprinkler system as recommended by manufacturer. 10. SPRINKLERS A. All sprinklers to be used on this project shall be Quick Response type. B. Furnish spare heads of each type installed located in a cabinet along with special sprinkler wrenches. The number of spares and location of cabinet shall be in complete accord with NFPA 13. C. Sprinklers shall be manufactured by Tyco, Victaulic, Viking, or equal. D. Upright sprinkler heads in areas with no ceilings shall be Tyco Model "TY-FRB" Quick Response, upright natural brass finish heads. Include heavy duty sprinkler guards in all mechanical rooms and storage rooms. E. Sidewall heads shall be Tyco Model "TY-FRB" Quick Response with white polyester head and escutcheon. F. Pendent wet sprinkler heads shall be Tyco Model "TY-FRB" Quick Response recessed adjustable escutcheon, white polyester finish. G. Concealed heads shall be Tyco Model "RFII" Quick Response concealed type, 1-1/2 inch adjustment white cover plate. In special areas, as may be noted on the Drawings, provide alternate cover plate finishes. H. Use of flexible stainless steel hose with fittings for fire protection service that connect sprinklers to branch lines in suspended ceilings is acceptable. Flexible hoses shall be UL/FM approved and shall comply with NFPA 13 standards. Hose assemblies shall be type 304 stainless steel with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal hose diameter. Ceiling bracket shall be galvanized steel and include multi-port style self-securing integrated snap- on clip ends that attach directly to the ceiling with tamper resistant screws. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PLUMBING 220000 - 1 Section 220000 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CODES A.All work installed under this Section shall comply with MA State Plumbing and Fuel Gas Code, MAAB, ADA and all Local, State, County, and Federal Codes, Laws, Statutes, and Authorities having jurisdiction. Include any and all permits, connection, and/or inspection fees in the Bid. 1.2 WORK TO BE PERFORMED A.The work covered by this section includes all labor, materials, and operations in connection with the provision of a complete and operable fire protection system. Without limiting the generality thereof, the work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.Sanitary Waste and Vent System. 2.Storm Drainage System. 3.Domestic Hot and Cold-Water System including Electric Water Heaters. 4.Fuel Gas Piping System. 5.Fixtures and Equipment. 6.Testing and Chlorination. 1.3 RELATED WORK A.The following related work is to be performed under other Sections of the Specifications: 1.Excavation and Backfill - DIVISION 31 2.Sewer and Storm drain to 10' outside foundation - DIVISION 33. 3.Domestic Water Service to 12” above finished floor – DIVISION 33 4.Electric Power Wiring: SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL 5.HVAC Equipment: SECTION 230000 - HVAC 6.Finish Painting: SECTION 099000 - PAINTING 7.Installation of Access Panels: SECTION describing material in which panel is installed. 8.Toilet Room Accessories : SECTION 108000 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A.Maintain on the site at all times one (1) set of black or blue line on white drawings which shall at all time be accurate, clear, and complete, showing the actual location of all piping and equipment as installed in colored pencil. Prepare Record Drawings at the completion of the Contract. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PLUMBING 220000 - 2 1.5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A.Provide operating instructions to the Owner's designated representative. At the completion of the project, turn over to the Architect four (4) complete manuals. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SCHEDULES A.Submit as outlined in Division 1. 1.7 GUARANTEE A.Guarantee all work free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the building. 1.8 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A.Provide markers on all piping. Tag all valves in system with corresponding valve lists. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Materials and equipment furnished under this Contract shall be new, unused, first quality of a manufacturer of established reputation. 2.2 PIPING AND FITTING A.Soil, Waste and Vent, Kitchen Waste and Vent, and Storm drainage piping to 10' outside shall be hubless cast iron pipe and fittings for 2" and above and shall be Type 'L' copper with cast D.W.V. type fittings for 1-1/2" and smaller. B.Domestic cold and hot water system water piping shall be Type 'L' hard tempered copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and silverbrite lead-free solder joints. C.Fuel gas piping shall be Schedule 40, ASTM A-53, black steel with threaded malleable iron gas pattern fittings for gas piping. 2.3 VALVES A.Locate all valves so as to isolate all parts of the system. B.Shutoff valves 3" and smaller shall be ball valves, solder end or screwed. C.Fuel gas valves shall be ball valves with tee handle, screwed end for 2-1/2" and smaller, and lubricated iron body plug cocks for 3" and larger. D.Valves shall be by Apollo, Nibco, Watts or Rockwell. 2.4 INSULATION A.All water piping shall be insulated with snap-on fiberglass insulation Type ASJ-SSL, equal to Certainteed 850 System, Owens Corning or Knauf. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PLUMBING 220000 - 3 2.5 CLEANOUTS A.Cleanouts shall be full size up to 4"; threaded bronze plugs located as indicated on the drawings and/or where required in soil, waste and storm pipes. 2.6 ACCESS DOORS A.Furnish access doors for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing system that require accessibility. Coordinate types and locations with the Architect. 2.7 DRAINS A.Drains shall be cast iron, caulked outlets, nickaloy strainers, and in waterproofed areas and roofs shall have galvanized iron clamping rings with 6 lb. lead flashings to bond 9" in all directions. Drains shall be Smith, Zurn, or Josam. 2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES A.Furnish and install all fixtures, including supports, connections, fittings, and any incidentals to make a complete installation. B.Fixtures shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed label trademark indicating first quality. All acid resisting enameled ware shall bear the manufacturer's symbol signifying acid resisting material. C.Vitreous china and acid resisting enameled fixtures, including stops, supplies and traps shall be of one manufacturer by Kohler, American Standard, or Eljer. Supports shall be Zurn, Smith, or Josam. All fixtures shall be white. Faucets shall be Toto, Speakman, Symmons, or Chicago. D.Fixtures shall be as scheduled on drawings. •Water Closet: High efficiency toilet, 1.28 gallon per flush, wall hung, vitreous china, siphon jet. Battery operated 1.28 gallon per flush-flush valve. •Urinal: High efficiency 0.13 gallon per flush urinal, wall hung, vitreous china. Battery operated 0.13 gallon per flush-flush valve. •Lavatory: Wall hung/countertop ADA lavatory with 0.35 GPM metering mixing faucet. •Sink: ADA stainless steel countertop sink with Chicago 201A faucet and 0.5 GPM aerator. •Drinking Fountain: Barrier free hi-low wall mounted electric water cooler, stainless steel basin with bottle filling stations. •Janitor Sink: 24 x 24 x 10 Terrazo mop receptor Stern-Williams or equal. 2.9 WATER HEATERS A.Domestic hot water heating will be provided with an electric water heater. The electric water heater shall have a capacity of 200 gallons, with 18-kW input, 480 volts, 3-phase. Equipment to be manufactured by PVI Industries, AO Smith, Rheem, or approved equal. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PLUMBING 220000 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS A.All work shall be installed in a first-class manner consistent with the best current practices. 1.All piping shall be installed true to line and grade, shall be grouped together, be parallel to each other. Utilize gang hangers wherever feasible. Group all valves together where feasible. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect all materials and equipment during shipment and installation, and properly handle and store at the job site so as to prevent damage, and upon completion of this work, clean all fixtures and equipment and replace damaged parts. 3.3 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A.Furnish and install in masonry walls and floors, galvanized steel sleeves as required. 3.4 TESTING A.Test all work in the presence of the Architect and/or Engineer and as required by local codes. 3.5 CHLORINATION A.Upon completion of the plumbing work, thoroughly chlorinate the entire domestic water system before putting same in service. 3.6 ACCESS DOORS: A.Furnish access doors for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing system that require accessibility. Coordinate types and locations with the Architect. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#92322/Page 1/December 12, 2025 TEL 508-998-5700 FAX 508-998-0883 email: info@g-g-d.com PLUMBING SYSTEMS Schematic Design NARRATIVE REPORT The following is the Plumbing system narrative, which defines the scope of work and capacities of the Plumbing system as well as the Basis of Design. The Plumbing Systems shall be designed and constructed for LEED v4 where indicated on this narrative. 1. CODES A. All work installed under Section 220000 shall comply with the MA Building Code, MA Plumbing Code and all state, county, and federal codes, laws, statutes, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. DESIGN INTENT A. All work is new and consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, facilities, and all operations and adjustments required for the complete and operating installation of the Plumbing work and all items incidental thereto, including commissioning and testing. 3. GENERAL A. The Plumbing Systems that will serve the project are cold water, hot water, sanitary waste and vent system, storm drain system, and natural gas. B. The building will be serviced by Municipal water and Municipal sewer system. C. All Plumbing in the building will conform to Accessibility Codes and to Water Conserving sections of the Plumbing Code. 4. DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Soil, Waste, and Vent piping system is provided to connect to all fixtures and equipment. System runs from 10 feet outside building and terminates with stack vents through the roof. B. Storm Drainage system is provided to drain all roofs with roof drains piped through the building to a point 10 feet outside the building. C. Drainage system piping will be service weight cast iron piping; hub and spigot with gaskets for below grade; no hub with gaskets, bands and clamps for above grade 2 in. and larger. Waste and vent piping 1-1/2 in. and smaller will be type ‘L’ copper. 5. WATER SYSTEM A. A new 4-inch domestic water service from the municipal water system will be provided. A meter and backflow preventer will be provided. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#92322/Page 2/December 12, 2025 B. Cold water distribution main is provided. Non-freeze wall hydrants with integral back flow preventers are provided along the exterior of the building. C. Domestic hot water heating for the building will be provided with a heat pump, electric water heater, 480 volt, 3 phase, 10 HP, with an auxiliary hot water storage tank having a capacity of 318 gallons and a hot water swing tank with a storage capacity of 119 gallons, 480 volt, 3 phase, 12.2 kW; The system shall be equipped with a thermostatically controlled mixing device to control water temperature to the fixtures. A pump will re-circulate hot water from the piping system. The water temperature will be 120 deg. to serve general use fixtures. D. Water piping will be type ‘L’ copper with wrot copper sweat fittings, silver solder or press- fit system. All piping will be insulated with 1 in. thick high-density fiberglass. E. Water sub-meters, monitored by the building management systems, shall be provided to meet LEED submetering requirements. 6. GAS SYSTEM A. A natural gas service will be provided for the building and will serve the emergency generator. B. Gas piping will be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded gas pattern malleable fittings for 2 in. and under and butt-welded fittings for 2-1/2 in. and larger. 7.FIXTURES LEED v4 A. Furnish and install all fixtures, including supports, connections, fittings, and any incidentals to make a complete installation. B. Fixtures shall bear the manufacturer’s guaranteed label trademark indicating first quality. All acid resisting enameled ware shall bear the manufacturer’s symbol signifying acid resisting material. C. Vitreous china and acid resisting enameled fixtures, including stops, supplies and traps shall be of one manufacturer by Kohler, American Standard, or Eljer, or equal. Supports shall be Zurn, Smith, Josam, or equal. All fixtures shall be white. Faucets shall be Speakman, Chicago, or equal. D. Fixtures shall be as scheduled on drawings. Specifications will incorporate high efficiency plumbing fixtures to meet LEED requirements for water conservation. 1. Water Closet: High efficiency toilet, 1.28 gallon per flush, wall hung, vitreous china, siphon jet. Manually operated 1.28 gallon per flush-flush valve. 2. Urinal: High efficiency 0.13 gallon per flush urinal, wall hung, vitreous china. Manually operated 0.13 gallon per flush-flush valve. 3. Lavatory: Wall hung/countertop ADA lavatory with 0.35 GPM metering mixing faucet. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#92322/Page 3/December 12, 2025 4. Sink: MAAB/ADA stainless steel countertop sink with gooseneck faucet and 0.5 GPM aerator. 5. Drinking Fountain: Barrier free hi-low wall mounted electric water cooler, stainless steel basin with bottle filling stations. 6. Janitor Sink: 24 x 24 x 10 Terrazo mop receptor Stern-Williams or equal. 8. DRAINS A. Drains are cast iron, caulked outlets, nickaloy strainers, and in waterproofed areas and roofs shall have galvanized iron clamping rings with 6 lb. lead flashings to bond 9 in. in all directions. Drains shall be Smith, Zurn, Josam, or equal. 9. VALVES A. Locate all valves so as to isolate all parts of the system. Shutoff valves 3 in. and smaller shall be ball valves, solder end or screwed, Apollo, or equal. 10. INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with snap-on fiberglass insulation Type ASJ-SSL, equal to Johns Manville Micro-Lok HP. 11. CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be full size up to 4 in. threaded bronze plugs located as indicated on the drawings and/or where required in soil and waste pipes. 12. ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish access doors for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing system that require accessibility. Coordinate types and locations with the Architect. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 1 Section 230000 HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CODES A. All work installed under Division 230000 shall comply with the State of Massachusetts Building Code and all local, county, and federal codes, laws, statutes, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 DESIGN INTENT AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The work of this Section is shown on the drawings and described within the basis of design narrative and these specifications. All work is new and consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, facilities, and all operations and adjustments required for the complete and operating installation of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning work and all items incidental thereto, including commissioning and testing. B. Capacities of systems and equipment are indicated in the HVAC system narrative. 1.3 GENERAL A. Materials and equipment furnished under this section shall be new, unused, first quality of a manufacturer of established reputation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Hydronic piping shall be Schedule 40 ASTM A-53, black steel pipe with butt welded ends and fittings on 3" and above and threaded ends and fittings on 2-1/2" and smaller. At the contractor option type "L" copper may be used on all 2-1/2" and smaller. B. Refrigerant Piping: Refrigerant piping shall be copper tube; Type ACR, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; brazed joints. At the contractor option Yoga Pipe or equal may be used. 2.3 VALVES A. All valves shall be bronze, brass, or cast iron as system design requires. Locate all valves so as to isolate all parts of the system and as required for normal system operation. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide valves of the following manufacturer: 1. Milwaukee 2. Stockham 3. Nibco 4. Or equal Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 2 2.4 PUMPS A. Base mounted bronze fitted with high efficiency electric motor. Provide primary and stand- by pump for each system with manual alternator and pilot lights. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the contract documents provide pumps of the following manufacturer: 1. Bell & Gossett 2. Taco 3. Armstrong 4. Or equal 2.5 INSULATION A. All piping shall be insulated with snap-on fiberglass insulation (min. 1-1/2” thick) with all service jacket. Fittings shall be insulated with snap on pre-molded covers with loose fill fiberglass insulation. B. All HVAC supply and return ductwork shall be insulated with fiberglass blanket with a foil vapor barrier. All outside air intake ductwork and exhaust ductwork between inline fans or equipment and the point of building exit shall be insulated with 2” rigid fiberglass with foil vapor barrier. C. All Refrigerant piping shall be provided with closed-cell foam insulation. D. Piping insulation thickness shall meet or exceed energy code requirements. 2.6 FIN TUBE RADIATION A. Commercial slope top fin-tube with steel tube and steel fin. Cover shall be 14 ga. with baked enamel factory finish. All units shall be provided with full backplate, damper, end covers, and splice pieces for a complete installation. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide fin-tube radiation of the following manufacturer: 1. Sterling 2. Vulcan 3. Ritling 4. Or equal 2.7 UNIT HEATERS A. Horizontal or cabinet type with exact location to be determined. All units shall be provided with fan and aquastat control. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 3 B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide unit heaters of the following manufacturer: 1. Trane 2. Sterling 3. Rittling 4. Or equal 2.8 RADIANT COOLING/HEATING PANELS A. General: The radiant panels will have a minimum heating output of 55 Btu/Hour/Square Foot at 110°F mean water temperature when the room air temperature is 70°F and a minimum cooling output of 30 Btu/Hour/Square Foot at 60°F mean water temperature when the room air temperature is 75°F. Panels’ widths shall be as indicated or scheduled on the drawings; in general the panels will be 36-48 in width to support lower hot water supply temperatures in the range of 110- 130 deg. F B. Radiant panel shall be manufactured utilizing extruded aluminum strips of approximately 0.115 overall thickness. The strips shall have a minimum 0.495 I.D. copper tube firmly attached to aluminum extrusion under all operating temperature conditions. Ends of tubes shall be swaged to 0.569 I.D. for proper soldering fit of ½ inch Type "L" soft copper tubing. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide coils of one of the following: 1. Price 2. Sterling 3. Rittling 4. Or equal 2.9 WALL MOUNTED RADIATORS A. Commercial radiators are manufactured of cold rolled low carbon steel, fully welded and consisting of header pipes at each end, connected by flat oval water tubes. Radiator shall have a baked enamel factory finish. All units shall be provided with end covers, and splice pieces for a complete installation. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide fin-tube radiation of the following manufacturer: 1. Sterling 2. Runtal 3. Rittling 4. Or equal Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 4 2.10 VAV (VARIABLE AIR VOLUME) TERMINAL BOXES A. VAV Terminal Boxes shall be single duct style with sound trap as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Price 2. Tuttle & Baily 3. Nailor 4. Or equal 2.11 GROUND WATER TO HYDRONIC MODULAR HEAT PUMP HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS/HEATERS A. Provide and install a factory assembled, charged, water-to-water source simultaneous heating/cooling heat pump chiller/heater with heat recovery. Equipment shall be completely assembled, piped, internally wired, fully charged with refrigerant, and test operated at the factory. B. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide liquid chiller unit of the following manufacturer: 1. Multi-Stack 2. WaterFurnace 3. ClimaCool 4. Or equal C. Refer to Geothermal Outline Specification for geothermal wellfield. 2.12 HYDRONIC HEATING & COOLING ROOFTOP & INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS A. All units shall be of the draw thru type provided with hot water heating coil, chilled water cooling coil, total energy recovery wheel with VFD, hot water reheat coil, filters (MERV-14), dampers, and centrifugal supply and return air fan with motor. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide rooftop air handling units of the following manufacturer: 1. Haakon 2. Xnrgy 3. Price 4. SystemAir 5. Or equal 2.13 DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be galvanized steel with all seams sealed. Entire ductwork system shall be fabricated and installed per SMACNA standards and IMC code requirements. B. Ductwork shall be insulated in accordance with energy code requirements. 2.14 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. All devices shall be steel welded construction with diffusing vanes and baked enamel finish. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 5 B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide diffusers, registers, and grills of the following manufacturer: 1. Price 2. Nailor 3. Titus 4. Metalaire 5. Or equal 2.15 DISPLACEMENT DIFFUSERS A. All devices shall be steel welded construction with perforated face and baked enamel finish. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide displacement diffusers of the following manufacturer: 1. Price 2. Nailor 3. Titus 4. Or equal 2.16 EXHAUST FANS A. Exhaust fans shall be galvanized steel construction with centrifugal fan and belt drive motor. Each roof unit shall be provided with 24" high pre-fab curb with motor operated damper in curb. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents provide exhaust fans of the following manufacturer: 1. Greenheck 2. Cook 3. Twin City 4. Or equal 2.17 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS – BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. System shall be web accessible, open protocol (BACnet based) direct digital control (DDC) and building energy management system (EMS) to control and monitor building HVAC and lighting systems. Energy metering shall be installed to monitor the energy usage of building HVAC systems and utilities (electricity and water). B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents, provide automatic temperature controls of the following manufacturer: 1. Trane 2. Johnson Controls 3. Siemens 4. Honeywell 5. Delta 6. Schneider Electric 7. Or equal Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEMS TESTING & BALANCING A. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet specifications, and recording and reporting the results. Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems: 1. Supply air systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust air systems. 4. Outside air systems. 5. Hydronic heating systems. 6. Verify temperature control system operation. B. Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. C. An independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by the AABC or NEBB as a Test and Balance Engineer in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project. 3.2 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Provide markers on all piping, equipment, and ductwork. Tag all valves in system with corresponding valve lists. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS A. All work shall be installed in a first-class manner consistent with the best current practices. 1. All piping shall be installed with slope for proper drainage shall be grouped together, and be parallel to each other. Utilize gang hangers wherever feasible. Group all valves together where feasible. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all materials and equipment during shipment and installation, and properly handle and store at the job site so as to prevent damage, and upon completion of this work, clean all fixtures and equipment and replace damaged parts. 3.5 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Furnish and install in masonry walls and floors, galvanized steel sleeves as required. Provide escutcheons where sleeves and pipe penetrations are exposed to view. 3.6 FIRESAFING A. At all sleeved walls and floors provide firesafe caulking, packing, blanket etc., for a completely tight system to prevent the passage of smoke and fire. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HVAC 230000 - 7 3.7 OPERATION MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Refer to the contract specifications for a complete outline of all requirements of operations and maintenance data. 3.8 RECORD DRAWINGS AND CONTROL DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to the contract specifications project record documents for a complete description of all requirements of recording as built record documents. 3.9 COMMISSIONING: A. The project shall be commissioned per the project Commissioning Agent’s (CxA) specifications. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89360/Page 1/December 12, 2025 TEL 508-998-5700 FAX 508-998-0883 email: info@g-g-d.com HVAC SYSTEM Schematic Design NARRATIVE REPORT The following is the HVAC system narrative, which defines the scope of work and capacities of the HVAC system as well as the Basis of Design. The HVAC systems shall be designed and constructed for LEED for Schools v4 where indicated on this narrative. 1. CODES All work installed under Division 230000 shall comply with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Adopted Building Codes (IBC, IMC, IECC latest Adopted Editions with MA amendments), Massachusetts Municipal Opt-In Specialized Stretch Energy Code 2023, and all local, county, and federal codes, laws, statutes, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. DESIGN INTENT The work of Division 230000 is described within the narrative report. The HVAC project scope of work shall consist of providing new HVAC equipment and systems as described here within. All new work shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, facilities, and all operations and adjustments required for the complete and operating installation of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning work and all items incidental thereto, including commissioning and testing. The HVAC narrative below provides a summary of the selected geothermal displacement HVAC system which shall be developed during schematic design. 3. BASIS OF DESIGN: (MASS CODE) Project weather and Code temperature values are listed herein based on weather data values as determined from ASHRAE weather data tables and the International Energy Conservation Code. Outside: Winter -6 deg. F, Summer 91 deg. F DB 74 deg. F WB Inside: 70 deg. F +/- 2 deg. F for Heating, 75 deg. F +/- 2 deg. F (55% RH) for all Air-conditioned areas (Administration, Nurses Office, Guidance, Cafeteria, Classrooms, Teacher Support, Gym). Unoccupied temperature setback will be provided (60 deg. F heating (adj.), 85 deg. F cooling (adj.). Outside air shall be provided at the rate in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1 and the International Mechanical Code (latest adopted editions) as a minimum. All occupied areas will be designed to maintain 800 PPM carbon dioxide maximum. 4. HVAC SYSTEM OPTION 3 (Geothermal Closed Coupled Heat Recovery Heat Pump Displacement Ventilation System). LEED for School v4 Credit EA Minimum Energy Performance, Optimize Energy Performance, Fundamental Refrigerant Management, IEQ Minimum IAQ Performance, Minimal Acoustic Performance, Enhanced IAQ Strategies, Construction IAQ Management Plan, IAQ Assessment, & Thermal Comfort Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89360/Page 2/December 12, 2025 A. General: A central geothermal ground source water to water heat recovery heat pump chiller plant shall be provided to generate hot water and chilled water for building air handling unit and terminal heating/cooling equipment. Central (indoor or rooftop) hot water and chilled water air handling units with 75% efficient Energy recovery ventilation (ERV) providing Displacement Ventilation to terminal VAV units w/ CO2 DCV (demand control ventilation) and terminal hot water and chilled water dual-temp perimeter passive radiant heating/cooling panels. Exhaust fans would be provided for janitor’s closets, and utility rooms. Ground source heat pump AC units shall be provided for IT Server Rooms, Electric rooms and elevator machine rooms. B. Geothermal Heating and Cooling Plant: 1. Heating and cooling for the entire building will be capable of being provided through the use of a high-efficiency geothermal heating and cooling plant including a modular ground water source to water simultaneous heating/cooling heat recovery heat pump chillers with six (6) 50 nominal ton modules, with two (2) of the modules for heating/cooling backup purposes. The estimated peak loads are 180 tons heating and 200 tons cooling. The heat recovery heat pump efficiency ratings are: COP Heating at 3.5, COP heat recovery at 6.8, COP cooling at 4.7. The heat pump chiller units will be located in the Mechanical Room. The heat pump heat recovery chillers will be provided with ground source condenser water from approximately (35) closed loop type vertical ground source geothermal wells approximately 650-750 feet deep and spaced a minimum of 20-25’ apart from one-another, based on a capacity of 5 tons/well. The final well quantity, depth and distances shall be determined by the geothermal design consultant. 2. The heat pump chiller plant will supply heating hot water to heating equipment and systems located throughout the building through a two-pipe fiberglass insulated schedule 40 black steel and copper piping system. The plant shall supply maximum hot water temperature of 130°F on a design heating day to ventilation air handling units and perimeter hot water heating systems. Primary and standby end suction base mounted pumps will be provided with variable frequency drives for variable volume flow through the water distribution system for improved energy efficiency. In addition to pumps, new hot water accessories including air separators and expansion tanks shall be provided. 3. The heat pump chiller plant will distribute between 45°F and 55°F chilled water to the roof mounted air handling units located throughout the building will distribute between 55°F and 65°F chilled water to the terminal radiant cooling panels units in the fully-air conditioned building. The chilled water distribution piping will be of the fiberglass insulated schedule 40 type and will be completely separate from the hot water distribution piping system. Chilled water pumps and variable frequency drives (which will control down to maintain a minimum flow to the chiller) will be provided for overall variable flow chilled water system distribution. Compensated chilled water pumps with variable frequency drives will be provided for variable flow chilled water system distribution. In addition to pumps, new chilled water accessories including air separators and expansion tanks shall be provided. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89360/Page 3/December 12, 2025 4. Primary and standby geothermal water pumps with variable frequency drives (which will control down to maintain a minimum flow to the heat pump chillers) will be provided for overall variable flow condenser water system distribution. In addition to pumps, new geothermal water accessories including air separators and expansion tanks shall be provided. C. Ventilation air handling equipment: It is proposed that a new air-conditioning displacement ventilation system should be provided to provide air conditioning and ventilation to the occupied areas of the building. 1. New rooftop air handling units with 100% outside air operation capability, supply and return air fans with VFDs, energy recovery wheels, hot water heating (and reheat) coil with modulating valve, chilled water cooling coil, hot water re-heat coil, economizer capability, and MERV 14 filtration will be provided to serve a new full air conditioning displacement ventilation system. Different building rooms and zones shall be provided with a variable volume (VAV) terminal box with combination temperature, humidity, and CO2 sensor controls. The controls will reduce outside air as allowed maintaining a maximum of 800 PPM while providing sufficient ventilation to meet the required heating or cooling load of the spaces served. As VAV boxes modulate, the supply and return air fans associated Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) of the rooftop units will adjust the fan speed based on system static pressure, reducing the energy consumed by the fans. Each room (or zone) shall be provided with low wall or floor mounted supply air displacement diffusers. Classrooms will typically be provided with two individual wall mounted displacement diffusing units between 250 and 400 CFM each (depending on room size). Return air will be drawn back to the units by ceiling return air registers located within the rooms and will be routed back to the rooftop unit by a galvanized sheet metal return air ductwork distribution system. Supplemental ceiling mounted chilled/hot water radiant panels will be provided along exterior walls that shall be interlocked with space enthalpy sensors that shall modulate the control valve of the coil closed when the space enthalpy is above dewpoint conditions. Preliminary RTU Quantities, zones and airflow capacities are as follows: Option 4A.1c (All New Construction – Preferred Solution): RTU-1, (Cafeteria) 6000 CFM Total, 3850 CFM OA, 18 Tons cooling, 120 MBH heating RTU-2: (Upper Classrooms) 4750 CFM 100% OA, 20 Tons cooling, 160 MBH heating RTU-3: (Lower Classrooms) 7000 CFM Total, 100% OA, 30 Tons cooling, 240 MBH heating RTU-4: (Admin/Lobbies) 2400 CFM 100% OA, 10 Tons Cooling, 80 MBH heating RTU-5: (Gym) 6500 CFM Total, 3850 CFM OA, 18 Tons cooling, 115 MBH heating RTU-6: (Media Center) 3500 CFM Total, 850 CFM OA, 8 Tons cooling, 120 MBH heating Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89360/Page 4/December 12, 2025 D. Air Distribution Systems: The building areas are to be served by a fully air conditioned variable volume displacement ventilation air distribution system with supplemental chilled water radiant cooling and heating panel system. New ductwork shall be constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA and IMC requirements. All new supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated per IMC code requirements (R-8). All new Kitchen exhaust fans shall be provided with new Fire- wrapped carbon steel or insulated stainless steel grease ductwork. The admin/nurse’s suite area shall be provided with ventilation air directly supplied to occupied spaces via displacement ceiling diffusers. The media center shall be served via traditional ceiling diffusers. The gymnasium shall be served by exposed ductwork with sidewall high throw registers and low wall returns. E. Exhaust Air Fan Systems: 1. Code required exhaust for the majority of building areas, including toilet rooms, shall be provided through the localized energy recovery ventilation (ERV) systems. 2. Dedicated exhaust air fan systems shall be provided for Kitchen exhaust air (if provided) and Janitor’s closet areas. F. Terminal Heating & Cooling Equipment: Provide new hot and chilled water radiant heating and cooling panels for the perimeter heating and cooling for all fully air conditioned areas (eg. Classrooms, Admin Offices, Guidance, Nurse’s suite, cafeteria) of the building. Classrooms shall be provided with hot/chilled water radiant panels. New hot water radiant heating panels or fin tube radiation shall be provided for perimeter heating of all restrooms with exterior exposure heating loads. Hot water radiation heating equipment shall be provided for all corridors, entryways. Hot water unit heaters shall be provided for all utility rooms. G. Split system AC heat pump units: Provide new ductless split system high efficiency heat pump AC units to serve Elevator machine rooms, and IT and MDF Server rooms. 5. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL HVAC OPTIONS: A. Lobby, Corridor, and Entry Way Heating: New hot water convectors, cabinet unit heaters, and fin tube radiation heating equipment shall be installed to provide heating to building entry way and stairwell areas. Corridors shall be ventilated from adjacent air handling unit systems. Main Corridor and Lobby areas shall be heated and dehumidified by the displacement ventilation systems. For HVAC Option 1 VRF System – Electric terminal heating equipment shall be provided. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89360/Page 5/December 12, 2025 B. Utility Areas: Utility areas will be provided with exhaust air fan systems for ventilation and will typically be heated with horizontal type ceiling suspended hot water or electric unit heaters. The Main Electric Rooms and IDF rooms will be air conditioned by high efficiency ductless AC cooling units. Air source heat pump HVAC options shall utilize air source heat pump and geothermal HVAC options shall use hydronic based heat pumps or fan coil units. C. Testing, Adjusting, Balancing & Commissioning: All new HVAC systems shall be tested, adjusted, balanced and commissioned as art of the project scope. D. Automatic Temperature Controls – Building Energy Management System: A new DDC (direct digital control) Automatic Temperature Control and Building Energy Management System shall be installed to control and monitor building HVAC systems. Energy metering shall be installed to monitor the energy usage of building HVAC systems and utilities (electric, water). The new DDC/ATC system shall be a BACNet open protocol system that is capable of being integrated into the Town Wide Central energy management system. 6. TESTING REQUIREMENTS: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide testing of the following systems with the Owner and Owner’s Representative present: •Heat pump chiller plant system •Condenser (Ground-Source) water plant system •Air handling unit systems including all rooftop units, indoor air handling systems and exhaust air systems •Terminal heating and cooling devices •Variable Refrigerant Flow and Ductless AC Systems •Automatic temperature control and building energy management system B. Testing reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before providing to the Owner. 7. OPERATION MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS When the project is completed, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance manuals to the owner. 8. RECORD DRAWINGS AND CONTROL DOCUMENTS When the project is completed, an as-built set of drawings, showing all mechanical system requirements from contract and addendum items will be provided to the owner. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89360/Page 6/December 12, 2025 9. COMMISSIONING The project shall be commissioned per the Commissioning Section of the specifications. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 1 Section 260000 ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Time, Manner and Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids: Section 01116 – INVITATION TO BID and Section 002216 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. C. The Filed Sub-Bidder for the work of this SECTION 260000 shall list, in Paragraph E, of the FORM FOR SUB-BID, the name of each person, firm, or corporation, whom he proposes to use to perform the following classes of work or part thereof, at the bid price therefore: D. If Sub-Bidder intends to perform with persons of his own staff the classes of work listed above, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore, under Paragraph E, of the FORM FOR SUB-BID. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. Refer to Division 01 for alternates which may affect the work of this Section. E. Refer to Section 012300, Alternates, for alternates, which may affect the work of this Section. 1.3 GENERAL: A. Connections for all building equipment, including mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, elevator, and the like. B. Drilling, coring, and cutting of holes (where the largest dimension thereof does not exceed 12 inches) for electrical conduit systems, and equipment. C. Systems Identification. D. Scaffolding, Rigging, and Staging required for all Electrical Work. E. Fire stopping shall be performed by this contractor. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 2 F. Provide Seismic Restraints for all Electrical Systems conforming to the requirements of State Code. G. Coordination Drawings. H. Provide cable tray, 120 volt power sources, raceways and backboxes for Paging System, Clock System, Voice, Data and Video Systems, etc. as specified in Section 270000 and 120 volt power sources, raceways and backboxes for Security/Intrusion System, Closed Circuit TV (CCTV) System, Card Access System, etc. as specified in Section 280000.. I. Temporary Power and Lighting. 1.4 CODES AND ORDINANCES: A. All material and work provided shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards as most recently amended. 1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code 2. Massachusetts Electric Code 3. State Department of Public Safety 4. NFPA 101 "Life Safety Code" 5. NFPA Standards 6. Standards of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 8. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. Energy Conservation Code 10. Town of North Andover B. Where contract documents indicate more stringent requirements than codes, the contract documents shall take precedence. C. Permits: Be responsible for filing documents, and securing of inspection and approvals. Pay all local connection & permit fees. Utility Company backcharges related to permanent service will be paid directly by the City. Costs related to temporary service, refer to Section 015000. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT: A. Motors: Each motor shall have disconnect switch and starter provided under this section. Starters which are a part of "factory assembled" control panel will be provided under section supplying equipment to be controlled but connected under this section. 1. Provide motor terminal boxes for each motor not furnished with same. B. Disconnect Switches: 1. Disconnect (safety) switches shall conform to industrial standards of NEMA, be UL listed and shall be heavy duty type, quick-make, quick-break type with interlocking cover mechanism and provisions for padlocking switch handle in "OFF" position. Three pole toggle switches are not acceptable as substitute for disconnect switches. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 3 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. General Electric b. Westinghouse c. Square D/Groupe Schneider d. Siemens e. Allen Bradley f. Or equal C. Fuses: 1. Provide a complete set of fuses for each item of fusible type equipment. Fusible equipment furnished by other contractors will be complete with fuses, unless noted otherwise on electrical drawings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bussmann, Division of McGraw b. Gould/Shawmut c. GEC-ALSTHOM d. Or equal 2.2 MAIN BUILDING SWITCHBOARD: A. Main building switchboard shall be constructed in accordance with UL 891 and ANSI standards and of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal enclosed rigid structure. The front shall be accessible. Buses shall be copper. B. Switchboard shall be arranged for operation as follows: 1. Voltage - 480Y/277 volts 2. Amperes – 2,000 amps 3. Frequency - 60 cycles 4. Service - 3 phase, 4 wire, ampere capacity as indicated on drawings. 5. Neutral - full capacity 6. Available short circuit current at line terminals - 65,000 RMS amperes symmetrical. 7. Integrated equipment rating - 65,000 AIC 8. Copper ground bus, full length 9. UL service entrance label 2.3 PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall be dead-front, door in door safety type equipped with single or multi-pole circuit breakers suitable for 120/208 volt or 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire operation. B. Buses shall be copper. Panelboards shall have a circuit directory card mounted in a frame with plastic cover on inside of door. Panelboards to have a copper ground bus with terminals for each circuit. Panelboards serving isolated ground receptacles shall have a separate ground bus for terminations of the isolated grounds. The isolated ground bus shall be mounted to the panel tub via non-conducting means with a separate grounding conductor run to the normal panel ground bus. C. Panelboards and distribution panels shall be of same manufacturer as switchboard. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 4 2.4 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS: A. Dry-type transformers shall be 480 volt, 3 phase, delta connected primary and 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire wye connected secondary with grounded neutral. They shall be of the KVA size, voltage rating, and characteristics as shown on the drawings. Transformers 75KVA and larger shall have minimum impedance of 4-1/2%. Transformers feeding panels with surge suppressors shall be K-13 rated. B. Provide grounding of separately derived systems in accordance with Code Article 250-26. C. Transformers shall be of same manufacturer as switchboard. 2.5 ELECTRIC SERVICE: A. Primary, secondary and low tension ductbanks, manholes, handholes, etc. B. Secondary distribution equipment, including secondary switchboard and metering, motor controls, dry-type transformers, distribution panels, and panelboards, including feeders and subfeeders. C. Excavation and backfill within building foundation walls for any underground raceways. D. Coordinate and cooperate with Utility Co., with respect to providing service and metering. E. Provide all primary system raceways, elbows, pull wires and all pad grounding. Utility company will provide vault type transformers and primary conductors including making up of all terminations and connections. F. Metering: All usage will be on one secondary meter. Utility Company will furnish current transformers and potential transformers to be installed in switchboard by contractor. Empty raceway with pull wire from the C/T compartment to the meter backboard shall be provided. Meter shall have KYZ output. 2.6 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Raceways - General: 1. No raceway shall be used smaller than 3/4" diameter and shall have no more than four (4) 90 deg. bends in any one run, and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided. Only rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit is allowed for in-slab work. Cable systems, if allowed to be used by other sections of this specification, shall not be used exposed or in slabs, whether listed by "UL" for such use or not. 2. Rigid metal conduit, may be used for service work, exterior work, slab work, and below grade level slab, wet locations, and in penthouse for drops down to equipment from elevations above eight feet and also where raceway may be subject to mechanical damage. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), may be used in masonry block walls, stud partitions, above furred ceilings, where exposed but not subject to mechanical damage, and shall be used for fire alarm work. 4. Surface metal raceways shall be used where raceways cannot be run concealed. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 5 5. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections to recessed lighting fixtures from above ceiling junction boxes and for final flexible connections to motors and other rotating or vibrating equipment. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for the above connections which are located in moist locations. All flexible connections shall include an insulated grounding conductor. 6. Rigid non-metallic conduit may be used at the contractors option for underground electric and telephone services outside the foundation wall and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40, 90oC. If option of rigid non-metallic conduit is exercised, underground runs outside the foundation wall shall be concrete encased at electrical contractors expense. 7. PVC Schedule 40 may also be used for below slab circuits within building confines and site lighting branch circuits. Below slab rigid non-metallic conduits do not require concrete encasement. Rigid non-metallic conduits shall not be used for exterior feeders, in slabs, nor for elbows which penetrate slabs. Raceways and fittings shall be produced by same manufacturer. 8. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Pittsburgh Standard Conduit Company b. Republic Steel and Tube c. Youngstown Sheet and Tube Company d. Carlon e. Or equal 2.7 OUTLETS, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Outlets: 1. Each outlet in wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit conditions encountered. Boxes installed in normally wet locations or surface mounted shall be of the cast-metal type having hubs. Concealed boxes shall be cadmium plated or zinc coated sheet metal type. Old work boxes with Madison clamps not allowed in new construction. Thru the wall boxes are not permitted. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Appleton b. Crouse Hinds c. Steel City d. RACO e. Or equal B. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Where indicated on plans, and where necessary to terminate, tap off, or redirect multiple raceway runs or to facilitate conductor installation, furnish, and install appropriately designed boxes. Boxes shall be fabricated from code gauge steel assembled with corrosion resistant machine screws. Box size shall be as required by Code. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Brasch b. Hoffman c. Keystone d. Lee Products Co. e. McKinstry Inc. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 6 f. Eldon Inc. g. Or equal 2.8 CONDUCTORS: A. All conductors shall be a minimum size of #12 AWG except for control wiring and fire alarm wiring where #14 AWG may be used. For all exit sign circuits, normal/emergency and/or emergency only circuits, exterior lighting circuits, and also where distance from panelboard to first outlet exceeds 80' for 120 volts and 150’ for 277 volts, #10 AWG shall be minimum size wire allowed. All feeder and branch circuit conductor shall be color coded as follows: 1. 208Y/120V Phase A Black 2. 208Y/120V Phase B Red 3. 208Y/120V Phase C Blue 4. 480Y/277V Phase A Brown 5. 480Y/277V Phase B Orange 6. 480Y/277V Phase C Yellow 7. Grounded Conductor120/208 White 277/480 Grey 8. Equipment Ground 120/208 Green 277/480 Green with Yellow Trace B. All conductors not installed in accordance with color scheme shall be replaced. All conductors larger than #6 AWG must be identified with colored tape. C. Connections throughout the entire job shall be made with solderless type devices. 1. For #10 AWG and smaller: spring type. 2. For #8 AWG and larger: circumferential compression type. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. 3M "Scotchlock" b. IDEAL "Wingnut" c. BURNDY d. MAC e. Or equal 4. Any splices made up in ground mounted pull boxes shall be resin cast waterproof type or waterproof pressure type, as manufactured by King Technology, St. Louis, MO. D. Conductors shall be copper, soft drawn, and annealed of 98% conductivity. Conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be stranded; #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts and be of following types: 1. All conductors shall have heat/moisture resistant thermoplastic insulation type THHN/THWN (75oC) except as follows: a. In sizes #1 AWG and larger: Crosslinked polyethylene insulation type XHHW (75 deg. C – 90 deg. C) may be used. b. Fire alarm system conductors shall be #14 AWG, type THHN, solid. Color coding of fire alarm conductors shall be in accordance with fire codes. c. Fixture whips #16AWG type "SF". Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 7 E. Stranded conductors for all wiring systems except fire alarm will be allowed if installed and terminated as specified under Execution Section. F. Conductors 100Amperes and higher may be Aluminum, unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. All conductor and conduit sizing shown on the drawings is done using copper conductors, where the electrical contractor utilizes Aluminum conductors for feeders 100Amperes or higher it is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to convert the feeder size and conduit size to comply with NEC aluminum conductor ampacity based on NEC 310.15(B)(16). Utilize conduit fill tables in the NEC to size conduit for aluminum conductors. G. Mineral-Insulated Metal-Sheathed Fire-Resistive Cables (Type MI) - Cables shall consist of a factory assembly of one or more solid copper conductors insulated with highly-compressed magnesium oxide and enclosed in a seamless, liquid-and-gas-tight continuous copper sheath. Cables shall be rated for 600 volts and less. Cables shall comply with Article 330 of the National Electrical Code. Cables shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as having a 2-hour fire resistive rating. Cable terminations shall be made with UL listed mineral-insulated cable fittings. Approved Manufacturer - Pyrotenax USA, Inc., or equal. H. Type MC cable may be used for concealed branch circuits in hollow spaces where allowed by code if installed and terminated as specified under Execution Section. Armor to be galvanized steel, and shall be UL listed for 2 hour thru-wall fire penetration. I. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. American Flexible Conduit Company 2. American Wire & Cable 3. Anaconda 4. Cerro 5. Cornish 6. Cresent 7. Essex 8. Okonite 9. Rome 10. Or equal 2.9 SLEEVES, INSERTS, AND OPENINGS: A. Sleeves: Provide sleeves of proper sizes for all openings required in concrete floors and walls. Sleeves passing through floors shall be set with top of sleeve 1" above finished floor. Core drilling will also be acceptable if in accordance with any structural standards. Any unsleeved openings shall be waterproofed. 2.10 FLOOR OUTLETS (FLUSH TYPE): A. Section includes flush floor boxes equal to Wiremold RFB Series. B. Quality Assurance 1. Electrical Raceways and Components: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, NEC, UL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways and components. Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 100. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 8 C. Floor Boxes 1. RFB4 and RFB4-4DB Series Floor Boxes: Manufactured from stamped steel and approved for use on above grade floors. The box shall be 12-3/4 in. L x 10 in. W x 3- 7/16 in. H [324mm x 254mm x 87mm]. Provide the box with four (4) independent wiring compartments that allow capacity for up to four duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services. The RFB4 Series Box shall permit tunneling from end power compartment to end power compartment. The RFB4-4DB Series Box shall permit tunneling from adjacent or opposite compartments. Two (2) of the four (4) compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 16.4 cu in [269cu cm], one (1) compartment shall have a minimum capacity of 32.3 cu in [529cu cm], and one (1) compartment shall have a minimum capacity of 50 cu in [820cu cm]. Four (4) compartments shall have a minimum of two (2) inches of space behind the device plates. The box shall include the following number of conduit knockouts: one (1) 1/2- inch [12.7mm], three (3) 1-inch [25mm], six (6) 3/4-inch [19.1mm], and six (6) 1-1/4- inch [32mm]. The box shall be fully adjustable, providing a maximum of 1-7/8-inch [47.7mm] pre-pour adjustment, and a maximum of 3/4-inch [19.1mm] after-pour adjustment. The box shall include a series of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices as well as plates that will accommodate Ortronics® workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters, Legrand AVIP audio/video device plates, and other open system devices. D. Activation Covers 1. FloorPort FPCT, FPBT, and FPFFT Series Covers: Manufactured of die-cast aluminum or die-cast zinc, and available in brushed aluminum finish and powder- coated paint finishes (black, gray, bronze, nickel and brass). Activation covers shall be available in flanged and flangeless versions. Covers shall be available with options for tile or carpet inserts, or flush covers. The cover’s hinge shall allow for the cover to open 180 degrees. The furniture feed covers shall come equipped with one 1-inch trade size screw plug opening and one combination 1-1/4-inch and 2-inch trade size screw plug. a. Flanged covers shall be 7-3/4 in. L x 6-9/16 in. W [197mm x 167mm]. b. Flangeless covers shall be 6-3/4 in. L x 5-9/16 in. W [171mm x 142mm]. E. Communication Modules Mounting Accessories 1. The floor box manufacturer shall provide a complete line of faceplates and bezels to facilitate mounting of UTP, STP (150 ohm), fiber optic, coaxial, and communication devices. The box shall provide a series of device mounting plates that will accommodate Ortronics workstation connectivity outlets and modular adapters, and other open system devices. F. Installation 1. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent electrical hazards. 2. Mechanical Security: Raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation sheets. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 9 3. Accessories: Provide accessories as required for a complete installation, including insulated bushings and inserts where required by manufacturer. 4. Unused Openings: Close unused box openings using manufacturer's recommended accessories. 2.11 WIRING DEVICES: A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: a. Cooper Wiring Devices. b. Hubbell. c. Leviton. d. Pass & Seymour. e. Or equal B. Straight Blade Receptacles: 1. Duplex Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration NEMA5- 20R, UL 498 and FS W-C-596. Specification grade industrial series, straight-blade, 2 pole 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired, nylon face, rated for 120 volts, 20 amperes. Hubbell No.5362 or equal. Hubbell No.5362WR or equal for weather- resistant listed receptacles. Receptacles that are controlled by an automatic control device shall be marked per NEC with the international power symbol. Provide as indicated on the drawings with one controlled face and split circuit hot tab equal to Hubbell BR20C1 series. 2. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles: Duplex receptacles conforming to UL 943, specification grade heavy duty, feed-through type, rated for 120 volt, 20 amperes, NEMA 5-20R, GFI Class "A" with a sensitivity to leakage 5 milliamps, weather- resistant and tamper-resistant listed. Hubbell No. GF20LA or equal. 3. Transient-Voltage Surge-Suppressor (TVSS) Receptacles: Duplex type, NEMA 5-20R configuration, with integral transient-voltage surge protection in a minimum of 3 modes: line-to-ground, line-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground; listed as complying with UL 1449. Hubbell HBL5362SA or equal. 4. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Specification grade, straight-blade, 2 pole 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Listed as tamper- resistant with “T” marking. Hubbell BR20TR or equal. 5. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device, with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Hubbell CR 5253IG or equal. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 10 6. Duplex Receptacles with Integral USB jacks, 125 V, 20 A: Specification grade, straight-blade, 2 pole 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. “USB” marking indicates USB receptacle duplex grounding type NEMA 5-20R equal to Hubbell MX20X2 or equal C. All standard 15 and 20 ampere, 125 and 250 volt non-locking type receptacles located 5 ft. -6 in. or below within Auditorium, Gymnasium, Pre-schools and elementary school age classrooms, medical clinic areas, dental offices and any other areas that are listed in NEC 406.12 shall be tamper resistant type receptacles whether indicated or not by the “T” marking on the drawings. D. Exterior Outlets with Lockable Covers: 1. Provide exterior outlets with lockable covers at all exterior outlet locations. Provide GFCI Circuit Breakers on all branch circuits. Provide in-use weatherproof locking covers with cord retention. Provide Taymac MX3200 for single gang vertical MX3300 for single gang horizontal and MX6200 for double duplex. a. Equal manufacturers 1) RACO 2) Hubbell 3) Or equal E. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles: 1. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2) Appleton Electric. 3) Hubbell. 4) KH Industries. 5) Or equal F. Twist-Locking Receptacles: 1. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V and 250 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD6 and UL 498. Hubbell HBL2310 (L5-20R), HBL2320 (L6-20R), or equal. G. Cord Reels 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hubbell. b. Cooper Crouse-Hinds. c. Appleton Electric. d. KH Industries. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 11 2. Industrial grade retractable power cord reel with the following features: a. Cast Aluminum construction, including mounting base b. 12 position adjustable guide arm c. Adjustable ratchet can be engaged (positive lock) or disengaged (constant tension) as needed d. Adjustable ball stop e. 6’ Feeder Cord included f. White powder-coat finish g. Universal mounting overhead, wall or detached from bracket completely. h. Adjustable cable stop. i. Voltage 125 VAC j. Slip Ring Rating 600V/30A k. Payout End Blk Duplex/Duplex Outlet Box l. Feeder End 5-20P m. Max. Amperage 20 Amps n. Gauge/Conductor 12/3 o. Cord Length 25 Feet p. Mounting Bracket with 340 deg. pivot base. q. Cord Type/Color SJO/White Cord Reel r. Color White s. Hubbell Model#HBLI25123GF220M1 or equal. 3. For WP Cord Reel provide as follows: a. Hubbell Model#HBLW25123 or equal. b. Hubbell Model#HBLPOB1 receptacle enclosure c. Install two duplex receptacles in receptacle enclosure. d. Provide GFCI type circuit breaker for all WP Cord Reels H. Snap Switches: 1. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. 2. Switches, heavy duty, side wired, 120/277V, 20A: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way). b. Hubbell; C1221 (single pole), C1222 (two pole), C1223 (three way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way). I. Securely fasten wiring devices in place, plumb, level, and true to finished lines and surfaces. J. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. K. Provide gaskets on all wiring device plates where devices are on walls separating conditioned and non-conditioned spaces and exterior walls. L. Composition material of wiring devices to be nylon with ivory finish. Outlets intended for computer use shall be grey finish, outlets on emergency shall be red finish. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 12 M. Wall Plates: 1. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. a. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. b. Material for Finished Spaces: White- finish Type 302 stainless steel. c. Material for Finished Spaces installed in concrete: Satin-finished Type 302 stainless steel. d. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. e. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." 2. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum. N. Finishes: 1. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers as specified do not designate device color. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Grey for computer circuits white for convenience receptacles other devices as selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by referenced Electrical Code or device listing. 3. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. 2.12 LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. Provide lighting fixtures complete with LED sources, drivers, and other devices as required for a first class installation. Furnish Ceiling Subcontractor with instructions concerning openings necessary, and provide frames for NEMA standard ceiling types or special mounting frames, as may be required. Fixtures shall be supported independently of hung ceiling construction. B. LED Assemblies 1. LED luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 and to UL 8250 – Safety Standard for Light- Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products. 2. Products shall be lead and mercury free. 3. Photometric characteristics shall be established using IESNA LM-79-08, IESNA Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products. 4. Color characteristics of LED luminaires shall be as follows in accordance with ANSI C78.377 – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. 5. LED and driver cooling system shall be passive and shall resist the buildup of debris. 6. LED luminaire output after 50,000 hours of operation shall be not less than 70 percent of the initial lumen output when determined in accordance with IESNA LM-80-08 – IESNA approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting Sources C. Provide universal arrows on all exit signs and punch out directions as shown on floor plans. D. Pendant mounted fixtures shall be suspended by means of air craft cable with aligner and canopy in finished areas or threaded rods in non-public areas. Length of suspension method to be as required to mount fixtures at the elevations called for or as otherwise shown on drawings or architectural elevations. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 13 E. Fixture types shall be as scheduled. 2.13 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM: A. The basis of system design shall utilize non-propriety industry standard 0-10V dimming or fixed output ballasts and/or 0-10V LED drivers, occupancy sensors, and daylight sensors 2.14 DUAL TECHNOLOGY CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSORS: A. Dual technology occupancy sensors shall be capable of detecting occupants within the coverage area designated via detection of a doppler shift in the transmitted ultrasonic sound wave and a change in the infrared heat present. Major motion and minor motion shall cause the controlled load to switch to the “ON” mode. B. The dual technology passive infrared sensor shall use a multi-level 100 segment Fresnel lens and four pyroelectric detectors to insure adequate PIR coverage of the intended area. C. Dual technology sensors shall have on override to “ON” bypass logic key in the event of sensor failure. D. Sensors are to be ceiling mounted using a back mounting plate and standard electrical outlet boxes. E. Dual technology sensors shall cover up to 2000 sq. ft. for walking motion, with a field of view of 360 degrees. F. Dual technology sensors shall be compatible with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. 2.15 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS A. Telephone system instruments and interconnecting wiring will be provided by the ITS Contractor. Data system outlets and interconnecting wiring will be provided by the ITS Contractor. B. For each telephone outlet or data outlet indicated on the drawings, provide a 4” square flush outlet box. In insulated partitions, provide a 1" raceway stubup terminating with bushing to above nearest accessible hung ceiling. 2.16 TWO WAY COMMUNICATIONS CALL BOXES A. Summary 1. Section Includes: Area of Refuge Base Stations, call boxes and signage a. The Area of Refuge Base Station is to be located at a central control point on the first floor or as determined by local Authority having jurisdiction. Rath Call Boxes are to be located on all floors above and below the first floor, ideally next to a stairwell emergency exit on each floor. b. The Area of Refuge Base Station must be capable of handling a minimum of 5 Rath Call Boxes. Visual indicators on the base station allow Rescue personnel to know which Area of Rescue Call Box needs assistance. The Base Station must allow Rescue personnel to speak to all Call Boxes or individual Call Boxes. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 14 c. The Emergency communication hardware shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). The phone shall have the ability to be programmed with up to 5 emergency phone numbers. Upon activation of the emergency push button, a call will be automatically placed to the Base Station. If no one answers at the Base Station, the Call Box must dial a secondary location outside the building to activate two way off-site person to person voice communications. B. Manufacturers 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rath Area of Refuge b. Aiphone c. Housing Devices, Inc. d. Or Equal. 2.17 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS A. Provide a complete power system consisting of branch circuits, motor disconnect switches, pushbutton stations, motor starters, and other devices to connect up and leave in operating condition each piece of electrically operated equipment provided either under this section or other Divisions. B. All control wiring not indicated in the electrical specifications or not shown on electrical drawings will be provided by Temperature Control Subcontractor. 2.18 IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment shall be marked for ease of identification as follows. 1. Provide screw-on nameplates on switchboards, panelboards, F.A. terminal cabinets, starters, and disconnect switches. Nameplates to be of black phenolic with white engraving. For starters and disconnect switches lettering shall be minimum of 1/4" high. 2. Space neatly typed directory cards listing circuit designations shall be fastened inside the cover of panelboards. Spare circuits shall be penciled. 3. Wiring device plates on devices connected to normal-emergency circuits shall be red in color. 4. All conductors in boxes larger than standard outlet boxes, in all wireways, trench headers, etc. shall be grouped logically and be identified. 5. Grounding conductors and neutrals shall be labeled in panels, wireways, etc. as to circuits associated with. 2.19 GROUNDING SYSTEM: A. All equipment and systems shall be grounded. Refer especially to NEC Section 250 Requiring Connections to Building Steel, Foundation, Water Service, and Interior Piping. Provide transformer pad grounding to be in accordance with utility company standards. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 15 2.20 STANDBY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Provide one 375 KW, 468.75 KVA at .8 PF standby power rated natural gas fired generator set mounted in perfect alignment on an all welded, fabricated steel sub-base which shall allow for attachment of all necessary engine and generator accessories. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Caterpillar b. Onan c. Kohler d. Or equal B. Generator Alternates: C. Generator: 750 KW, 937.5 KVA, 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, 1800 RPM revolving field type main generator with brushless exciter. Voltage regulation +1%. D. Generator Control Panel: 1. To completely control operation of engine generator set. Panel to have automatic start control, AC volt meter, AC ammeter, pointer type frequency meter, volt meter, ammeter and selector switch. E. Automatic Transfer Switch: 1. Provide automatic transfer switches for operation on 277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire operation. Unit to be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. a. Entire switch shall be listed under UL 1008. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Russ Electric RMTD (4 Pole) b. ASCO (with overlapping neutral contacts) c. Onan d. Kohler e. Or equal F. Remote Annunciator Panel: A flush mounted panel shall include a visual signal that battery charger is functioning properly and both audible and visual signals. Annunciator shall meet NFPA 110 Standards. G. Generator shall be housed in a weatherproof sound attenuated aluminum enclosure. 2.21 ACCESS PANELS: A. Provide access panels for access to concealed junction boxes and to other concealed parts of system that require accessibility for operation and maintenance. In general, electrical work shall be laid out so access panels are not required. B. Access panels shall be prime painted and equipped with screwdriver operated cam locks. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 16 C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Inland Steel Products Company - Milcor 2. Miami Carey 3. Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin, Inc. - Way Locator 4. Or equal 5. Specific types: a. Acoustical Tile Ceiling "Milcor Type AT" b. Plastered Surfaces “Milcor Type K" c. Masonry Construction "Milcor Type M" d. Drywall Construction "Milcor Type DW” 2.22 Fire Alarm and Detection System: (Voice evacuation required with integral amplifiers, signal circuits and power supplies – no remote booster panels). System design is based on a main FACP serving multiple floors with local mode transponders remotely located, also serving multiple floors. A. Description: 1. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 2. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of latest NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. 3. The fire alarm manufacturer shall be of the highest caliber and insist on the highest quality. The system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994. 4. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100 percent by a single U.S. manufacturer (or division thereof) wherever possible. 5. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and shall be in compliance with the UL listing. 6. Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to the Fire Command Center (FCC) and designated personnel in other buildings at the site via a multiplex communication 7. The system supplier shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide the final check-out, perform all head end panel connections and to ensure the systems integrity. 8. FACP shall contain digital amplifiers for proper voice message requirements. 2.23 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES: A. Furnish and install surge protective devices with ratings of 120,000 amperes on the secondary side of the main service overcurrent device and 80,000 amperes on panelboards feeding computer equipment. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 17 2.24 LADDER TRAY: A. Provide 12" wide aluminum ladder tray with 9" rung spacing with 6" side rail. Ladder tray shall be as manufactured by B-Line. “Ladder Type”. Provide all hangers required. 2.25 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY: A. General: Provide a three phase, on-line, solid state uninterruptible power system hereafter referred to as the UPS. The system consists of a solid state inverter, rectifier/battery charger, a static switch, an internal maintenance bypass switch, an internally assembled battery cabinet and synchronizing circuitry as described herein. B. UPS Requirements and Performance Characteristics: 1. Ratings – 30kVA/27kW 2. Input Requirements: a. Voltage: 208, 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground ± 15% C. Output Characteristics: 1. Voltage: a. 208Y/120, 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground. Output voltage adjustable ± 3%. 2.26 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM: A. Work Included: Lightning preventor systems for buildings and associated structures consisting of ESE lightning protection air terminal, mast, bonding, interconnecting conductors and grounding. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Grounding, Section 26 05 26. 2. Referenced Standards a. HBP-21 – Manufacturers: Installation standard for lightning protection systems using early streamer emission air terminal. b. NFPA 70 2017 C. System Description 1. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and services to perform all operations required for the complete installation and related work as specified herein for Early Streamer Emission System. Refer to drawings for locations and quantities. 2. Any such work included in any other section of these specifications that is not specifically described therein shall comply with the requirements of this section. 3. The following items of work are specifically included in, but not necessarily limited to, the work of this section without limiting the generality implied by these specifications: a. ESE lightning protection air terminal b. Mast, complete with base and supports c. Down conductors d. Grounds Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 18 e. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression f. Description of System D. The ESE installer shall provide a complete installation of equipment to comprise a complete system against damage by lightning. The ESE installer shall be responsible for all material and labor to accomplish this result. E. The system, including the ESE air terminal, conductors, mast and complementary parts, shall be installed so that completed work is unobtrusive and does not detract from the building appearance. F. Protect entire building, including roof projections, and roof-mounted equipment. 1. Building Construction: Metal-framed building less than 75 feet (23 m) in height. 2. Building Occupancy: Educational. 2.27 PUBLIC SAFETY RADIO DISTRIBUTION ANTENNA SYSTEM (DAS) A. This specification describes the criteria for deploying an Public Safety Radio Distributed Antenna System (DAS). The DAS components specified in this document include: Bi- Directional Amplifiers (BDA), Donor Antennas, Coverage Antennas, Coax Cable, Coax Connectors, Splitters, Combiners and Couplers. These devices shall be used as part of a system, by the DAS integrator, experienced with designing projects for in-building, public safety, 2-way radio systems. B. The system specified is based upon TX/RX Systems Bird Technologies Group RescueLine Signal Booster and represents the performance standard upon which any equivalent solution shall be based. It shall be the integrator’s responsibility to base the design on the frequency ranges used by and the Fire department. The system provided shall meet IFC 2009 and NFPA 1 2009 codes and shall be designed as such. It shall include a true, integrated battery backup unit which is serially connected to the main BDA system. A remote monitor display panel shall also be included and shall be located in the emergency command center to annunciate all 5 potential conditions of the BDA system. The 5 conditions to be monitored include: Nornal AC Power, Signal Booster Trouble, Loss of Normal AC Power, Failure of Battery Charger, Low Battery Power. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS: A. Retain possession of and be responsible for spare parts, portable and detachable parts, and other removable portions of installation including fuses, keys, locks, blocking clips, inserts, lamps, instructions, drawings, and other devices or materials that are relative to and necessary for proper operation and maintenance of the system until final acceptance, at which time such parts shall be installed or turned over to the Owner, as the case may be. 3.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: A. Provide proper guards, signage, and other necessary construction required for prevention of accidents and to insure safety of life and property. Remove any temporary safety precautions at completion. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 19 3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHTS: A. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at the following heights unless noted or detailed otherwise on drawings. Notes on architectural drawings shall supersede those noted below or detailed on the electrical drawings. If mounting height of an electrical component is questionable, obtain clarification from Architect before installation. 1. Duplex convenience outlets, microphone outlets, and telephone outlets - 18 inches. 2. Light switches, pushbutton stations, HOA switches, and all other toggle or control switches for the operation of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, plumbing, and general service - 48 inches. 3. Clock outlets - 84 inches. 4. Fire alarm pullstations - 48 inches. 5. Fire alarm audio visual signals - 80 inches or 6 inches below ceiling, whichever is lower. 6. Panelboards for lighting, power, telephone, and other auxiliary systems - 78" to top. B. Mounting heights given are from finished floor to centerline. In the case of a raised floor, surface of raised floor is the finished floor. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION METHODS: A. Fastenings: 1. Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice. B. General Raceway Installation: 1. Install the various types of raceways in permitted locations as previously specified. All raceways shall be run concealed. Consult Architect for instruction for raceways which must be exposed in public spaces. 3.5 BRANCH CIRCUITS: A. Provide all branch circuit wiring and outlets for a complete and operating system. The system shall consist of insulated conductors connected to the panelboards and run in raceways or as cable systems if permitted under products section, as required to the final outlet and shall include outlet boxes, supports, fittings, receptacles, plates, fuses, etc. 3.6 FIREPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING: A. Fireproof and waterproof all openings in slabs and walls to maintain the original rating of same. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. All cutting of surfaces, including core drilling of walls and slabs, shall be done by Electrical Subcontractor. Openings through new wall surfaces will be provided by General Contractor if Electrical Subcontractor gives suitable notice as erection of surface proceeds. If suitable notice is not given, Electrical Subcontractor shall then be responsible for cost of corrective work required. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti December 12, 2025 ELECTRICAL 260000 - 20 3.8 ELEVATOR COORDINATION: A. Elevator Electrical Work: 1. Several items pertaining to elevator electrical system shall be provided by Electrical Subcontractor as follows: a. Power source to elevator machine room including fused disconnect switch and wiring between disconnect switch and controller for each elevator fused disconnect switch (120 volt) for elevator signal system and cab light for each cab light, switch, and GFCI receptacle in each pit and machine room. b. Control modules from fire alarm system for elevator recall to prevent cab opening on a fire floor. c. Junction box in machine room for cab telephone and paging system. 3.9 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COORDINATION: A. The Mechanical System Subcontractor will be providing various items of mechanical services equipment and control apparatus. In general, Electrical Subcontractor shall connect up power wiring to this equipment. Equipment provided by Mechanical System Subcontractors will include built-in disconnecting means and overcurrent protection unless shown otherwise on drawings. This does not include terminal boxes. 3.10 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT TESTING: A. All dry type transformers, individual motor starters, switchboard and main distribution panels, motor controls, motor control centers, feeder conductors, and emergency systems shall be tested in accordance with the following. In general, all tests shall be done in accordance with the 1995 Acceptance Testing Specifications of the International Electrical Testing Association. B. Grounding Grids or Electrodes: Measurement of resistance from ground grids or electrodes to earth to determine adequacy of grounding system in building and compliance with specifications and/or electrical code. C. Settings of Adjustable Devices: Using the result of the fault current and coordination study specified hereinafter, the Testing Contractor shall set all adjustable devices. END OF DOCUMENT Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 1/August 26, 2025 TEL 508-998-5700 FAX 508-998-0883 email: info@g-g-d.com ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Schematic Design for Cost Estimate NARRATIVE REPORT The following is the Electrical Systems narrative, which defines the scope of work and capacities of the Power and Lighting System, as well as, the Basis of Design. The Electrical Systems shall be designed and constructed for LEED for Schools where indicated on this narrative. 1.CODES All work installed under Section 260000 shall comply with the Massachusetts State Building Code and all local, county, and federal codes, laws, statutes, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.DESIGN INTENT The work of Section 260000 is as described in this narrative. All work is new and consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, facilities, and all operations and adjustments required for the complete and operating installation of the electrical work and all items incidental thereto, including commissioning and testing. 3.SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS AND INTERACTIONS A.Classroom and Corridor lighting will be controlled via “addressable relays”, which is achieved through programming networked controls. The control of the relays will be by automatic means, such as an occupancy sensor in each classroom. The system will have a BacNet gateway and will be interfaced with the DDC control system for scheduled functions. The controllability shall be in conformance with credit LEED credit IEQ Interior Lighting B.Automatic control of receptacles based on occupancy will be provided for at least 50% of the receptacles installed in private offices, open offices, conference rooms, rooms used primarily for printing and/or copying functions, break rooms, individual workstations, and classrooms. Controlled receptacles will be marked per NEC 406.3 (E). C.Exterior lighting will be controlled by photocell “ON” and “scheduled” for “OFF” operation. The parking area lighting will be controlled by “zones” with dimmable capability. Exterior lights will be addressable and dimmable. Fixtures will be designed and programmed to turn on at dusk utilizing photo sensor input. Fixture shall be turned off based on scheduled preference typically 5AM-6AM. Fixture output shall be scheduled to be reduced by 50% after 12AM. Additional schedule functionality shall be provided based on end user input. D.Emergency and Exit lighting will be run through life safety panels and will be “ON” during normal power conditions, as well as power outage conditions. The emergency lighting system will have time control so that lights are “ON” only when the building is occupied. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 2/August 26, 2025 4.DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEMS A.Utilities: 1.The new building will be supplied with utility power from the utility company National Grid. The new service will be fed via underground primary duct bank to a pad mounted utility company owned liquid filled transformer. 2.The service electrical transformer will be furnished, installed, owned and maintained by National Grid, and it will be located adjacent to the building as shown on the civil drawings. The transformer will be of the pad- mounted type with a primary voltage of 13.8 kV and a secondary voltage of 480Y/277 volts. The transformer will be sized by the utility company based on the load data provided by The Design team. 3.Concrete pad and grounding grid for the pad-mounted transformer is provided by the Contractor per the National Grid standards. 4.Concrete encased duct bank of the two 4" PVC conduits will be provided by the Electrical Contractor for the primary feeder installation from a utility pole to the pad-mounted transformer. Pre-cast concrete manholes 5' x 5' will be provided by the Contractor to facilitate the primary cables field installation. The duct bank routing is shown on the civil drawings. 5.Utility company will provide a primary feeder cable from the utility manhole to the pad-mounted transformer via the new manhole and terminate the feeder cable on both ends. 6.Transformer secondary feeder of the copper conductors will be installed underground in the duct bank of four 4" PVC conduits from the pad-mounted transformer to the main electrical switchboard located in the main electrical room. The secondary feeder and terminations at the switchboard side will be provided by the Electrical Contractor and terminated at the transformer side by National Grid. The new service will be metered at the transformer secondary voltage. 7.National Grid metering CTs will be installed in a CT section of the switch board, the meter will be located at the direction of the utility company. 8.Telephone, Cable TV, and City Fiber will be fed underground into the building’s Main Distribution Frame/Head End Room. 9.Copper conductors shall be utilized for all branch circuit and feeder wiring. Aluminum conductors will be allowed for feeders 100 amperes or over. 10.The building connected electrical load estimate is based on the preliminary building systems design: Load Type KVA HVAC Loads (including AHU, Destratification Fans, DCU, Chiller, UH, VRF, Boilers, FCs, Pumps, RTUs, Exhaust Fans, DCU) 548 KVA Elevator 31.7 KVA Exterior Lighting 2.0 KVA Interior Lighting 35 KVA Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 3/August 26, 2025 Load Type KVA General Power 138 KVA Kitchen 112 KVA EV Charging 144 KVA Plumbing/Fire Protection (Pumps, etc.)150 KVA Total Connected Load 1,160.7 KVA B.Electrical Distribution System: 1.Service ratings for the building are designed for a connected load of 15 watts/S.F. The service capacity will be sized for 1,600 Amperes with a 100% rated main breaker. The main bus will be sized at 2,000 Amperes and will have an available breaker space provision at the end of the switchboard to accommodate a future grid connected photovoltaic array. The switchboard will be furnished with a service entrance surge protection device (SPD) rated at 240 kA and a digital metering unit to monitor voltage, current, power factor, demand KW and with a data communication port for interface with BMS. Main switchboard’s short circuit rating will be coordinated with the Utility Company but will be rated for 65 KAIC. 2.New lighting and power panels will be provided to accommodate respective loads. The equipment locations will be in dedicated rooms or closets. C.Interior Lighting System: 1.The intent of the lighting design is to provide a visual environment for the students and faculty that is supportive of the educational activities within the building. The lighting system will be designed in compliance with the applicable Energy Code and be eligible for the Utility company rebate program. 2.Interior lighting illumination levels will meet the IES recommended values for applicable activity type, be in compliance with the IECC 2021 energy allowances and LEED for Schools control requirements. PROPOSED ILLUMINATION LEVELS Location Average Illumination Levels Classrooms 30 FC Offices, Conference Rooms, Library 30 FC Kitchen 50 FC Gymnasium 50 FC Cafeteria 30 FC Corridors 20 FC Utility and Storage Rooms 20 FC 3.Classroom lighting fixtures will consist of recessed/surface mounted direct/indirect luminaries with integral LED source and electronic dimmable drivers. The fixtures will be pre-wired for continuous dimming control where natural daylight is available and also for multi-level switching. Two daylight dimming zones will be provided in each classroom. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 4/August 26, 2025 4.Office lighting fixtures will consist of recessed/surface mounted direct only LED luminaries and electronic drivers for dual-level switching. Offices on the perimeter with windows will have daylight dimming where lighting within the daylight zone exceeds 150W. In general, lighting power density will be 20-40% less than IECC 2021. The power density reduction relates to associated LEED credit in energy and atmosphere. 5.Lighting levels will be approximately 30 foot candles in classrooms and offices. The daylight dimming foot-candle level will be in compliance with associated LEED credit in indoor environment quality. 6.Gymnasium lighting will be comprised of direct/indirect fixtures with integral LED source and electronic drivers. The fixtures will be provided with poly carbonate lensing. The light level will be designed for approximately 50 foot candles. Multi- level switching will be provided. Daylight dimming will be provided within 15 feet of skylights or glazing where lighting within the daylight zone exceeds 150W. Daylight dimming controls will be similar in operation to classrooms. 7.Corridor lighting will be comprised of recessed mounted linear fixtures with integral LED source and electronic drivers. The Corridor light level will be designed for approximately 20-foot candles. Corridor lighting will be controlled via time schedules during normal business hours and set to occupancy control thereafter. 8.Cafeteria lighting will be a combination of pendant mounted fixtures with direct only and direct/indirect distribution types. All fixtures shall be provided with integral LED source and electronic drivers. The light levels will be designed for approximately 30 foot candles. 9.Stage and Auditorium theatrical lights with connector strips and a dimming system will be provided for performances. House lighting in Auditorium will be DMX dimmable to black LED and controlled by a theatrical dimming system. 10.Kitchen and Servery lighting will consist of recessed 2’x2’ and 2’x4’ acrylic lensed gasketed troffers with aluminum frame doors, integral LED source, electronic drivers and NSF rated for food preparation areas. Light levels will be approximately 50 foot candles. 11.Media Center lighting will be a combination of pendant decorative pendant fixtures and recessed fixtures with integral LED source and electronic drivers. The light levels will be designed for approximately 30 foot candles. Daylighting controls will be provided on perimeter light fixtures with 15 feet of glazing 12.Each area will be locally switched and designed for multi-level controls. Each Classroom, Office space, and Toilet room will have occupancy sensors to turn lights off when unoccupied. Occupancy sensors will be set to vacancy mode where required by Energy Code. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 5/August 26, 2025 13.Daylight dimming sensors will be installed in each room where natural light is available for continuous dimming of light fixtures. The control system will be in accordance with associated LEED credit in indoor environmental quality when lighting within the daylight zone exceeds 150W threshold. 14.The entire school will be controlled with an automatic lighting control system for programming of interior and exterior lights “on and off”. Lighting control system will be interfaced with BMS system, and will be demand response capable in accordance with associated LEED credit in Energy and atmosphere. D.Emergency Lighting System 1.An exterior 375KW, 468.75KVA (natural gas fired emergency generator with sound attenuated enclosure and base tank with alarms will be provided. Light fixtures and LED Exit signs will be installed to serve all egress areas such as Corridors, Intervening Spaces, Toilets, Stairs, and Exit discharge exterior doors. The Administration area lighting will be connected to the emergency generator. 2.The generator power system has been sized to support emergency (life safety), and optional standby building loads. The life safety branch of the emergency system will be provided with a manual transfer switch on the emergency line side of the transfer switch in compliance with NEC 700.3(F). a.Emergency (life safety) Power Loads as required by the Code: •Emergency exit and egress lighting (interior and building exterior at the exits) •Fire alarm system b.Standby Power Loads: •Heating system with associated heat pumps and controls •Telephone/ data closets and associated A/C equipment •Communication systems (telephone and public address systems) •Building DDC system control panels •Kitchen refrigeration equipment •Lighting and power in the nurse/medical area •Security system equipment E.Site Lighting System: LEED Credit SS Light Pollution Reduction 1.Fixtures for area lighting will be pole mounted cut-off ‘LED’ luminaries in the parking area and roadways. Pole heights will be 20 feet. The exterior lighting will be connected to the automatic lighting control system for photocell “ON” and timed “OFF” operation. The site lighting fixtures will be dark sky compliant. The illumination level will be 0.5 foot-candle for parking areas in accordance with the Illuminating Engineering Society. 2.Building perimeter will be ‘LED’ wall mounted cut-off fixtures over exterior doors for exit discharge. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 6/August 26, 2025 F.Wiring Devices: 1.Classrooms will have a minimum of (2) duplex receptacles per teaching wall and (2) double duplex receptacles on dedicated circuits at classroom computer workstations. The teacher’s workstation will have a double duplex receptacle also on a dedicated circuit. 2.New Office areas will generally have (1) duplex outlet per wall. At each workstation a double duplex receptacle will be provided. 3.Corridors will have a cleaning receptacle at approximately 25-40-foot intervals. 4.Exterior weatherproof receptacles with lockable enclosures will be installed at exterior doors. 5.A system of computer grade panelboards with double neutrals and surge protective devices will be provided for receptacle circuits. 6.Surface mounted raceways will be provided within renovated areas where raceways cannot be concealed in public spaces. 7.All receptacles will be of the tamper resistant type. G.Fire Alarm System with Mass Notification: 1. A fire alarm/mass notification system and detection system will be provided with 60-hour battery back-up. The system will be of the addressable type where each detection device will be identified at the control panel and remote annunciators by device type and location to facilitate search for origin of alarms. The notification system will be in conformance with NFPA 72 Chapter 24 emergency communications systems. 2. Smoke detectors will be provided in open areas, corridors, stairwells and other egress ways. 3. The sprinkler system will be supervised for water flow and tampering with valves. 4. Speaker/strobes will be provided in egress ways, classrooms, assembly spaces, open areas and other large spaces. Strobe only units will be provided in single toilets and conference rooms. 5.Manual pull stations will be provided at exit discharge doors. 6. The system will be remotely connected to automatically report alarms to the fire department via a Sigcom 16 zone radio box as approved by the fire department. 7.A mass notification system will be provided with separate strobes from the fire alarm system. Audible tone shall be through fire alarm speakers. System activation shall be through panic buttons and card readers with dedicated lockdown key fob. H.Metering: 1.Measurement devices shall be installed to monitor the electrical energy use for each of the following separately: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 7/August 26, 2025 a.Total electrical energy b.Sub-metering in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 paragraph 8.4.3 and LEED EA Advanced Energy Metering Credit, and Building Level Metering Credit 2.Recording and Reporting: a.The electrical energy usage for all loads listed above shall be recorded a minimum of every 15 minutes and reported at least hourly, daily, monthly, and annually. The system shall be capable of maintaining all data collected for a minimum of 36 months. I.Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): 1.One (1) 24 kW, three phase centralized UPS system will be provided with seven minutes of battery back-up. 2.The system will provide conditioned power to sensitive electronic loads, telecommunication systems, bridge over power interruptions of short duration and allow an orderly shutdown of servers and communication systems during a prolonged power outage. 3.The UPS system will also be connected to the stand-by generator. J.Lightning Protection System: 1.A system of lightning protection devices will be provided. 2.The lightning protection equipment will include air terminals, roof main conductors and down conductors, conduits, fasteners, connectors, ground rods, etc. 3.The facility will be issued a UL Master Label Certificate. K.Renewable Energy System Provisions: 1.Electrical provisions will be made for a roof mounted renewable energy system consisting of a grid (location on Roof of Addition) connected photovoltaic PV system intended to reduce the facilities demand for power. L.Two-Way Communications System: 1.A Two-Way Communications System will be provided at the elevator lobbies that do not have grade access. Area of rescue assistance call boxes will be provided at Elevator Lobbies with no grade access. The call boxes connect to a main panel located adjacent to the Fire Alarm annunciator panel. M.Level 2 AC Dual Electric Vehicle Charging Equipment. (EVSE) 1.Provide provisions for dual port EVSE stations with 40-ampere branch circuits back to an EVSE panel for a minimum of 10% of parking spaces in compliance with Massachusetts stretch energy code. Provide EVSE Level 2 chargers in 2% of parking spaces in conformance with LEED LT green vehicles/electric vehicle charging. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#89363/Page 8/August 26, 2025 N.Distribution Antennae System (DAS): 1. A public safety radio distributed antenna system (DAS) which consists of bi- directional amplifiers (BDA), donor antennas, coverage antennas, coax cable, coax connectors, splitters, combiners, and couplers. These devices will be used as part of a system for in-building public safety 2-way radio system communication. 5.TESTING REQUIREMENTS A.The Electrical Contractor shall provide testing of the following systems with the Owner and Owner’s Representative present: •Lighting and power panels for correct phase balance. •Emergency generator system. •Lighting control system (interior and exterior). •Fire alarm system. •Uninterruptible Power System, UPS. •Lightning protection system. •Two-way communication system. •Distributed Antennae system. B.Testing reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before provided to the Owner. 6.OPERATION MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS When the project is completed, the Electrical Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance manuals to the Owner. 7.RECORD DRAWINGS AND CONTROL DOCUMENTS When the project is completed, an as-built set of drawings, showing all lighting and power requirements from contract and addendum items, will be provided to the Owner. 8.COMMISSIONING The project shall be commissioned per Commissioning Section of the specifications. 9.PHASING A.Cut cap and make safe existing building for demolition by demolition contractor. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#94643/Page 1/August 26, 2025 TEL 508-998-5700 FAX 508-998-0883 email: info@g-g-d.com TECHNOLOGY SYSTEMS Schematic Design for Cost Estimate NARRATIVE REPORT The following is the Technology System narrative, which defines the scope of work and capacities of the Communications system infrastructure as well as the Basis of Design. 1. CODES A. All work installed under Section 270000 shall comply with the Massachusetts Building Code and all local, county, and federal codes, laws, statues, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. DESIGN INTENT A. All work is new and consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, facilities, and all operations and adjustments required for the complete and operating installation of the Technology and Security work and all items incidental thereto, including commissioning and testing. 3. TECHNOLOGY A. The data system infrastructure will consist of fiber optic backbone cabling horizontal wiring will consist of Category 6A UTP Plenum rated cabling for both data and telephone systems for gigabit connectivity. The telephone infrastructure will accommodate VOIP based voice systems. B. Each classroom will have two data, one voice with video and audio connections at the teacher’s station with interconnectivity to a interactive LCD touch screen monitor. A wall phone outlet with 2-way ceiling speaker will be provided for communications with administration. Wireless access points will be provided in all classrooms and other spaces and consist of (2) CAT6A cables. C. A central paging system will be provided and integrated with the telephone system. D. A wireless GPS/LAN based master clock system will be provided with 120V wireless remote clocks that act as transceivers. E. The Main Distribution Frame (MDF) will contain all core network switching and IP voice switch. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs) will serve each floor/wing of the school. A fiber optic backbone will be provided from each IDF to MDF. The backbone will be designed for 10 Gbps Ethernet. F. Two-way communication call boxes will be provided adjacent to each elevator that is above or below grade level. The base station will be located at a control point on the first floor. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA J#447 001 00.00 L#94643/Page 2/August 26, 2025 4. TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. The Technology Contractor shall provide testing of the following systems with the Owner and Owner’s Representative present: •Telephone and data cabling •Fiber optic backbone cabling •Paging system •Wireless clock system B. Testing reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before providing to the Owner. 5. OPERATION MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. When the project is completed, the Technology Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance manuals to the Owner. 6. RECORD DRAWINGS AND CONTROL DOCUMENTS: A. When the project is completed, an as-built set of drawings, showing all tel/data requirements from contract and addendum items, will be provided to the Owner. 7. COMMISSIONING A. The project shall be commissioned per Section 019113 and Section 270800 of the specifications. SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL Confidential Security Narrative North Andover Kitteridge School Narrative by: Provided by: Pamela Perini, PSP Date: August 19, 2025 SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL Introduction Pamela Perini Consulting, LLC (herein referred to as PPC) is an independent security consulting firm located in Waltham, MA. PPC provides a number of security consulting services that include risk, vulnerability and security assessments; security master planning; security program assessment, development, evaluation and creation; security plans/drawings and specifications for construction, constructability assessments; peer reviews; service and maintenance contract assessments, creation and bid; and overall security programs, planning, implementation and oversight. PPC and its principal, Pamela Perini holds a number of security credentials that are necessary for multiple security consulting functions. Pamela Perini, PSP Principal Security Consultant DATE: 08/2025 Credentials, Certifications, Training, etc. 1. Certified Physical Security Professional (PSP), ASIS International ** 2. Certified Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED), Facilities Management International 3. PREPaRE WS1: Crisis Prevention & Preparedness: Comprehensive School Safety Planning, Northeast Homeland Security Regional Advisory Council/NASP (National Association of School Psychologists) 4. SANS Isaca/Audit Serve; IT Auditing for Disaster Recovery & Business Continuity Planning 5. OSHA10 Construction, OSHA Training Institute 6. Certification Commonwealth of Massachusetts MCPPO Program, Cyber Threats to Local Government 7. Rhode Island School Safety Committee, Annual School Safety & Security Conference 2019 8. Infrastructure Protection (Master Certification), Texas A&M University Engineering Extension, National Emergency Response and Recovery Center 9. AMTRAK Passenger Train Emergency Response Certification FEMA Certifications 1. FEMA AWR-136 Essentials of Community Cybersecurity 2. FEMA AWR-175 Information Security for Everyone 3. FEMA AWR-375 Risk Management for After School Activities & Interscholastic Athletics 4. FEMA ISC-100 Introduction to Incident Command 5. FEMA IS-120.c Introduction to Exercises 6. FEMA IS-700 National Incident Management System (NIMS) 7. FEMA IS-906 Workplace Security Awareness 8. FEMA IS-907 Active Shooter 9. FEMA MGT-384 Community Preparedness for Cyber Incidents SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL 10. FEMA AWR-213 Critical Infrastructure Security & Resilience 11. FEMA MGT-310 Jurisdictional Threat & Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment 12. FEMA MGT-414 Advanced Critical Infrastructure Protection 13. FEMA MGT-315 Critical Asset Risk Management 14. FEMA AWR-383 Cybersecurity Risk Awareness for Officials and Senior Management ** The Physical Security Professional (PSP) ASIS credential is subject to The Department of Homeland Security’s Safety Act. The SAFETY Act Designation gives ASIS board-certified professionals and their customer’s immediate protection from lawsuits involving ASIS certification and the ASIS certification process that arise out of an act of terrorism. Not only does it limit the types of liability claims that can be brought against a certificant, but it also entitles the certificant to immediate dismissal of those specific types of claims. PPC has been engaged by Machado Silvetti Architects, as their security consultant for the North Andover Kitteridge School Project in North Andover, Massachusetts. PPC has developed this security narrative for the PSP/SD Pricing Submission to identify the systems, functions and operations associated with the school’s security program that are to be assessed and potentially included in the project. Additionally, information regarding any proprietary security equipment and components, operations and programming that has been currently identified by the school district, and is included herein. Security Narrative This document is provided as a CONFIDENTIAL informational outline for the design considerations of the Electronic Security Systems and function for the new North Andover Kitteridge School. ALL Information is confidential and proprietary to Pamela Perini Consulting, LLC, and considered intellectual property. Additionally, the information is not to be used/shared in the Public Domain and is to be excluded from any FOIA requests, or shall be provided with heavy redaction as it is Sensitive Security Information and the release of any such information is detrimental to the future building occupants. The new North Andover Kitteridge School is being assessed for the security needs of students, teachers, faculty, staff and visitors of the new building/add reno during normal school hours and after-school hours, during after-school programs and during non-North Andover School programs such as athletics and tournaments, recitals and shows that may have out-of-school and out-of-town participants and visitors. This view and standpoint will assist in ensuring that the school’s security posture will meet the needs of all who enter the school grounds and building. The level of protection will be based upon this assessment. Creating a safe and secure environment that promotes and supports 21st Century learning is the goal of all PreK-12 school construction projects. School safety and security protects students, faculty, staff, administration and visitors, and must be addressed from the facility concept and feasibility through to the facility use, during both school hours and non- school/after-school hours. The school’s perimeter, the site and flow (pedestrian and vehicular), the building, the landscaping, the interior design and the function of the new building are all taken into consideration when addressing safety, security and the school’s security program. Given the current climate, safety and security are of primary importance to every new PreK-12 construction school project, and a necessary part of all school SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL programming. FEMA states that school districts must: prevent, protect, mitigate against, respond to and recover from incidents that may be disruptive to our Pre-K thru12 schools and their building/facility occupants. All of these components should be addressed in the development of an overall School Security Program. This process and subsequent program include the review of processes and policies, and providing electronic measures that complement these processes and policies to protect the school from human-caused, technological, and natural disaster threats, hazards and incidents. National preparedness goals are critical to the ongoing success of any school, and a successful security program will encompass and incorporate people, technology and processes. The whole community approach is imperative, and being solely reliant on Electronic Security Systems is not the most effective approach. All security programs need processes, policies, technology, people, operations, maintenance and training to support the Electronic Security System measures that will be provided and installed on the project. By using the premise of detect, deter, delay and respond, we will utilize and apply various security concepts that will give us the security systems basis of design. It is critical for school districts to conduct internal stakeholder preparedness reviews to identify gaps and assess their capabilities in order to prevent, mitigate and respond to both known threats, hazards and concerns as well as unknown threats that may arise at the new school, as much as possible. A security program is ineffective if the processes and policies are not created to complement the Electronic Security Systems, with enforcement. The Design Team has held introductory and first responders meeting with the North Andover School District representatives and first responders. The conversations included a review of the current floor plans with the systems, a trajectory analysis of the vehicular, pedestrian and cyclical flow. Several systems and platforms were discussed that will be an extension of the current Security Systems and Program, that will be used as the basis of design for the new North Andover Kitteridge School. The proprietary systems/components currently identified are: • Access Control System – Genetec Synergis • Video Management System – Genetec Omnicast Security and Building Flow The security program for the associated flow of the site will address pedestrian, cycle and vehicular traffic patterns around the schools. Crime Prevention through Environmental Design (CPTED) methodologies and trajectory analysis will be considered for the perimeter of the building, the athletic fields and outdoor play spaces, parking areas, all walkways and thoroughfares near the building, ingress/egress points, and locations where there is a potential for building ramming, which is always a considered threat. More decorative approaches as counter measures for security considerations may include the installation of large, decorative planters or k-rated benches to obstruct vehicles or other potential threats; the installation of decorative knee walls and bio swales/rain gardens; the SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL proper placement of bushes or plantings under ground level windows; strategic placement of windows that allow staff to view the main entrance(s); and hardscaping treatments that reduce access to ‘limited access’ areas. Although greenspace is inherent in the architectural methodology, careful consideration should be heeded so as not to create bridging and/or climbing mechanisms onto or into the building with landscaping, or impede camera views with leafy trees and vegetation. Signage for parking and wayfinding are additional exterior security considerations. Video Management System cameras will be utilized to monitor any parking areas or pedestrian pathways that will lead to the school and traverse throughout the grounds. Physical Entry and Access Control By utilizing a single main door approach for entrance and exit, there is less opportunity for entrance of persons who do not belong in the school. The school houses young vulnerable people. An accounting of person(s) in the school is clear when limiting access to a single portal. By limiting the secondary door/portal use and requiring main door/portal use, this will increase the opportunity for observation and controlled access, and enhance the safety for students, faculty, staff, administration and visitors into the school. The primary/main entrance(s) shall be open when the main flow of students coming into the building in the morning, and exiting the school at the end of the day. The main entrance exterior door(s) will have a single location for the Access Control Keypad Reader and the Video Intercom Door station for screening of visitors. This will allow for the front office to have direct communication (and a visual verification) with visitors and visual confirmation of intent before allowing them into the school. These doors will also be equipped with card readers to allow those who have credentials, and an access control card/credential, to enter the building directly as they are pre-screened. In typical K-12 Schools, the ADA door paddle, the access control card reader and the video intercom/intercom will reside on decorative stanchion or bollard to meet ADA requirements, and address any door swing challenges. All perimeter doors shall remain locked at all times with controlled access and shall incorporate door propped open indications (door contacts) programmed into the Access Control and Intrusion Detection Systems. All Access Control doors will have electrified locking hardware (provided by Division 08) to enable the locking and unlocking functions as well as school specialty functions such as lock down. A discussion of ballistic level glass with the Division 08 consultant will be scheduled to provide the locations that were discussed at the first responder meeting. Identification of Particular Security Related Items The security provisions for the school project include layout, vestibule design, intrusion detection, areas of potential camera surveillance, (video) intercom systems and function, access control and systems, signaling, communications, detection systems and card readers at exterior doors will be reviewed with the North Andover Kitteridge School Team and Municipal Emergency Response Personnel. We typically recommend visual-colored beacons (typically blue or amber) indicating a school security incident, lock down, shelter in place, etc., be added to the school building exterior, and SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL locations with high-volume noise activities such as the Gym and Cafetorium. Simplicity is key with this visual beacon. Careful consideration will be given to locations as not to create over institutionalization of the building façade, mitigation of night light bleed or distractions of the high-volume areas. Typical Lockset Hardware All locking hardware that is integral to the Access Control System and Intrusion Detection System will be coordinated with Division 8, Division 26 and Division 28. Typically, door hold open magnets, which currently exist at the Kitteridge School, will be provided on the wing doors and will be coordinated for release, integration with Fire Control Modules and integration with the Mass Notification System or Public Address System. The Divisions coordination will include electrification (power and lock power supply) at the doors as needed and indicated on the drawings; door position switches (door contacts) as needed and indicated; and request to exit (REX) devices and data cable as needed and indicated. The Request to Exit/REX devices may be included in the hardware set. Locking hardware will be discussed further with Division 08. Some standard and typical locking hardware sets and function for this submission may include: Corridor to Classroom Doors • Mortise Lock Function: o Intruder Function - Outside/Corridor side of door has a key, lever that can be left locked or unlocked; inside/classroom side of door provides egress at all times and has a key to lock/unlock the outside lever; this side of the lock also has an indicator to show the status of the outside level whether locked or unlocked. Classroom to Classroom Doors • Classroom to Classroom Communicating Doors o If this door is for second means of egress, then Passage function is recommended, if not then Intruder Function is recommended. Outdoor Classroom Doors • This will require extensive discussions in future meetings, as egress may be a challenge and we may not be able to fully secure these doors. Teacher / Administration Space Corridor Doors • Mortise Lock Function: o Office Function – Outside/Corridor side of door has a key, lever that can be left locked or unlocked; inside /classroom side of door provides egress at all times and has a thumb turn which can lock/unlock outside lever. Typical Office • Same as Office Function. The future meetings will include discussions of any proprietary door hardware or master keying that may need to be included into the design process. Any non-typical lockets will be discussed with owner in Design Development and Construction Documents phase of design. SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL Integrated Electronic Security Systems Electronic Security Systems (ESS) typically consists of the Access Control System (ACS), Video Management System (VMS), Intrusion Detection System (IDS) and Video Intercom Systems (IS/VIC). These systems work together in an integrated manner to detect, deter, delay, respond to, and/or investigate an incident. The new North Kitteridge School Electronic Security Systems will be an extension of the existing Genetec Access Control System, and the Genetec the Video Management System and shall be a functional system integrated with the Intrusion Detection System, and the Video Intercom System. Further conversations will identify the need for Emergency Communications Towers with AEDs. By maintaining some continuity, this allows investigators or school administrators to access, maintain, review and change records as an essential forensic investigative tool. The presence of the new Video Management System will deter criminal activity, while the Intrusion Detection and the existing Access Control System allow school administrators to control access of personnel into the school. Alarms from the IDS, and video signals from the VMS transmitted to the responding authorities significantly enhances emergency response and situational awareness during and after school hours. Deployment of the Electronic Security Systems is risk based and will focus on detecting a security breach, deterring and slowing down an active assailant, responding to an incident, and investigating serious incidents that could negatively impact people, property and information. The Electronic Security System tools allow first responders to have eyes in the school when they are most needed. Incidents that have low probability but high consequences may be ended with less loss with the use of electronic security systems. The electronic security system components will be wired to the emergency generator circuitry. At a minimum, all main components, servers, workstations, switches and the like, will be equipped with an appropriately sized UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) that provides a minimum of three (3) hours of backup power in the case of a power outage, and emergency power failure. Independent servers will be provided for the Video Management System with appropriate storage and capacity, and an independent server or connection to the existing server for the Access Control System. The construction project may also provide a new badging system at the school. That will be discussed in future meetings. Access Control System An Access Control System (ACS) provides a number of benefits for school safety and security. Should the school elect to install Keypad card readers, they provide a management tool to designate who can go where and when, and at the same time provide an audit trail of activity. The ACS will be fully programmed to the Owners requirements, have schedules and groups, and be configured to generate alarms for such conditions as a door forced open or held open. The ACS will have the capability to be put the school into a “lockdown state,” which will automatically lock selected doors and sections of the building, and restrict access to emergency responders and authorized personnel only. SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL The ACS shall integrate with the Mass Notification System or the Public Address System for lockdown notifications, and will generate other school triggers like the visual of colored beacon(s) on the exterior of the school for a visual cue that a live incident is occurring. External Communications to first responders will be coordinated to ensure messaging is sent instantly to alert first responders of an incident. Saving time, saves lives and limits loss. Card readers will be strategically located within entry level floors to restrict access from the general public to designated areas. Card readers will also be installed on rooms that contain critical infrastructure or assets, such as MDFs, IDFs, IT closets, often records or sometimes rooms with Chrome Book carts. Groups of doors may be programmed in any configuration required, and this will be covered in additional security meetings. Elevator Card Readers will also be discussed and may be added to the project. • Video Management System The Video Management Systems are typically integrated with the Access Control System by putting a video representation picture (VMS cameras and recording) with the movements (tracking with Access Control cards). Cameras are positioned in and around areas on the site that are needed to keep a constant view of site movement and situational awareness. This includes places that are obvious but also places that can be hidden, like stairwells and corridor intersections. All entrance doors will have a visual of who enters the school, from the secure side of the door. Because the Video Management System and the Access Control System are both Genetec, this methodology is recommended and may be addressed during design and construction. The Video Management System will be accessible by first responders and designated persons as decided by the district. Incident Response video viewing to locate potential adversaries is a critical function of the Video System. The district and this school have/will have fiber infrastructure to connect this school with the district allowing and enabling first responder access via a purpose-built security VLAN. • Intrusion Detection System The Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is typically an additional integrated system. It will be fully functional and monitored on a 24x7 basis by a dedicated third-party monitoring company or central station. A discussion regarding third-party monitoring versus direct connect to the Police Department will occur at future meetings. Either instance will require phoneline equipment for signal transmission communications capabilities. The phoneline will be coordinated with Division 26/27. The IDS will be provided with both an Ethernet connection and an analog phone line as redundancy is needed to speak with the Police Departments receiver if needed. We recommend cellular back up for all Intrusion Systems. Motion detectors will be installed to detect unwanted intruders at schedule times in specific locations. Discussions will continue regarding first floor motion detectors in all perimeter classrooms or in hallways and door coverage. The system will alert the off-site monitoring station or Police Station of activity within the building (e.g., perimeter classrooms, rooms or corridors) when the system is armed. The last staff member to leave, will be required to arm the IDS system, and the first-in SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL required to disarm the system. If the district chooses, a card reader may be installed in the primary/main entrance vestibule that permits authorized personnel to arm/disarm the IDS. This is often performed by custodial services as they are often the first personnel in the building and often the last to leave. This will be discussed at the next security meeting. The School District will need to think about the various after-hours scenarios of the school in order to allow for the proper programming of the Intrusion Detection System. Zones or areas of the school need to be partitioned to allow for areas to be used after hours without the alarm system being triggered. An example of a zone would be the Gym as a separate zone. An additional discussion with the Owner regarding the afterhours usage of the building will contribute to the specified Intrusion Detection Panel. Duress buttons will be installed in the main Administrative Offices in the administrative assistant’s desk and the principal’s office. These duress devices are typically connected to both the IDS and ACS systems, to be monitored during and after school hours. Other panic/duress button locations will be discussed in future design meetings. • (Video) Intercom System The (Video) Intercom System (IC) will allow staff to monitor, screen and limit people requesting access to the school, and to allow only those individuals who are authorized to enter the school. Office personnel or kitchen/receiving staff, can speak with and view/verify anyone at the door prior to releasing the door lock remotely through the master unit door release button. The door station will be located at the main exterior vestibule entrance for visitors and at any delivery/receiving/kitchen entrance locations as deemed required by the School Administration. The school shall determine the configuration of masters and submasters and the call hierarchy. This will be discussed in future meetings. • Additional System Components The head-end servers and switches (or brains) for the systems shall be located in secure MDF/IDF closets. These components for the systems shall receive/process data and information from the field devices via critical system infrastructure that will be connected via secure VLAN and switches. The switches shall be PoE+ and shall meet all FEMA cybersecurity standards and requirements, and have appropriate numbers of SPFs (fiber ports) as required. These closets or rooms shall contain the 4-post lockable and secured racks, servers, software and programming, database information, schedules, active directory feeds and connections, switches, power supplies, panels and various other components that will be the basis of function for the systems. The systems shall include client workstations, with all required software and programming, to view and control the Electronic Security Systems internally. Remote access with Graphical User Interfaces will also be provided with software for approved and budgeted locations. Lockdown, Shelter-in-place or Emergency Conditions SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL All identified doors will be capable of being locked from the inside. Locking doors from inside the room should be accomplished via a thumb-turn (Classroom Security Function) and should not require the use of a key. All door hardware shall be in compliance with NFPA, and not restrict the ability of students or faculty to exit the building if needed, as per fire code. During a lockdown, the Access Control System function and sequencing will be discussed and developed, and locking (or not) of all electrified locking hardware, and limiting access to only designated emergency response personnel and administrative staff. Additionally, groups of doors could be added to a lockdown sequence. (An example would be an unstable person who is in the secure vestibule, and the command would disable all Vestibule Card Readers so that no one could enter the vestibule.) Emergency Conditions Status Indicators We will discuss additional visual cueing on the exterior building to alert students, faculty, staff or visitors of an ongoing emergency within the school building. The exterior beacons (amber or blue) will be located strategically to ensure visitors or staff entering the building will see there is an ongoing incident. This beacon will be a silent visual cue advising people not to enter the building as it is unsafe to do so. It is recommended that the School District send accompanying communications to the Community stating the use and intent of the visual beacons. Without the knowledge of their use and intent, they are ineffective for the surrounding community. Public Address System The Public Address System will be under other sections of the specification (not in Division 280000/Security scope) and will alert all areas of the school site including both interior and exterior spaces using the Public Address System. Individuals located on school grounds, but not inside the school, may need to be notified of an event in progress, such as a fire alarm or other non-fire related emergency. Each classroom will have the capability to make a school-wide notification. The Electrical Engineer typically will include a module for the Fire System that provides for public address through the fire system speakers. This will be done through modules that are available through most manufacturers so that a secondary communication system (or equipment) is not needed for emergency announcements. Mass Notification System A Mass Notification System (not in Division 280000 scope) will have the ability to provide real- time information and instructions to all students, staff and visitors. The purpose of the Mass Notification is to protect students, faculty, staff and visitors by indicating the existence of an emergency situation and instructing people of the appropriate actions to take. The Mass Notification System will have the ability to generate messages from both on- and off-site locations. Additionally, the Mass Notification System will have the ability to send out incident based or pre-defined messages. The School Security Program SSI This document contains Sensitive Security Information as defined by Federal regulation 49 C.F.R., and if publicly released, would be detrimental to school security. CONFIDENTIAL All effective Pre-K thru 12 School Security Programs are developed with a well-balanced combination of Electronic Security Systems and training of administration, faculty, staff, and students, along with procedures and policies that support the Technology or Systems. The Security Program also includes the operational components of the Security Program, procedures, process and enforcement. Preparedness of the stakeholders is critical, and an unbalanced reliance on systems or people is not effective. Although not included in this narrative or the project, Pamela Perini Consulting highly recommends a stakeholder preparedness review be conducted to assess the capability of the school’s personnel to protect against and respond to an incident. A review of the procedures, policies and enforcement will also yield a favorable increase in security by identifying potential gaps. Ongoing assessment, review and training of the building’s administrators and occupants is germane to any effective Security Program and is imperative to compliment any new systems. ## End of narrative ## Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 1 SECTION 312500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct a complete erosion and sedimentation control program for minimizing erosion and siltation during the construction phase of the project. The erosion and sediment control provisions detailed on the Drawings and specified herein are the minimum requirements for an erosion control program. The Site Contractor shall provide additional erosion and sedimentation control materials and methods as needed to affect the erosion and siltation control principles specified herein. B. Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MassDEP) stormwater standards shall be followed during construction and incorporated into the design as practicable. C. Contractor/Site Operator shall be responsible for following the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), prepared by Samiotes Consultants. Contractor is considered be the Site Operator. D. Environmental Protection Agency – Contractor shall be responsible for applying for a an eNOI in relation to the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination Scheme (NPDES) Permit and compliance with the NPDES Program. E. Compliance with the Department of Environmental Protection Order of Conditions MassDEP File XXX-XXX issued by the North Andover Conservation Commission on [insert date]. Requirements that are in the Order of Conditions that are in conflict with this Section shall take precedence over this specification. A copy of the Order is included in Appendix. F. Compliance with Plan titled “BMP Erosion & Sediment Control Exhibit”, prepared by Samiotes Consultants, dated [insert date]. G. Contractor to be responsible for design and permitting of a comprehensive proposed dewatering plan prior to the commencement of construction. Dewatering plan to be submitted to the Engineer and Town Conservation Commission prior to the commencement of construction. H. Related Sections include the following: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 2 1. Section 312200 – EARTHWORK. 2. Section 024113.23 – UTILITY LINE REMOVAL. 3. Section 331000 – WATER UTILITIES. 4. Section 333000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE. 5. Section 334000 – STORMWATER UTILITIES. 6. Section 334443 – WATER QUALITY UNITS. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 1. M288 Geosynthetic Specification for Highway Applications 2. R69 Determination of Long-Term Strength for Geosynthetic Reinforcement B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D4884 Test Method for Strength of Sewn or Bonded Seams of Geotextiles 2. D6461 Silt Fence Materials 3. D6462 Silt Fence Installation and Maintenance C. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications) 1.4 LEED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: B. LEED Submittal Requirements: 1. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 018113 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. 2. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application. 3. As applicable submittals shall include the following: a. Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content. b. Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs. 4. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 012513 – Product Substitution Procedures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Proposed methods, materials to be employed, and schedule for effecting erosion and siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall include: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 3 1. Proposed methods for affecting erosion and siltation control, including 1 in. equals 20 ft. scale plans indicating location of erosion control devices, stockpiling and storage areas, construction entrance, and concrete washout areas. 2. List of proposed materials, including manufacturer’s product data. 3. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implementing programs in each major area of work. See plan titled “BMP Erosion & Sediment Control Exhibit”, prepared by Samiotes Consultants, dated XXXXXX. 4. Copy and approval of NPDES application and NOI application. 5. Construction management plan as required by BMP Erosion & Sediment Control Exhibit on sheet CC-1.0 6. Dewatering plan produced by a competent person. If well point dewatering is used it shall be designed by a Massachusetts Registered Engineer. B. The following shall be submitted: 1. Geotextile Fabric Sample (Sedimentation Fence, Construction Entrance, and other filter/separation fabrics) – 12 in. by 12 in. sample. The brand name shall be labeled on the fabric or the fabric container. 2. Seed Mixture for Temporary Seed Cover 3. Compost Socks 4. Coir Log 5. Catch Basin Filters 6. Slope stabilization products 7. Aggregate Materials for Construction Entrance 8. Aggregate Materials for Temporary Road 1.6 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall implement all soil erosion and sedimentation control devices prior to any earth moving within the site. B. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction phases: 1. Stripping of vegetation, grading, or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner which will minimize soil erosion. 2. Whenever feasible, natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. 3. Limit extent of area which is exposed and free of vegetation to the smallest extent practical. In addition, duration of exposure shall be kept to a minimum. 4. Drainage provisions shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements. 5. Sediment shall be retained on-site. 6. STM E 136. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the construction sequence prior to the start of clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work. C. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be greater than or equal to six months, and temporary erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months. 1. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with erosion protection materials, as appropriate for the prevailing conditions. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 4 2. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings, cut and fill slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1 (horizontal: vertical). 1.7 INSPECTION 1. Upon installation of all soil erosion and sedimentation control devices, the Contractor shall notify and coordinate a site inspection with the [Architect]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY SEED COVER (IF NECESSARY) A. Grass seed for temporary seed cover shall be a mixture of the previous year’s crop. Not more than 0.5% by weight shall be weed seed and not more than 1.75% by weight crop seed. Species Coated Status Rate/Acre Little bluestem (Schizachyrium scoparium) Coated 12 lbs. Big bluestem (Andropogon gerardi) 10 lbs Broomsedge (Andropogon virginicus) 3 lbs. Wavy/Coastal hair grass (Deschampsia flexu- osa) Coated 8 lbs. Hard fescue (Sword) 6.5 lbs. Hard fescue (Beacon) 6.5 lbs. Hard fescue (Blue Ray) 5.5 lbs. Sheep fescue (Festuca ovina) 3.5 lbs Upland bent grass (Agrostis perennans) 1.5 lbs. Partridge pea (Chamaecrista fasciculata) 3 lbs. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers, labeled with the name of the seed grower and seed formula. Seed shall be dry and free of mold. C. A manufacturer’s certificate of compliance will be required as specified in MassDOT Specifications M6.03.0. 2.2 COMPOST FILTER SOCKS A. Only mature compost that has been certified by the U.S. Composting Council’s Seal of Testing Assurance Program shall be used. Compost shall meet the following specifications: Factor Acceptable Range pH 5.0-8.5 Moisture Content <60% Organic Matter >25%, dry weight Particle Size 99% passing 2 in. sieve 30-50% passing 3/8 in. sieve Physical Contaminants <1%, dry weight Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 5 B. Filter sock netting shall be cotton or wood fiber, tubular knitted mesh with 1/8 in. openings. Filter socks shall be all-natural biodegradable cotton or wood fiber. For most applications, filter socks shall have 12 in. diameter netting. C. Stakes shall be 2 in. x 2 in. wood in unpaved areas only. D. Compost Socks shall have cylindrical exterior of jute or Tubular Knit Netting made of Polypropylene Multi-Filament Yarn, and an interior composed of organic compost material and wood shavings, and have diameter of 12" minimum. 2.3 SILTATION FENCE A. Geotextile Fabric shall be nonwoven fabric consisting of only long chain polymeric filaments or yarns, such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polyamide, or polyvinylidene-chloride formed into a stable network such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to each other. The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals and free of defects or flaws which significantly affect its physical and/or filtering properties. Fabric shall conform to ASTM D6461 and the relevant sections of AASHTO M288. B. During all periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering to protect the fabric from direct sunlight, UV rays, temperatures greater than 140°F, mud, dirt, dust, and debris. C. Support fence posts shall be at least 48 in. high (extending 2 ft. above normal water line while being driven to sufficient depth to provide stable support for fence) and strong enough to support applied loads. D. Posts shall be wood or steel, at the Contractor’s option. Wood posts shall consist of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross-sectional area of 3 sq. in. Steel posts shall be standard “T” or “U” shape and shall weigh at least 1.33 pounds per linear foot. E. Fabric shall be attached to the posts with prefabricated pockets in the fabric, staples, or other suitable arrangements which have received approval from the Architect. F. Prefabricated fence systems may be used, provided they meet all of the above material requirements. Filter fabric shall be similar to those given below. Product (Woven) Product (Nonwoven) Manufacturer Mirafi 500X Mirafi 140NL TenCate Geosynthetics 365 South Holland Drive Pendergrass, Georgia 30567 706-693-2226 https://www.tencategeo.us/en-us/ GeoTex 2130 GeoTex 351 Propex 4019 Industry Drive Chattanooga, TN 37416 800-621-1273 http://propexglobal.com/ US 200 US 90NW US Fabrics 3904 Virginia Ave Cincinnati, OH 45227 800-518-2290 https://www.usfabricsinc.com/ Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 6 2.4 COIR LOGS A. Coir logs shall be manufactured from coir fibers, be wrapped in a twisted coir netting, and shall meet the following specifications: Factor Acceptable Range Diameter 16” Weight 9 lbs./ft. Density 9 lbs./ft3 Outer Net 80 lbs. Openings 2”x 2” Inner Core Coir Mattress Fiber B. Stakes shall be 2 in. x 2 in. wood in unpaved areas only. 2.5 JUTE MESH A. Jute mesh shall be a uniform, plain weave cloth of undyed and unbleached single jute yarn with an open area of 60-65 percent. The yarn shall be of a loosely twisted construction and it shall not vary in thickness more than one-half its normal diameter. Jute mesh shall be furnished in rolled strips and shall meet the following requirements: B. Width - 48 in., plus or minus 1 in. 41 arp-ends per 48 in. of cloth width (minimum) 41 weft-ends per linear yard (minimum) Weight shall average 1.22 pounds per linear yard with a tolerance of plus or minus five percent C. Staples shall be U-shaped and shall be approximately 6 in. long and 1 in. wide. Machine made staples shall be of No. 11 gauge or heavier steel wire. Handmade staples shall be made from 12 in. lengths of No. 9 gauge or heavier steel wire 2.6 CATCH BASIN FILTERS A. Catch basin filters shall be manufactured from a specially designed woven polypropylene geotextile and sewn by a double needle machine, using a high strength nylon thread. Seams shall have a certified average wide width strength of 165.0 lbs./in. per ASTM D4884. B. The filters shall be manufactured to fit the opening of the catch basin or drop inlet. The filters shall have the following features: two dump straps attached at the bottom to facilitate the emptying of the filters; lifting loops to be used to lift the filters from the basin as an integral part of the system; a restraint cord approximately halfway up the sack to keep the sides away from the catch basin walls and to act as a visual means of indicating when the sack should be emptied. C. Catch basin filter geotextile fabric shall have the following properties: Property (units) Minimum Value Test Method Grab Tensile (lbs) 300 ASTM D4632 Grab Elongation (%) 15 (20 max) ASTM D4632 Puncture (lbs) 120 ASTM D4833 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 7 Mullen Burst (psi) 650 ASTM D3786 Trapezoid Tear (lbs) 120 ASTM D4533 UV Resistance (%) 90 ASTM D4355 Apparent Opening Size (U.S. Standard Sieve) Hole size equal to or smaller than a U.S. Standard No. 40 (0.425 mm) ASTM D4751 Permittivity (sec-1) 0.55 ASTM D4491 2.7 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. The geotextile fabric shall be nonwoven fabric conforming to AASHTO M288, Grade C or better, consisting of only long chain polymeric filaments or yarns, such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polyamide, or polyvinylidene-chloride formed into a stable network such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to each other. The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals and free of defects or flaws which significantly affect its physical and/or filtering properties. B. Geotextile fabric for construction entrance shall have equal to or better than the following properties for minimum average roll value (MARV): Property (units) Woven Nonwoven Test Method Grab Tensile (lbs) 120 120 ASTM D4632 Grab Elongation (%) 35 (maximum) 50 ASTM D4632 CBR Puncture (lbs) 250 340 ASTM D6241 Trapezoid Tear (lbs) 50 70 ASTM D4533 UV Resistance at 500 hours (%) 70 70 ASTM D4355 Apparent Opening Size (U.S. Standard Sieve) Hole size equal to or smaller than a U.S. Standard Sieve No. 40 (0.425 mm) Hole size equal to or smaller than a U.S. Standard Sieve No. 70 (0.212 mm) ASTM D4751 Permittivity (sec-1) 0.05 0.3 ASTM D4491 Flow Rate (gal/min/ft2) 4 29 ASTM D4491 C. Minimum of 6” of clean, crushed stone, ranging from 2 in. to 3 in. in size, will be added over length and width of structure. D. Top dressing shall be clean, 2 in. crushed stone. E. Construction entrance shall have a minimum width of 20 feet. See plan for minimum length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY SEED COVER (IF NECESSARY) A. Grass seed shall be spread by mechanical spreader at a rate of 0.40 lb./100 sq. ft. B. Following seeding, area shall be lightly raked to mingle seed with the top 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. of soil. Areas shall then be smoothed and rolled. C. Following rolling, entire area shall be watered until equivalent of a 2 in. depth of water has been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate which will not dislodge seed. Watering shall be Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 8 repeated thereafter as frequently as needed to prevent drying of surface, until grass attains an average height of 1-1/2 in. D. At the Contractor’s option, seed may be spread by the hydroseeding method, utilizing power equipment commonly used for that purpose. Seed and mulch shall be mixed and applied to achieve application quantities specified herein for the conventional seeding method, with mulch applied at the rate stated in the table below. An industry standard mulching machine shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. Other provisions specified above shall apply to hydroseeding. 1. If the results of the hydroseeding are unsatisfactory, the mixture, and/or application rates and methods shall be modified to achieve the desired results. a. After the grass has appeared, all areas and parts of areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass, for any reason whatsoever, shall be reseeded and such areas and parts of areas seeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass. Slope/Gradient Condition Application Rates ≤ 3H to 1V 3000 lb./ac > 3H to 1V and ≤ 2H to 1V 3500 lb./ac > 2H to 1V and ≤ 1H to 1V 4000 lb./ac > 1H to 1V 4500 lb./ac 3.2 COMPOST SOCKS A. Filter socks shall be placed in rows with ends overlapping behind each other by 24 in. minimum. Each row shall be securely anchored in place with 2 in. x 2 in. x48 in. stakes installed on the downstream side of the socks at sufficient spacing to prevent socks from moving. B. Accumulation of siltation behind the socks shall be removed once the total depth of silt reaches 6 in. Silt shall be removed and properly disposed of as specified herein. 3.3 SILTATION FENCE A. Silt fence installation shall be in the locations shown on the plans and may be supplemented with requirements of regulatory authorities issuing permits. The silt fence installation and check out shall precede any landscape disturbance. B. Installation of the silt fence shall be in accordance with ASTM D 6462, the manufacturer's recommendation, and the Details. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 6 ft. apart for unsupported silt fences of for silt fence material with elongation less than 50 percent. For silt fence material with elongation greater than 50 percent and supported silt fences, the maximum post spacing is 4 ft. C. Excavate a 6 in. by 6 in. trench on the contour with 6 ft. at extending up slope at the ends to prevent silt laden runoff from escaping. Set the posts to the depth specified on the Drawings. Attach the fabric to the posts on the upstream side. The fabric shall extend 2 ft. above the normal water level and at least 10 in. shall extend horizontally along the soil at the bottom. D. Wrap the bottom 10 in. of the fabric around the inside of the trench, and then backfill the soil into the fabric pocket so as to anchor the fence fabric. Soil shall then be placed over the horizontal bottom layer of fabric to a depth of 6 in. Backfill and compact the trench with Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 9 excavated soils. Use one pass with a manually directed vibratory plate for granular soils (sands and gravels) or a manually directed tamper for fine grained soils (clays and silts). E. Fabric may be spliced together along the vertical edge by overlapping the pieces by one post spacing or 6 ft., whichever is greater, and securing the layer together at intervals of 2 in. F. Should the required height exceed the roll width, a second roll shall be used. The width shall be overlapped a minimum of 1 ft. and the layers shall be secured together at not more than 2 ft. intervals along the midpoint of the overlap. G. Should sediment accumulate to the point where the fence shall be overtopped with flow or the weight of the sediment threatens to collapse the fence, the sediment shall be removed and placed above the silt fence out of concentrated flow areas or at other approved locations. H. At the conclusion of construction when all vegetative actions have been completed the silt fence shall be removed and trapped silt shall be spread across established vegetation outside paths of concentrated flow. Maximum depth of spread soil shall be 4 in. 3.4 COIR LOGS A. Clear the installation area of any debris, trees, rock, or large obstructions. Coir logs are designed to contact soil. B. Dig a small trench in the location where the coir logs are to be placed. C. Place the coir logs in the trench and backfill with soil so that the coir logs are tightly packed against the slope. Adjacent coir logs shall be positioned so that the ends fit tightly against one another. Ends shall be secured with coir twine. Coir fiber shall be used to fill any spacing between logs. D. Anchor the coir logs into position by driving 2 in. x 2 in. x36 in. stakes installed on the downstream side of the log at sufficient spacing to prevent log from moving. Notch stakes on outside edge and secure manila or jute rope tightly in s-pattern with a ¼” diameter natural fiber rope. Do not stake directly through coir logs. E. Coir Logs shall be placed in rows with ends overlapping behind each other by 12 in. minimum. 3.5 JUTE MESH A. Jute mesh shall be placed within 48 hours after finish grading or topsoiling of an area is completed. If seeding or planting is specified, within 24 hours after seeding of an area is completed. The jute mesh shall be placed in a manner that will minimize disturbance of the underlying soil. All equipment and application processes shall be approved by the Owner prior to use. B. The surface shall be smoothed and all gullies and potholes backfilled prior to applying jute mesh. All rocks or clods larger than 2 in. in size and all sticks and other foreign material that will prevent contact of the jute mesh with the surface shall be removed. If the surface is extremely dry, the Owner may require watering prior to placement. C. Jute mesh shall be placed uniformly, in contact with the underlying soil, at the locations shown on the Drawings. The top edge of each strip shall be anchored by placing a tight fold of mesh vertically in a 6 in. deep slot or trench in the soil and tamping and stapling in place. Edges of adjacent strips shall be lapped 6 in. with a row of staples at a maximum interval of 3 ft. in the Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 10 lapped area. Bottom edges shall be lapped 12 in. over the next lower strip, if applicable, or buried as specified for top edges. D. Check slots shall consist of separate 4 ft. strips of jute mesh placed at right angles to the direction of water flow immediately prior to placing the general covering of jute mesh. Check slots shall be anchored by burying the top edge of the strip as described above. E. Check slots shall be spaced so that one check slot, or junction slot of the jute mesh occurs every 75 ft. on gradients of less than four percent and every 50 ft. on gradients of more than four percent. On slope drains, a check slot or an end slot shall occur every 25 ft. unless otherwise specified. F. Edges of jute mesh shall be buried around the edges of catch basins and other structures. G. Jute mesh shall be held in place by wire staples driven vertically into the soil. The mesh shall be fastened at intervals not more than 3 ft. apart in three rows for each strip of mesh, with one row along each edge and one row alternately spaced in the middle. All ends of the mesh and check slots shall be fastened at 6 in. intervals across their width. H. The Contractor shall maintain the areas covered by jute mesh until final acceptance of the project. Prior to final acceptance, any damaged areas shall be reshaped as necessary, reseeded, if applicable; and the jute mesh satisfactorily repaired or replaced 3.6 CATCH BASIN FILTERS A. Catch basin filters shall be placed at all inlets to drainage structures as structures are installed and prior to pavement removal. Outlet protection work shall be constructed before runoff is allowed to enter the drainage system. Construction and location of catch basin filters shall be as indicated on the Drawings. B. Once the strap is covered with sediment, catch basin filters should be emptied, cleaned, and placed back into the basin. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Construction entrances shall be installed at every location where traffic leaves or enters the site. B. The area of the construction entrance shall be clear of all vegetation, roots, and other objectionable material. The filter fabric shall be placed on the subgrade prior to the stone placement. The gravel shall be placed to the specified dimensions depicted on the plans. C. The construction entrance shall be a minimum of 50 ft. in length and 20 ft. wide. Stone shall be not less than 6 in. thick. D. The rock shall be dumped and spread into position in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 3 ft. in thickness. It shall be placed to produce a reasonably homogeneous stable fill that contains no segregated pockets of large or small fragments or large unfilled spaces caused by bridging of the larger rock fragments. No compaction is required beyond that resulting from the placing and spreading operations. E. All surface water flowing or diverted toward construction entrances shall be pipe beneath the entrance. If piping is impractical, a mountable berm with 5:1 slope shall be permitted. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 11 F. The entrance shall be maintained in a condition which shall prevent tracking or flowing of sediment onto public rights-of-way. All sediment spilled, dropped, or washed onto public rights- of-way shall be removed immediately. Stabilized construction entrances shall be inspected every seven days and within 24 hours after each rainfall event that produces 1/2 in. or more of precipitation until final stabilization is achieved. Daily inspections shall be made during periods of wet weather. G. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with aggregate, which drains into an approved sediment-trapping device. All sediment shall be prevented from entering storm drains, ditches, or watercourses. Periodic inspection and needed maintenance, including top dressing with additional aggregate, shall be provided after each rain event. 3.8 DEWATERING A. Dewatering shall be used to prevent damages, reduce erosion and control runoff. The discharge water generated by the construction dewatering will be directed with a velocity reducing component to a temporary detention basin or settling basin. B. The pumping discharge shall not be allowed to enter directly into the wetlands. The water from the work areas shall be pumped to a temporary sedimentation and de-watering basin. Approximately 70 percent sedimentation trapping efficiency shall be achieved in sizing the basins to ensure that the basins are adequate to prevent overtopping from dewatering and to provide the required filtering. The outlet from the basin shall be located so as not to cause erosion of the surrounding area. C. Locations of the temporary sedimentation and de-watering basins are to be selected by the Contractor within Limit of Work Layout subject to approval from the Design Engineer. D. Basins are to be inspected twice daily during dewatering operations. E. Basins are to be cleaned daily. F. Remove sediments frequently to maintain efficiency and function of the basin. G. Dispose sediments outside of wetland areas and buffers at a location approved by the Engineer. H. Monitor dewatering systems continuously. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction I. If well point dewatering system is used, it must be designed by a professional engineer. Plan shall include calculations and sizing of catchment areas to ensure containment of all water within the site, for review by engineer of record. 3.9 MANAGING STOCKPILES A. Locate all stockpiles outside of any natural buffer and away from any stormwater conveyances, drain inlets, or areas where stormwater flow is concentrated. B. Stockpiles are not to be located within footprints of any stormwater infiltration systems. C. Install sediment barriers along all downgradient perimeter areas. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 12 D. Stockpiles that are not used for 14 days or more are to be covered or appropriate temporary stabilization period 3.10 DUST CONTROL A. Implement dust control measure during construction. Minimize dust clouds by watering down construction area or using other approved methods. Water used for dust control measure shall be applied using appropriate quantities and equipment. No chemical additives shall be used. B. If the Town has water restrictions that restrict the use of municipal water for dust control. The contractor shall utilize/ install a well as part of the project as water source, or shall provide water from offsite. At no time shall no dust control due to water restrictions be acceptable. 3.11 CONCRETE WASHOUT AREA A. Concrete truck shall be washed out in an area approved by the Architect. Designate wash-out areas with proper signage. Locate a concrete wash-out box near the concrete trucks to prevent concrete residue from being washed off-site. Wash-out containers can be pre-fabricated or constructed on-site out of plywood and plastic sheeting. All runoff from wash-out activities shall be directed to the on-site control measures. Discarded cementitious materials shall be removed and disposed of off-site. 3.12 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES A. Erosion control devices shall be checked in accordance with the SWPPP or as specified herein. Should requirements conflict, the SWPPP shall take precedence. B. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved or vegetated, at which time they shall be removed. After removal, areas disturbed by these devices shall be regraded and seeded. C. Wetland areas, water courses, and drainage swales adjacent to construction activities shall be monitored twice each month for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse environmental impacts, which shall be corrected immediately upon discovery. D. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstruction during construction period. E. Sedimentation fence shall be inspected at least daily by the Contractor and restored as necessary to its approved, newly installed condition. Accumulations of debris and/or silt shall be removed and properly disposed of as necessary at no additional cost. In no case shall accumulations of more than 6 in. above the original ground line be permitted to remain. If a breach or other failure of the fence occurs, the fence shall be immediately restored. Any delay in maintaining the fence shall be cause to immediately suspend the work as provided for in Subsection 8.09 of the MassDOT Specifications. F. Care shall be taken to avoid undermining sedimentation fence during cleanout. If the fabric tears, decomposes, or in any way becomes ineffective, it shall be replaced immediately. G. Following the completion of the work and stabilization of adjacent soil, the fence shall be completely removed from the site and the area restored to its original condition. H. Catch basin filters shall be inspected by Contractor every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the occurrence of a storm event of 0.25 inches or greater. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 312500 - 13 I. Catch basin filters shall be emptied, cleaned, and placed back into the basin once restraint cord is covered with sediment. Filters which become damaged during construction operations shall be repaired or replaced immediately at no additional cost. J. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner which will not cause sediment nuisance elsewhere. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 1 SECTION 321213 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and Contract Conditions as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section or implies on the Drawings. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to ensure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to the Town of North Andover Department of Public Works Standards for Materials and Construction. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, and transportation required to complete all heavy-duty concrete paving work as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. The work includes but not limited to: 1. Concrete dumpster pad. 2. Concrete generator pad. 3. Concrete pavement adjacent to loading area B. See Drawings for location and details. 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS. B. Section 312200 – EARTHWORK C. Section 331000 – WATER UTILITIES. D. Section 333000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE. E. Section 334000 – STORMWATER UTILITIES. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner will provide and pay for testing and inspection during concrete operations. B. Maintain field records of time, date of placing, curing, and removal of forms from concrete for each portion of work. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 2 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products shall comply with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. D. Source or brands of cementitious and aggregate materials shall not be changed during the course of the work. E. Installers Qualifications: Installer with 10-years experience in the production and installation of specified products. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards: 1. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications), latest edition. B. Comply also with applicable requirements of 033000 CONCRETE Section. C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 302 - IR Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 303.1 - Standard Specification for Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete. 4. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing of Concrete. 5. ACI 305R - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306R - Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 325.9R - Guide for Construction of Concrete Pavements. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A1064 - Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 2. C33 - Concrete Aggregates 3. C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete 4. C143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement 5. C150 - Portland Cement 6. C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 7. C231 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 8. C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 9. C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 10. C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants 11. C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 12. C1330 - Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants 13. D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 14. D545 - Standard Test Methods for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Types) 15. D1557 - Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/cu. ft.) 16. D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 17. D5249 - Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 3 E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. M194 - Chemical Admixtures. 1.6 LEED SUBMITTALS A. The Submit the following under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: 1. LEED Submittal Requirements: a. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 018113 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. b. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application. c. As applicable submittals shall include the following: 1) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content. 2) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs. d. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit concrete mix design. Obtain approval before placing concrete. B. Product data: 1. Submit complete materials list of items proposed for the Work. Identify materials source and recycled content. 2. Submit admixture, curing compound, retarder, and accessory item product data. 3. Submit material certificates for aggregates, reinforcing, and joint fillers. 4. Submit sample of Detectable Warning Strip C. Submit concrete delivery tickets. Each ticket shall contain the following: 1. Batch number. 2. Mix by class or sack content with maximum size aggregate. 3. Admixtures. 4. Air content. 5. Slump. 6. Time of loading. 7. Color additives. D. Submit concrete test reports to verify mix design. E. Construct samples of the following on site: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 4 1. For cement concrete paving show expansion joints, tooling, and finish. Minimum 6 ft. x 6 ft. sample panel. 2. Preformed joint filler. 3. Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates, and additives used in mockup for comparison with materials used in remaining work. 4. Accepted mockup provides visual standard for work of Section. 5. Mockup shall remain through completion of work for use as a quality standard for finished work. 6. Remove and dispose of mockup when directed. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials, admixtures, and retarders in manufacturer's standard unopened containers with labels legible and intact. Store and protect from freezing and damage. B. Deliver, mix, and place concrete in accordance with cited standards and Testing Agency instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. Material for aggregate base course shall be a graded, granular, non-frost susceptible, free- draining materials consisting of either durable stone and coarse sand or of blast furnace slag, practically free from loam and clay, which can be readily compacted to form a stable foundation. Material for aggregate base shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section M2.01.7 Dense graded crushed stone for subbase. 2.2 CONCRETE REINFORCING A. Concrete slab/pavement reinforcing shall be welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A1064. Size shall be 6 in. x 6 in. – W2.9 x W2.9 with a minimum 1” cover. There shall also be a second type of reinforcing with #5 rebar places 12” O.C. conforming to ASTM A615-60 grade steel. Reinforcement shall be free from imperfections and surface coating of rust, dirt, oils, paint, grease, and mill scale, and shall present a clean, fresh surface. Rust that occurs in scales or that pits the steel shall be considered an imperfection. Surface rust shall be brushed to remove loose materials. 2.3 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE A. Portland cement concrete for pavements and slabs shall be air-entrained type with a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.50 conforming to ACI 325.9R. Minimum compressive strengths at 28 days shall be as follows: Flexural strength with third point loading - 650 psi; compressive strength - 5000 psi. B. Concrete shall be air-entrained type, conforming to ASTM C94. Air content by volume shall be 6 percent, plus or minus one percent, and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C231. C. Concrete slump shall be not less than 2 in. nor greater than 4 in., determined in accordance with ASTM C143. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 5 D. Cement shall be Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or II. Only one color of cement, all of the same manufacturer, shall be used for the work. Type III cement shall be used only with the prior approval of the Engineer. E. Fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. F. Concrete shall contain a water reducing agent to minimize cement and water content of the concrete mix at the specified slump. Water reducing agent shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A. G. No calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall be added to the concrete. No admixtures other than those specified shall be used in the concrete without the specific written permission of the Engineer in each case. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing shall be by moist curing or by use of curing compound. B. Absorptive cover shall conform to AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute, weighing approximately 9 oz/sq. yd. dry. C. Curing paper shall be non-staining, fiber reinforced laminated kraft bituminous product conforming to ASTM C171. 4 mil polyethylene sheeting may be substituted for curing paper. D. Curing compound shall be a resin-base, white pigmented compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type II. 2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joint filler shall be performed, non-bituminous type joint filler conforming to ASTM D1752, Type II. Expansion joint filler shall meet the requirements of ASTM D545. B. Pre-molded filler shall be one piece for the full depth and width of the joint leaving a sealant recess as indicated. Use of multiple pieces of lesser dimensions to make up required depth and width of joint shall not be permitted. C. Except as otherwise noted on the Drawings, joint filler shall be 1/2 in. thick and shall receive 7/8 in. joint backer rod conforming to ASTM C1330 or ASTM D5249. D. Expansion joint shall be sealed with a two-component polyurethane-based sealant, conforming to ASTM C920. 2.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Transverse construction joints shall be placed at side and end terminations of pavement and whenever placing of concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. B. Steel reinforcement shall be continued across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Reinforcement shall not be continued through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. C. Butt joint with dowels or thickened edge joint shall be used if construction joints occur at location of control joint. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 6 D. A bonding agent shall be used for butt joints at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. E. Doweled joints shall have one half of dowel length coated in lubricant or asphalt to prevent bonding of concrete to one side of joint. F. Keyed joints with tie bars shall be used if the joint occurs at any other location than a control joint. 2.7 GROUT A. Grout shall be mixed in the proportions of one part Portland cement to two parts sand, by volume. Only sufficient water shall be used to enable grout to barely hold its shape when squeezed into a ball in the hand. Sand for grout shall be "Fine Aggregate", conforming to ASTM C33. B. Non-shrink grout shall be pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be 5,000 psi minimum, but in no case less than the specified strength of the adjacent concrete. Manufacturer shall provide evidence that the material meets the requirements of the Army COE CRD-C 621. Grout permanently exposed to view shall be non- oxidizing; metallic grout may be used in other locations. C. Non-shrink grout shall be one of the following, or approved equal: Manufacturer Product Gifford-Hill Co. Supreme Master Builders Co. Embeco U.S. Grout Corporation Five Star Grout 2.8 BOND BREAKER A. Bond breakers shall be asphalt felt conforming to ASTM D226, Type I or 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought to sub-grade elevation under Section 312200, EARTHWORK before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of areas to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding sub-grade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section. B. Existing sub-grade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring sub-grade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section. C. Sub-grade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction at optimum moisture of at least 95 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 7 percent of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D1557. Sub-grade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge. D. Excavation required in pavement sub-grade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of sub-grade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed sub-grade, sub-base, base, or pavement, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as directed by the Designer as specified in Section 312200, EARTHWORK. Completed sub-grade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded. E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in sub-grade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement. F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on sub-grade. G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site. H. Prepared sub-grade will be inspected by the Designer. Sub-grade shall be approved by the Designer before installation of gravel base course. Disturbance to sub-grade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification. 3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first class road work, and MassDOT Specifications Section 405 Gravel Base Course. B. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least twice the base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported. C. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 in. thick, compacted measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density, using a 6 ton steel wheel roller or vibratory roller equivalent to a 6 ton static roller, or an approved equivalent. 1. Material shall be placed adjacent to walls, manholes, catch basins, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. 2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. 3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. as measured by means of a 10 ft. long straightedge, shall be replaced and properly recompacted. D. Base course shall be compacted at optimum moisture content to not less than 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. E. Sub-grade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired. F. Portions of sub-grade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise injured, shall be cleaned, replaced, or otherwise Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 8 repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation. 3.3 CONCRETE REINFORCING A. Before being placed in position, reinforcing shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material which may reduce the bond between the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned when necessary. B. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded. C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforcing shall extend within 2 in. of formwork and expansion joints. Reinforcing shall continue through control joints. Adjacent sheets of fabric reinforcing shall lap 6 in. D. After forms have been oiled, but before concrete is placed, reinforcing steel and anchors shall be securely wired in the exact position called for, and shall be maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair supports shall be provided in a number and arrangement satisfactory to the Designer. 3.4 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING A. Paving mix, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as to weather, condition of base, and other considerations shall meet the requirements of ACI 316R and ACI325.9R. Pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. B. The Designer shall be notified of concrete placement sufficiently in advance of start of operation to allow their representative to complete preliminary inspection of the work, including sub-grade, forms, and reinforcing steel, if used. C. Normal concrete placement procedures shall be followed. Concrete shall arrive at the jobsite so that no additional water will be required to produce the desired slump. When conditions develop that require addition of water to produce the desired slump, permission of the Designer must be obtained. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its place of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation or loss of material. D. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Adjacent work shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions. F. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water on surface. G. Concrete which has set or partially set before placing shall not be employed. Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted. H. Concrete shall be thoroughly spaded and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners of forms. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 9 I. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be cleaned of foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and washing. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8 in. thick, shall be well scrubbed into thoroughly dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried or set. 3.5 FINISHING A. Broomed: Pull broom across freshly troweled concrete to produce medium texture in straight lines perpendicular to main line of traffic. Do not dampen brooms. B. Trowel: Use steel trowel to produce smooth dense surface. Do not over-trowel or start troweling late. 3.6 CURING A. It is essential that concrete be kept continuously damp from time of placement until end of specified curing period. It is equally essential that water not be added to surface during floating and troweling operations, and not earlier than 24 hours after concrete placement. Between finishing operations surface shall be protected from rapid drying by a covering of waterproofing paper. Surface shall be damp when the covering is placed over it, and shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not sooner than 24 hours after placing concrete. None of the water so applied shall be troweled or floated into surface. B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with curing paper or application of a curing compound. 1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper with seams lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During curing period surface shall be checked frequently, and sprayed with water as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing concrete. 2. If concrete is cured with a curing compound, compound shall be applied at a rate of 200 sq. ft. per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each other. C. Curing period shall be seven days minimum. 3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joints shall be 1/2 in. wide and shall be as located on the Drawings, but no more than three times (in feet) the total width of the slab (in inches) where concrete walkways meet other structures, including building foundation walls and other slabs. B. Expansion joint shall be formed in the concrete to required width with preformed joint filler in place. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab. Joint filler shall extend the full length of the expansion joint. 1. For concrete pavements and pads, depth of joint filler shall be as required to form a 1-1/4 in. deep sealant and backer rod recess below finished concrete surface. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 10 3.8 CONTROL JOINTS A. concrete as soon as concrete is hard enough that the edges abutting the cut do not chip from the saw blade. In hot weather, saw cuts shall be made within six to 12 hours after finishing concrete to avoid cracking. An early-entry dry-cut saw shall be used if concrete is cut within one to four hours of finishing. Use test cuts to determine the best timing for sawcutting. Begin sawcutting as soon as raveling stops during test cuts. B. Control joints shall be spaced (in feet) no more than two to two and half times the slab thickness (in inches). A 4 in. slab shall have joints no more than 8 ft. to 10 ft. apart. C. Joints shall be cut to 25 percent of the depth of the slab, with a minimum depth of 1 in. A 4 in. slab shall have joints 1 in. deep. D. Reinforcement shall not be extended through a control joint. 3.9 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed, placed, or cured when the mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, or is expected to fall to below 40 degrees Fahrenheit within 72 hours, and the concrete after placing shall be protected by covering, heat, or both. B. Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing weather shall be subject to the approval and direction of the Designer. Procedures shall be in accordance with provisions of ACI 306R. 3.10 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms and reinforcement just prior to placing shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every effort shall be made to minimize delays which will result in excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival on the job. B. During periods of excessively hot weather (95 degrees Fahrenheit, or above), ingredients in the concrete shall be cooled insofar as possible and cold mixing water shall be used to maintain the temperature of the concrete at permissible levels all in accordance with the provisions of ACI 305. Any concrete with a temperature above 95 degrees Fahrenheit, when ready for placement will not be acceptable, and will be rejected. C. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather giving air temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, etc.) and relative humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as delivered and after placing in forms. Data shall be correlated with the progress of the work so that conditions SURROUNDING THE CONSTRUCTION OF ANY PART OF THE STRUCTURE CAN BE ASCERTAINED. 3.11 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES A. Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened sufficiently. If necessary 1/2 in. thick plywood sheets shall be used to protect the exposed surface. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING 321213 - 11 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to natural variations in color and appearance of unpigmented concrete, are acceptable. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 1 SECTION 321216 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and Contract Conditions as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, will be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section or implied on the drawings. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to ensure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to the Town of North Andover Department of Public Works Standards for Materials and Construction. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, and transportation required to complete all asphalt paving work as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. B. Complete all work in conformance with the lines and grades shown on the Plans. 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 101453 – TRAFFIC SIGNAGE. B. Section 321213 – HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE PAVING. C. Section 312200 – EARTHWORK. D. Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS. E. Section 321600 – CURBS. F. Section 321713 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS. G. Section 331000 – WATER UTILITIES. H. Section 333000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE. I. Section 334000 – STORMWATER UTILITIES. 1.4 LEED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 2 1. LEED Submittal Requirements: a. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. b. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application. c. As applicable submittals shall include the following. 1) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content 2) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs d. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures 1.5 ADA AND MAAB COMPLIANCE A. Special attention is to be given to compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the requirements of the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board (MAAB). 1. All walkways (as defined by Section 22.1 of 521 CMR) shall be graded to a 4.5 percent running slope, with a maximum allowed running slope of 5 percent. The cross slope 2. (perpendicular to travel) for all walkways and paths shall be constructed at 1.5 percent with a maximum cross slope of 2 percent. 3. The slope of all ramps and side slopes of handicap curb cuts (as defined by Section 21.1 of 521 CMR) shall be constructed at 7.5 percent, with a maximum of 8.3 percent. Ramps (as defined by Section 24.1 of 521 CMR) shall be constructed to a maximum slope of 8.3 percent. 4. Accessible parking spaces and loading zones (as defined by Section 23.0 of 521 CMR) shall be level with a surface slope not exceeding 2 percent in all directions. 5. A 5 ft. minimum level (1.9 percent max pitch) area shall be provided at all flush entrances to buildings. Puddling of water at the entrances shall not be allowed. 6. The the Contractor shall assume that all grades in pedestrian paths of travel shall be verified/checked with a 2 ft. electronic “Smart Level”. B. The above requirements shall supersede the grades shown on the plans. If these requirements cannot be met with the grades shown on the plans, the Designer shall be notified immediately for direction. C. Areas installed which do not meet the above requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection: The Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to obtain approval of the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 3 B. All work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to existing streets, curbs, paving to remain, existing plant materials, and adjoining properties. C. The Contractor shall remove all debris, construction equipment, and waste material from areas within the limit of work prior to inspection for acceptance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All products and supplies shall be delivered to the job adequately protected from damage during transit. B. All products and supplies shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected against damage. Damaged products and/or supplies will be rejected and shall not be employed in the work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of asphalt paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following: 1. MassDOT Specifications Section 460 for bituminous pavement for roadways and parking areas, Section 701 for bituminous sidewalks, and Section 405 for aggregate base course 2. MassDOT Specifications Section 472 for repairs to existing pavements after installation of new curb. B. Paving work, base course, wearing course, and related work shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance. C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work, except as otherwise noted. D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade. E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices. F. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing of paving and associated work. 1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M81 Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type) M140 Emulsified Asphalt T99 Moisture–Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 in.) Drop B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 4 D692 Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures D1557 Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/cu. ft.) C. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications) D. All work shall conform to the Town of North Andover Public Works Department Standards for Materials and Construction. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s product data for the following: 1. Bituminous Pavement Mixes 2. Complete bituminous concrete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to and approved by the Designer at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin. 3. Aggregate base and subbase material sieve analyses matching plans and details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAVEL SUB-BASE A. Material for aggregate subbase shall be a graded, granular, non-frost susceptible, free-draining material, consisting of either durable stone and coarse sand or of blast furnace slag, practically free from loam and clay, and which can be readily compacted to form a stable foundation. B. Material for aggregate base shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section M1.03.1 Processed Gravel for Subbase. Sieve Designation Percent Passing 3 in. 100 1 ½ in. 70-100 3/4 in. 50-85 No. 4 30-60 No. 200 0-10 2.2 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE FOR SUB-BASE A. Material for aggregate subbase shall consist of crusher-run coarse aggregates of crushed stone or gravel and fine aggregates of natural sand or stone screenings uniformly premixed and placed on the subgrade or subbase in close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. B. Material shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section M2.01.7 Dense-Graded Crushed Stone for Subbase. Sieve Designation Percent Passing 2 in. 100 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 5 1 ½ in. 70-100 3/4 in. 50-85 No. 4 30-55 No. 50 8-24 No. 200 3-10 2.3 RECLAIMED BASE COURSE A. The work shall consist of scarifying and pulverizing the in-place pavement and underlying material, mixing and/or blending the materials, and spreading and compacting resultants mixture to the lines and grades shown on the plans and details. B. All scarified and pulverized material shall pass the 2-inch sieve. Material for blending shall conform to MassDOT Specification Section M1.03.0 Gravel Borrow, Type b. Sieve Designation Percent Passing ½ in. 50-85 No. 4 40-75 No. 50 8-28 No. 200 0-10 Maximum Size of Stone in Gravel shall be 2 inches largest dimension. 2.4 GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. Material for aggregate base course shall be a graded, granular, non-frost susceptible, free- draining material, consisting of either durable stone and coarse sand or of blast furnace slag, practically free from loam and clay, and which can be readily compacted to form a stable foundation. Material for aggregate base shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section M1.03.0 Gravel Borrow, Type b. Sieve Designation Percent Passing ½ in. 50-85 No. 4 40-75 No. 50 8-28 No. 200 0-10 Maximum Size of Stone in Gravel shall be 2 inches largest dimension. 2.5 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE A. Bituminous concrete shall be a standard plant-mixed, hot-laid paving material for road work, consisting of clean, mineral aggregate, mineral filler (if required), and bituminous material conforming to MassDOT Specifications Section M3.06.00 Hot Mix Asphalt. B. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) shall be used at the Contractor’s option, unless otherwise indicated, provided that the end product is in conformance with the designated job-mix formula. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 6 RAP shall comply with MassDOT Specifications Section M3.06.2. Max percent permissible of RAP for binder only is 20% and max percent permissible of RAP in topcoat is 15%. RAP maximum top size aggregate introduced into the mix shall be 1-1/2 inches. C. Base, or bottom course, paving for roadways and parking lots shall have maximum aggregate size passing 2 in. sieve and bitumen content of 4.5-5.5 percent (plus or minus 1/2 percent by weight). D. Binder course paving for roadways and parking lots shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve and bitumen content of five percent (plus or minus 0.4 percent by weight). E. Top, or wearing course, paving for roadways and parking lots shall have maximum aggregate size passing 5/8 in. sieve and bitumen content of 5.5-7.0 percent (plus or minus 0.4 percent by weight). F. Surface, or wearing course, paving for sidewalks shall conform to composition for “Dense Mix.” 2.6 AGGREGATES A. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, crushed rock consisting of the angular fragments obtained by breaking and crushing shattered natural rock, free from a detrimental quantity of thin or elongated pieces, free from dirt or other objectionable materials, and complying with ASTM D692 and MassDOT Specifications Section M3.06.2A Coarse Aggregate. The coarse mineral aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable, crushed rock consisting of the angular fragments obtained by breaking and crushing shattered natural rock, reasonably free from thin and/or elongated pieces, free from dirt or other objectionable materials. It shall be surface dry and shall have a moisture content of not more than 0.5 percent after drying. Aggregates from multiple sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the same stockpile. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 7 B. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged, natural sand, sand prepared from stone, or combinations thereof complying with ASTM D1073 and MassDOT Specifications Section M3.06.2.B Fine Aggregate. The fine aggregate shall consist of one of the following: 1. 100% Natural Sand: Natural sand shall consist of inert, hard, durable grains of quartz or other hard, durable rock, free from topsoil or clay, surface coatings, organic matter or other deleterious materials. 2. 100% Stone Sand: Stone sand shall be a processed material prepared from stone screenings to produce a consistently graded material conforming to specification requirements. 3. A blend of sand and stone screenings, the proportions of which shall be approved by the Engineer: Stone screenings shall be the product of a secondary crusher and shall be free from dirt, clay, organic matter, excess fines or other deleterious material. 4. A blend of natural sand and stone sand. C. Mineral Filler: Portland Cement, limestone dust, hydrated lime, stone float, or stone dust complying with ASTM D242 and MassDOT Specifications Section M3.10.5C. Mineral Filler. D. Materials shall meet Commonwealth of Massachusetts DOT Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges Section M3.06.2: SIEVE ANALYSIS OF MIX Binder Course (M3.06.2) Top Course (M3.06.2) Percent Toler- ance Standard Sieve Percent Passing By Weight Percent Passing By Weight 1-inch 100 +/- 7.0 % ¾-inch 80 to 100 +/- 7.0 % 5/8-inch 100 +/- 7.0 % ½-inch 55 to 75 95 to 100 +/- 7.0 % 3/8-inch 80 to 100 +/- 7.0 % No.4 28 to 50 50 to 76 +/- 7.0 % No.8 20 to 38 37 to 54 +/- 4.0 % No.16 26 to 40 +/- 4.0 % No.30 8 to 22 17 to 29 +/- 4.0 % No.50 5 to 15 10 to 21 +/- 4.0 % No.100 5 to 16 +/- 4.0 % No.200 0 to 5 2 to 7 +/- 2.0 % Bitumen 4.5 to 5.5 5.5 to 7 +/ 0.4 % 2.7 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous material for tack coat shall be one of the following: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 8 1. Cut-back asphalt (rapid-curing type) conforming to AASHTO M81, Grade RC-70 or conforming to MassDOT Specifications Section M3.02.0 Cutback Asphalts. M3.02.0: These materials shall be blends of asphalt cements and suitable solvents. They shall be homogeneous, free from water, and conform to the requirements of AASHTO- M81 for the rapid curing type and AASHTO-M82 for the medium curing type 2. Emulsified asphalt (rapid-setting type) conforming to AASHTO M140, Grade RS-1 or conforming to MassDOT Specifications Section M3.03.0 Asphalt Emulsions. B. Bitumen shall be a rapid-setting type emulsified asphalt conforming to AASHTO M140, Grade RS-1. C. Bituminous crack sealer shall be a hot-applied bituminous sealer conforming to Fed. Spec. SS- S-1401C and MassDOT Specifications Section M3.05.4 Hot Applied Bituminous Concrete Crack Sealer. For any bituminous mixture containing RAP, the Contractor shall submit, in addition to the Job- Mix formula, the amount and type of asphalt modifier to be added to the mixture to restore the asphalt properties of the RAP to a level that is reasonably consistent with the requirements for new asphalt. Only asphalt cements, grades AC-5, AC-10, AC-20 or a blend thereof shall be used as modifiers and shall meet the requirements of MassDOT Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall verify to the Owner in writing that the subgrade has been inspected, tested, and gradients and elevations are correct, dry, and properly prepared in accordance with Section 312200 3.2 GRADING A. Areas to be paved shall be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section. B. Existing subgrade material which does not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials which are needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section. C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted to bring top 9 in. of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90 percent of maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge. D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade or subbase, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed in accordance with Earthwork Section. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 9 E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement. F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade. G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this Section, and unsuitable or excess material maintained for completing work of this Section, shall be legally disposed of off-site. H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Designer. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this Section. I. Compaction of subgrade shall continue until the surface is true and even to the proposed lines and grades, within a tolerance of 1 in. above or below the required cross-sectional elevations and the maximum irregularity not exceeding 1 in. under a 10 ft. line longitudinally. 3.3 GRAVEL SUBBASE A. Gravel (conforming to MassDOT Specification Section M1.03.0 Type b) shall be spread and compacted in layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth, except the final layer of gravel subbase which shall be 4 in. Layers shall be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density of the material as determined by AASHTO T99 compaction test, Method C, in accordance with Earthwork Section. B. Any stone with a dimension greater than that permitted for the type of gravel specified shall be removed from the subbase before the gravel is compacted. Compaction shall continue until the surface is true and even to the proposed lines and grades within a tolerance of 3/8 in. above or below the required cross-sectional elevations and the maximum irregularity not exceeding 3/8 in. under a 10 ft. line longitudinally. In locations when 8 in. of gravel is used for Gravel Base Course this tolerance shall be 3/4 in. under a 10 ft. line. C. Any area of gravel subbase which, after being rolled, does not form a satisfactory, solid, stable foundation shall be removed, replaced, and recompacted by the Contractor without additional compensation. 3.4 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE A. Dense-graded crushed stone (conforming to MassDOT Specifications Section M2.01.7) shall be spread and compacted in layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth, except the final layer which shall be 4 in. Layers shall be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density of the material as determined by AASHTO T99, compaction test Method C, in accordance with Earthwork Section. B. Any stone with a dimension greater than that permitted for the type of gravel specified shall be removed from the subbase before the gravel is compacted. Compaction shall continue until the surface is true and even to the proposed lines and grades within a tolerance of 3/8 in. above or below the required cross-sectional elevations and the maximum irregularity not exceeding 3/8 in. under a 10 ft. line longitudinally. In locations when 8 in. of gravel is used for Gravel Base Course this tolerance shall be 3/4 in. under a 10 ft. line. C. Any area of dense graded crushed stone sub-base which, after being rolled, does not form a satisfactory, solid, stable foundation shall be removed, replaced and recompacted by the Contractor without extra compensation. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 10 3.5 RECLAIMED BASE COURSE A. Prior to scarifying and pulverizing the existing pavement, the Contractor shall locate and protect existing drainage and utility structures and underground pipes, culverts, conduits, and other appurtenances. If the upper sections of the utility structures are removed to facilitate scarifying and pulverizing the existing pavement, the remaining part of the structure shall immediately be covered with a steel plate capable of withstanding a 36.5-ton truck load with impact. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Designer for approval a description of the equipment and the process to be used for scarifying and pulverizing the existing pavement. The pulverizing operation shall be controlled in such a manner that the resultant material shall be free from excessive fine material (materials passing the No. 200 sieve). The Designer will determine the acceptable level of fine material. C. The bituminous pavement and underlying material shall be scarified to the depths shown on the plans or established by the Designer and pulverized and mixed to produce a consistent homogeneous material, 100 percent passing the 3-inch sieve and without an excess of material passing the No. 200 sieve. If the Designer directs, Gravel Borrow (type b) shall be blended with the pulverized material in quantities in accordance with Earthwork Section to produce a blend suitable for use as a base course. D. Unsuitable materials in the subgrade shall be removed to the lines and depths established by the Designer and replaced with gravel borrow. E. The mixed and/or blended base course material shall be spread and compacted in accordance to the requirements of Gravel Subbase. 3.6 GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. Aggregate base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first class road work, and MassDOT Specifications Section 405, Gravel Base Course. B. Compaction of aggregate base course shall be to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2-1/2 in. shall be excluded from course. C. Width of base course shall be greater than the width of pavement surface and shall extend at least twice the base thickness beyond edge of the course above. D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 4 in. thick, compacted measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. E. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. F. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned area, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. G. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. using a 10 ft. long straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 11 H. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired. I. Portions of subgrade, or of construction above, which become contaminated, softened, or dislodged by passing of traffic or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned, replaced, and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation. 3.7 BITUMINOUS PAVING A. Bituminous paving mixture, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as to weather and condition of materials shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section 460 Class I Bituminous Concrete Pavement for roadway and parking areas and Section 701 Sidewalks, Wheelchair Ramps, and Driveways for sidewalks. B. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to Designer for approval at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin. C. Bituminous base, binder, and wearing courses shall each be applied individually, in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings. D. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Adjacent concrete work, structures, and appurtenances shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition. F. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless artificial light, approved by the Designer, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise shall not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material shall not be permitted. G. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling freshly spread mixture shall not be permitted. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to 1/2 width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed shall not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in compactable condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal of mixture, as needed. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold. H. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers shall weigh at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 12 I. Intermediate Rolling: Follow initial rolling as soon as possible while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted as follows: 1. Minimum Average Density: 93 percent of theoretical maximum density according to AASHTO T209 or ASTM D2041, with no individual test less than 91 percent nor greater than 97 percent. J. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture, and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Bituminous material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work. K. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base, and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic. L. Tack Coat: 1. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt concrete base courses or Portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete or into asphalt concrete pavement. 2. Do not apply when base is wet, contains excess moisture, during rain, or when frozen. 3. Apply tack coat to asphalt concrete base course or sand asphalt base course. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat between each lift or layer of full depth asphalt concrete and sand asphalt bases and on surface of bases where asphalt concrete paving will be constructed. 4. Apply at rate which produces a residual of asphalt cement between 0.04 and 0.06 gal per sq. yd of surface. 5. Allow drying until at proper condition to receive paving. M. Bituminous paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over. N. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1 ft. of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge. O. After final rolling, vehicular traffic shall not be permitted on pavement until it has cooled and hardened, and in no case less than six hours. P. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to the following tolerance when tested with a 10 ft. rolling straightedge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to the centerline of paved areas: 1. For roadway and parking pavement surface course – 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 2. For walkway pavement surface course – 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3. At joint with existing pavement and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed plus or minus 0.01 ft. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 13 4. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed plus or minus 0.05 ft. Q. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this Section for a distance of 30 ft. in all directions of the irregularity. 3.8 REPAIRS TO EXISTING PAVEMENT A. Subgrade shall be done in strict accordance with Site Preparation Section. B. Aggregate base course shall be replaced in strict conformance with this section. C. Bituminous concrete paving mixture, equipment, and methods of mixing and placing shall conform to this Section and MassDOT Specifications Section 472 Bituminous Concrete for Patching. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified, the quality control tests and inspections specified below will be conducted by the Owner’s Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with project testing requirements. The Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor for assurance of quality control. Field testing, frequency, and methods may vary as determined by and between the Owner and CTL. B. Asphalt course field density test for in-place materials: 1. Density tests shall be conducted on each core sample taken in accordance with ASTM D1188 or D2726 (AASHTO T166, T275, T331) as applicable. 2. In-place density tests by nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D2950 shall also be taken by the Con- tractor as necessary to assure the specified density is obtained. Nuclear density shall be correlated with ASTM D1188 or D2726 or AASHTO T166, T275, T331 as applicable. 3. Density tests on courses to be overlaid by subsequent courses shall be performed within 48 hours prior to placement of next lift. If inclement weather occurs after testing, retest prior to placement of next lift C. Aggregate base and subbase field tests for in-place materials will be performed in accordance with the following: 1. Density: Nuclear Method, ASTM D6938. One test in each lift for each 20,000 sq. ft. of in- place base and subbase material areas. 2. Base and Subbase Material Thicknesses: One test for each 20,000 sq. ft. of in-place base and subbase material areas. All areas tested for thickness shall meet or exceed the base and subbase thicknesses shown on the drawings. 3. Verify Contractor’s measurements of base and subbase course elevations. D. Prepare and distribute test reports as specified in project testing requirements. E. Check surface areas as necessary to identify ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner. F. Asphalt Content and Aggregate Gradation: Asphalt content extraction and gradation of extracted aggregate testing shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T 308 or AASHTO Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 ASPHALT PAVING SPECIFICATION 321216 - 14 T164 and ASTM D5444 respectively and MADOT specification requirements. At least two asphalt content and two gradation tests shall be taken for each 2000 tons or each day pavement is placed. G. Areas of deficient paving, including compaction, smoothness, thickness, and asphalt mixture, shall be delineated, removed, and replaced in compliance with specifications requirements. Alternative remedial or corrective for repair of deficient paving may be allowed provided a plan of corrective action is submitted in the form of a Request For Information (RFI) and the plan is approved by the Engineer. 3.10 Certify in writing to the Owner that asphalt placement, base and subbase course placement is in accordance with Contract Document requirements prior to subsequent work thereon. 3.11 AS-BUILTS (OPTIONAL PROJECT SPECIFIC) A. The Contractor shall provide the Designer with as-builts of the binder grades of all new asphalt poured for walkways, plazas, loading docks, handicap ramps, and vehicular areas. The stamped and signed as-built plan shall be based on a field survey performed by a certified professional land surveyor. Spot grades shall be no more than 25-ft apart, and all four corners of intersecting walkways. ADA parking spots shall have spot grades at the corners of the stalls and down the center line. A Final as-built shall be provided after top course paving completed. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CURBS 321600 –1 SECTION 321600 CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and Contract Conditions as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section or implies on the Drawings. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to ensure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT) Standards for Materials and Construction. E. All work shall conform to the Town of North Andover Standards for Construction. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, services, equipment, and transportation required to complete all asphalt curbs, granite curb, and concrete curbs as shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 101453 – TRAFFIC SIGNAGE. B. Section 312200 – EARTHWORK. C. Section 311000 – SITE PREPARATION. D. Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS. E. Section 321213 – HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE F. Section 321216 – ASPHALT PAVING. G. Section 321713 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS. H. Section 331000 – WATER UTILITIES. I. Section 333000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE. J. Section 334000 – STORMWATER UTILITIES. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CURBS 321600 –2 1.4 LEED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: 1. LEED Submittal Requirements: a. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. b. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application. c. As applicable submittals shall include the following. i. Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content ii. Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs d. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit Shop Drawings in accordance with requirements of Division 01. Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract: 1. Precast Concrete Curb 2. Mountable Concrete Curb 3. Granite Curb 4. Mountable Granite Curb B. Shop Drawings and cuts shall indicate Specification Section and Paragraph requiring items submitted. C. Submit samples of all materials requested by the Designer for approval, in accordance with requirements of Division 01 and obtain approval before ordering materials. D. Finished work shall conform to approved samples and Shop Drawings. E. Submit compaction testing results. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Cement concrete and hot mix asphalt placement, weather, and temperature restrictions shall be in accordance with Section 32 12 13 – Cast-in-Place Concrete and Section 32 12 16 – Asphalt Paving. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CURBS 321600 –3 B. Unless otherwise indicated, precast concrete curb materials and construction shall conform to the applicable portions of the following: 1. MassDOT Specification Section 580, "Curb and Edging" 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials furnished under this Section in a manner to prevent cracking or stress of components and to prevent chipping, staining, mechanical damage, or damage by the elements. B. Deliver work under this Section to site in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and at such times as to permit proper coordination of the various parts. C. Precast curb units shall be delivered to the job adequately protected from damage during transit. D. Curb units shall be stored off the ground with wood cribbing between each unit. Curb shall be protected against staining, chipping, and other damage. Cracked, badly chipped, or stained units will be rejected and shall not be employed in the work. E. Cement Concrete delivery time and storage time onsite shall be in accordance with Section 32 12 13 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. F. Batch ticket information shall be submitted to the Engineer upon placement of cement concrete and hot mix asphalt. 1.8 REGULATIONS A. All pedestrian ramps and sidewalks shall conform to the most current applicable details of the MassDOT; to the latest MA AAB rules and regulations; and to the latest Federal ADA standards for accessible design. 1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications). B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. M 153 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion 2. Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D 235 Petroleum Spirits (Mineral Spirits) 2. D 260 Boiled Linseed Oil 1.10 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work for one year from the date of Substantial Completion from damage due to improper installation and improper use. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CURBS 321600 –4 B. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the bituminous curb shall conform to the applicable portions of MassDOT Specifications Section 500 Curb and Edging. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRANITE CURB STONES A. Furnish and install, prior to surfacing, vertical granite curbs of hard and durable stone, conforming to MassDOT Specifications for Type VA-4 as described in Section M9.04.1 Granite Curb, except as otherwise indicated B. Vertical curbs shall be Chelmsford light gray granite. Curbs shall be 18 in. deep plus or minus 1 in., 6 in. wide at top with front and back faces, tops and ends dressed for setting. The front and back face shall be at right angles to the plane of the top. Minimum length is 6 ft. Top and exposed faces shall be quarry face C. Foundation shall consist of 2 in. minus clean, porous gravel spread upon the subgrade and after being thoroughly compacted by tamping shall be not less than 6 inches in depth. Trenches for curb stone shall be 18 in. wide D. Cement mortar shall meet the requirements of MassDOT Specifications Section M4.02.15 Cement Mortar and shall have “Natural” color to match curb color PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GRADING AND COMPACTION OF BASE CURBS A. Do all necessary grading, in addition to that specified under EARTHWORK Section to bring subgrade or foundation to required grades and sections for curb installation after final compaction. Tramp traces of trenches. Remove spongy and otherwise unsuitable material and replace with approved material. Loosen exceptionally hard spots and recompact. Take every precaution to obtain a foundation of uniform bearing power. In absence of specific requirements, compact foundation by such means as will provide firm base and insurance against settlement of superimposed work. B. Subbase preparation, including material, shall be of proper approved quality as specified under EARTHWORK Section. Start of work under this Section shall constitute acceptance of the foundation conditions to which this work is to be applied. Any defects in work resulting from such conditions shall be corrected under this Section, at no extra cost to the Owner. C. Maintain subbase in satisfactory condition and properly drained until surface improvement is placed. 3.2 CONCRETE CURBS A. Curb shall be set in a minimum 18 in. wide trench, with trench bottom at 6 in. below bottom of curb. Excavation shall be filled to required level with base course material conforming to the requirements of Section 310000, EARTHWORK. B. Vertical face of vertical curb shall be plumb, with curb top parallel to adjacent surface. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CURBS 321600 –5 C. Curb units shall be placed accurately to line. Final points (locations where lines of curb intersect) shall be joined by closure pieces made to order and not greater than 30 in. in length. Curb shall not be field cut except with the prior permission of the Architect. D. Joints other than expansion joints, between curb units (both front and back) shall not be greater than 1/4 in. Joint space shall be carefully filled with stiff 1:1/2 Portland cement: sand mortar, which shall be forced as far as possible into joint. Top and exposed front portion of curb shall be neatly pointed with mortar. After pointing, excess mortar shall be cleaned from curb surface. E. Expansion joints shall be located as indicated on the Drawings. Where none are indicated, expansion joints shall be 20 ft. o.c., maximum. Expansion joint shall be 1/2 in. wide. Preformed joint filler shall be installed between curb units at expansion joint locations. F. When curb is constructed adjacent to or on concrete pavement, expansion joints shall be located opposite or at expansion joints in the pavement. G. Backfill material on each side of curb shall be as specified for adjacent surface and shall be thoroughly compacted by means of power tampers. Extreme care shall be taken not to destroy alignment. Curb sections disturbed during backfilling or otherwise shall be reset to line and grade, and properly backfilled. 3.3 GRANITE CURBS A. Installation of vertical curbs shall be in accordance with MassDOT Specifications Section 501 Curb, Curb Inlets, Curb Corners, and Edging. Installation of edging shall be in accordance with MassDOT Construction Standard Details Section 106.5.0 Method of Setting Sloped Edging. B. Curb shall be set to lines and grades required. Additional gravel shall be spread upon the foundation if required and the curb set thereon. All spaces under the curb stones shall be filled and all stones shall be completely supported throughout their length. Subgrade of trenches for curbing shall be 12 in. below bottom of curb where concrete foundation is required. Ends of stones shall be not less than 1/4 in. nor more than 1/2 in. apart at any joint in the exposed faces C. Joints between curb stones shall be carefully filled with light gray cement mortar and neatly pointed on the top and exposed faces. Mortar shall be composed of equal parts of cement and sand with sufficient water to form a workable mixture. After pointing, clean off all excess mortar and tool joints slightly below adjacent stone surfaces D. Minimum Lengths of Curved Granite Curbstone 1. On curves with radii greater than 100-ft but less than 500-ft, type VA stones may be 4-ft to not more than 6-ft in length 2. On curves with radius of 100-ft or less, type VA stones to be cut to the required curvature and except for making closures shall be the minimum lengths as follows: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 CURBS 321600 –6 3. Type VB stones to be set on a radius of 100-ft or less shall be cut to the required curvature 4. All VB stones shall have a minimum length of 3-ft regardless of curvature 5. The ends of all curved stones shall be cut on radial lines 3.4 TRANSITION CURBS FOR WHEELCHAIR RAMPS A. Transitions from normal curb settings to wheelchair ramps shall be accomplished with transition curb as directed. Transitions shall be the same type of curb and similar to that abutting and, and if on a curve, the same radius. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GRANITE CURBS A. Installation: Curbs shall be installed in accordance with MassDOT Specifications Section 501 Curb, Curb Inlets, Curb Corners, and Edging. Installation of edging shall be in accordance with MassDOT Construction Standard Details Section 106.5.0 Method of Setting Sloped Edging. B. Setting: Curb shall be set to lines and grades required. Additional gravel shall be spread upon the foundation, if required, and the curb set thereon. All spaces under the curb stones shall be filled and all stones shall be completely supported throughout their length. Subgrade of trenches for curbing shall be 12 in. below bottom of curb where concrete foundation is required. Ends of stones shall be not less than 1/4 in. nor more than 1/2 in. apart at any joint in the exposed faces. C. Pointing: Joints between curb stones shall be carefully filled with light grey cement mortar and neatly pointed on the top and exposed faces. Mortar shall be composed of equal parts of cement and sand with sufficient water to form a workable mixture. After pointing, clean off all excess mortar and tool joints slightly below adjacent stone surfaces as approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1 SECTION 321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and Contract Conditions as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, will be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section or implied on the drawings. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to ensure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work will conform to the Town of North Andover Department of Public Works Standards for Materials and Construction. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, and transportation required to install pavement markings as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. B. Perform all work of the Section, as indicated. Such work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Installing reflectorized pavement markings including parking lines, striping, fire lane demarcation, and pedestrian crosswalks as indicated on the drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 321216 – ASPHALT PAVING. 1.4 LEED SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: 1. LEED Submittal Requirements: a. Submit completed LEEDv4 Materials Reporting for applicable material requirements as required in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements. Submit all required backup documentation. b. The work of this Section includes responding to Architect or Contractor requests for additional information or product data and may be required following initial Green Building Certification Institute (GBCI) review of LEED Application. c. As applicable submittals shall include the following. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 2 i) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 3 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials for recycled content ii) Submittal documentation requirements for MR Credit 2 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declaration for EPDs d. Product substitution requests are subject to additional LEED submittal requirements including, but not limited to, Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Health Product Declarations (HPD), and General Emissions Testing. See Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications). B. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) for Streets and Highways – 2009 Edition with Revisions Number 1 and 2 Incorporated, dated May 2012. C. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT) Highway Division – Amendments to the 2009 MUTCD and the Standard Municipal Traffic Code. D. Massachusetts Architectural Access Board (MAAB) 325 CMR. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit supplier’s certificate of conformance and color. B. Test Reports: Submit test reports for required performance. C. Layout: Furnish layout computations. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Provide the products of one manufacturer and source for consistency. B. Standards: Conform to all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices”, 2009 Edition with Revisions 1 and 2 Incorporated, dated May 2012 (herein after referred to as MUTCD), together with all issued errata, addenda, additions, revisions, and supplemental specifications. Conform to all requirements of the latest ADA and MAAB standards for handicap parking. 1.8 LAYOUT OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect for approval a schedule of pavement marking operations in accordance with MassDOT Specifications Section 860.61 Layout of Work. 1.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the work site and well ahead of the work site for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. B. Place traffic cones along newly painted lines to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces. Remove when paint has dried fully. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 3 C. Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating slow moving painting equipment in operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials for pavement markings shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section 860.40 General as applicable. B. Striping color and material shall match that of adjoining surfaces and shall comply with the applicable portions of MassDOT Standard Specifications M7.01.03 and M7.01.04 for thermoplastic reflectorized and M7.01.03 and M7.01.04 for fast drying water-borne. C. Pavement Markings: Provide white or yellow paint conforming to MassDOT Specifications Section M7.01.05 White Traffic Paint or M7.01.06 Yellow Traffic Paint. Color to be approved by the Architect. A blue background with white border may supplement the white wheelchair symbol painted in accessible parking spaces. D. Paint shall be in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name, formulation number, and directions, all of which shall be plainly legible at time of use. E. Paint shall be homogeneous, easily mixed to smooth consistency, and shall show no hard settlement or other objectionable characteristics during a storage period of six months. 2.2 MARKING EQUIPMENT A. Machines, tools, and equipment used in the application of pavement markings shall conform to MassDOT Specifications Section 860.60 Equipment. B. Push-type machines of a type commonly used for application of paint to pavement surfaces shall be acceptable for marking roadway and parking areas. Applicator machine shall have the necessary paint tanks and spraying nozzles and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage specified. Hand-operated spray guns shall be provided for use in areas where push- type machines cannot be used. C. Sandblasting equipment shall be provided as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses, and nozzles of proper size and capacity for the work. Compressor shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 cfm of air at a pressure of not less than 90 psi at the nozzle for each nozzle used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. New pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 48 hours before application of marking materials. B. Dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods, as required. Rubber deposits, surface laitance, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the pavement Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 4 shall be completely removed using scrapers, wire brushes, sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion. C. Where oil or grease are present on old pavements to be marked, affected areas shall be scrubbed with several applications of tri-sodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinsed thoroughly after each application. After cleaning, oil- soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Following items shall be painted with colors noted below unless otherwise noted on Site Layout Plans: 1. Pedestrian Crosswalks: White 2. Exterior Guard posts: Yellow 3. Fire Lanes: Yellow or per local code 4. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in opposite directions: Yellow 5. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in the same direction: White 6. ADA Symbols: Blue or per local code 7. Pavement markings: White as shown on the drawings. 8. Parking Stall Striping: White, unless otherwise noted on the drawings B. Pavement markings shall be placed as shown on Site Layout Plan. C. Marking materials shall be applied evenly to clean, dry surfaces in accordance with the requirements of MassDOT Specifications Section 860.62 Application of Markings. D. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with industry standard equipment. E. Guidelines and templates shall be employed as necessary to control paint application. Special precautions shall be taken in marking numbers, letters, and symbols. F. Edges of markings shall be sharply outlined. G. Maximum drying time requirements of the paint manufacturer shall be enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by vehicle tires. H. If markings require more drying time than stated by the paint manufacturer, painting operations shall be discontinued until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected. 3.3 PROTECTION OF MARKINGS A. Markings shall remain protected in accordance with MassDOT Specifications Section 860.63 Protection of Markings. 3.4 GUARANTEE A. Contractor is to furnish the Owner with a one-year unconditional guarantee against fading, chipping, peeling, wearing, or other forms of deterioration. The Contractor is to provide said guarantee in writing, in a form acceptable to the Owner. If said guarantee is not in an acceptable form, the Contractor shall have 10 days after receipt of notice from the Owner to correct the form. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 5 END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -1 SECTION 323223 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL PART 1 - GENERAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section or implied on the drawings. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to ensure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. B. Section 310000 - SITE CLEARING C. Section 312500 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS D. Section 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING E. Section 347113 - VEHICLE BARRIERS F. Section 321613 - CURBS AND GUTTERS DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes furnishing all materials and labor required for the design and construction of a precast concrete modular block (PMB) retaining wall with or without geosynthetic reinforcement. Precast modular block retaining wall blocks under this section shall be cast utilizing a wet-cast concrete mix and exhibit a final handling weight in excess of 1,000 pounds (450 kg) per unit. B. Scope of Work: The work shall consist of furnishing materials, labor, equipment and supervision for the construction of a precast modular block (PMB) retaining wall structure in accordance with the requirements of this section and in acceptable conformity with the lines, grades, design and dimensions shown in the project site plans. C. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 31, Division 32 and Division 33 also apply to this Section. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -2 REFERENCES A. Where the specification and reference documents conflict, the Owner’s designated representative will make the final determination of the applicable document. B. Definitions: 1. Precast Modular Block (PMB) Unit – machine-placed, “wet cast” concrete modular block retaining wall facing unit. 2. Geotextile – a geosynthetic fabric manufactured for use as a separation and filtration medium between dissimilar soil materials. 3. Geogrid – a geosynthetic material comprised of a regular network of tensile elements manufactured in a mesh-like configuration of consistent aperture openings. When connected to the PMB facing units and placed in horizontal layers in compacted fill, the geogrid prevents lateral deformation of the retaining wall face and provides effective tensile reinforcement to the contiguous reinforced fill material. 4. Drainage Aggregate – clean, crushed stone placed within and immediately behind the precast modular block units to facilitate drainage and reduce compaction requirements immediately adjacent to and behind the precast modular block units. 5. Unit Core Fill – clean, crushed stone placed within the hollow vertical core of a precast modular block unit. Typically, the same material used for drainage aggregate as defined above. 6. Foundation Zone – soil zone immediately beneath the leveling pad and the reinforced zone. 7. Retained Zone – soil zone immediately behind the drainage aggregate and wall infill for wall sections designed as modular gravity structures. Alternatively, in the case of wall sections designed with geosynthetic soil reinforcement, the retained zone is the soil zone immediately behind the reinforced zone. 8. Reinforced Zone – structural fill zone within which successive horizontal layers of geogrid soil reinforcement have been placed to provide stability for the retaining wall face. The reinforced zone exists only for retaining wall sections that utilize geosynthetic soil reinforcement for stability. 9. Reinforced Fill – structural fill placed within the reinforced zone. 10. Leveling Pad – hard, flat surface upon which the bottom course of precast modular blocks are placed. The leveling pad may be constructed with crushed stone or cast-in-place concrete. A leveling pad is not a structural footing. 11. Wall Infill – the fill material placed and compacted between the drainage aggregate and the excavated soil face in retaining wall sections designed as modular gravity structures. C. Reference Standards 1. Design a. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 7th Edition, 2014. b. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures – ASCE/SEI 7-10. c. International Building Code, 2012 Edition. d. FHWA-NHI-10-024 Volume I and GEC 11 Design of Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes. e. FHWA-NHI-10-025 Volume II and GEC 11 Design of Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes. 2. Precast Modular Block Units a. ACI 201 – Guide to Durable Concrete b. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete c. ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -3 d. ASTM C39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens e. ASTM C94 – Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. f. ASTM C136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. g. ASTM C143 – Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. h. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement i. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. j. ASTM C260 – Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. k. ASTM C494 – Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. l. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. m. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. n. ASTM C666 – Standard Test Method for Concrete Resistance to Rapid Freezing and Thawing. o. ASTM C845 - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. p. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. q. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars. r. ASTM C1116 – Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. s. ASTM C1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. t. ASTM C1218 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. u. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. v. ASTM C1611 – Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete. w. ASTM C1776 – Standard Specification for Wet-Cast Precast Modular Retaining Wall Units. x. ASTM D6638 – Standard Test Method for Determining Connection Strength Between Geosynthetic Reinforcement and Segmental Concrete Units (Modular Concrete Blocks). y. ASTM D6916 – Standard Test Method for Determining Shear Strength Between Segmental Concrete Units (Modular Concrete Blocks). 3. Geosynthetics a. AASHTO M 288 – Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications. b. ASTM D3786 – Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method. c. ASTM D4354 – Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing. d. ASTM D4355 – Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles e. ASTM D4491 – Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. f. ASTM D4533 – Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. g. ASTM D4595 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method. h. ASTM D4632 – Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. i. ASTM D4751 – Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. j. ASTM D4759 – Standard Practice for Determining Specification Conformance of Geosynthetics. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -4 k. ASTM D4833 – Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products. l. ASTM D4873 – Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples. m. ASTM D5262 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfined Tension Creep and Creep Rupture Behavior of Geosynthetics. n. ASTM D5321 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear Method. o. ASTM D5818 – Standard Practice for Exposure and Retrieval of Samples to Evaluate Installation Damage of Geosynthetics. p. ASTM D6241 – Standard Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe. q. ASTM D6637 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Properties of Geogrids by the Single or Multi-Rib Tensile Method. r. ASTM D6706 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Geosynthetic Pullout Resistance in Soil. s. ASTM D6992 – Standard Test Method for Accelerated Tensile Creep and Creep- Rupture of Geosynthetic Materials Based on Time-Temperature Superposition Using the Stepped Isothermal Method. 4. Soils a. AASHTO M 145 – AASHTO Soil Classification System. b. AASHTO T 104 – Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. c. AASHTO T 267 – Standard Method of Test for Determination of Organic Content in Soils by Loss of Ignition. d. ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. e. ASTM D422 – Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. f. ASTM D448 – Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregates for Road and Bridge Construction. g. ASTM D698 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. (12,400 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m)). h. ASTM D1241 – Standard Specification for Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. i. ASTM D1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method. j. ASTM D1557 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort. (56,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m)). k. ASTM D2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). l. ASTM D2488 – Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual- Manual Procedure). m. ASTM D3080 – Standard Test Method for Direct Shear Test of Soils Under Consolidated Drained Conditions. n. ASTM D4254 – Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. o. ASTM D4318 – Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. p. ASTM D4767- Test Method for Consolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression Test for Cohesive Soils. q. ASTM D4972 – Standard Test Method for pH of Soils. r. ASTM D6938 – Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -5 s. ASTM G51 – Standard Test Method for Measuring pH of Soil for Use in Corrosion Testing. t. ASTM G57 – Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the Wenner Four-Electrode Method. 5. Drainage Pipe a. ASTM D3034 – Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. b. ASTM F2648 – Standard Specification for 2 to 60 inch [50 to 1500 mm] Annular Corrugated Profile Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Land Drainage Applications. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preconstruction Meeting. As directed by the Owner, the General Contractor shall schedule a preconstruction meeting at the project site prior to commencement of retaining wall construction. Participation in the preconstruction meeting shall be required of the General Contractor, Retaining Wall Design Engineer, Retaining Wall Installation Contractor, Grading Contractor, and Inspection Engineer. The General Contractor shall provide notification to all parties at least 10 calendar days prior to the meeting. 1. Preconstruction Meeting Agenda: a. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall explain all aspects of the retaining wall construction drawings. b. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall explain the required bearing capacity of soil below the retaining wall structure and the shear strength of in-situ soils assumed in the retaining wall design to the Inspection Engineer. c. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall explain the required shear strength of fill soil in the reinforced, retained and foundation zones of the retaining wall to the Inspection Engineer. d. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall explain any measures required for coordination of the installation of utilities or other obstructions in the reinforced or retained fill zones of the retaining wall. e. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall explain all excavation needs, site access and material staging area requirements to the General Contractor and Grading Contractor. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. At least 14 days prior to construction, the General Contractor shall submit a minimum of six copies of the retaining wall product submittal package to the Owner’s Representative for review and approval. The submittal package shall include technical specifications and product data from the manufacturer for the following: 1. Precast Modular Block System brochure 2. Precast Modular Block concrete test results specified in paragraph 2.01; subparagraph B of this section as follows: a. 28-day compressive strength b. Air content c. Slump or Slump Flow (as applicable) 3. Drainage Pipe Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -6 4. Geotextile 5. Geosynthetic Soil Reinforcement (if required by the retaining wall design). The contractor shall provide certified manufacturer test reports for the geosynthetic soil reinforcement material in the manufactured roll width specified. The test report shall list the individual roll numbers for which the certified material properties are valid. B. Installer Qualification Data. At least 14 days prior to construction, the General Contractor shall submit the qualifications of the business entity responsible for installation of the retaining wall, the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor, per paragraph 1.07, subparagraph A of this section. C. Retaining Wall Design Calculations and Construction Shop Drawings. At least 14 days prior to construction, the General Contractor shall furnish six sets of construction shop drawings and six copies of the supporting structural calculations report to the Owner for review and approval. This submittal shall include the following: 1. Signed, sealed, and dated drawings and engineering calculations prepared in accordance with these specifications. 2. Qualifications Statement of Experience of the Retaining Wall Design Engineer as specified in paragraph 1.07, subparagraph B of this section. 3. Certificate of Insurance of the Retaining Wall Design Engineer as specified in paragraph 1.06, subparagraph B of this section. CONSTRUCTION SHOP DRAWING PREPARATION A. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall coordinate the retaining wall construction shop drawing preparation with the project Civil Engineer, project Geotechnical Engineer and Owner’s Representatives. The General Contractor shall furnish the Retaining Wall Design Engineer the following project information required to prepare the construction shop drawings. This information shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Current versions of the site, grading, drainage, utility, erosion control, landscape, and irrigation plans; 2. electronic CAD file of the civil site plans listed in (1); 3. report of geotechnical investigation and all addenda and supplemental reports; 4. recommendations of the project Geotechnical Engineer regarding effective stress shear strength and total stress shear strength (when applicable) parameters for in-situ soils in the vicinity of the proposed retaining wall(s) and for any fill soil that may potentially be used as backfill in retained and/or foundation zones of the retaining wall. B. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall provide the Owner with a certificate of professional liability insurance verifying the minimum coverage limits of $1 million per claim and $1 million aggregate. C. Design of the precast modular block retaining wall shall satisfy the requirements of this section. Where local design or building code requirements exceed these specifications, the local requirements shall also be satisfied. D. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall note any exceptions to the requirements of this section by listing them at the bottom right corner of the first page of the construction shop drawings. E. Approval or rejection of the exceptions taken by the Retaining Wall Engineer will be made in writing as directed by the Owner. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -7 F. The precast modular block design, except as noted herein, shall be based upon AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) methodology as referenced in paragraph 1.03, subparagraph C.1. G. In the event that a conflict is discovered between these specifications and a reasonable interpretation of the design specifications and methods referenced in paragraph F above, these specifications shall prevail. If a reasonable interpretation is not possible, the conflict shall be resolved per the requirements in paragraph 1.03, subparagraph A of this section. H. Soil Shear Parameters. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall prepare the construction shop drawings based upon soil shear strength parameters from the available project data and the recommendations of the project Geotechnical Engineer. If insufficient data exists to develop the retaining wall design, the Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall communicate the specific deficiency of the project information or data to the Owner in writing. I. Allowable bearing pressure requirements for each retaining wall shall be clearly shown on the construction drawings. J. Global Stability. Overall (global) stability shall be evaluated in accordance with the principals of limit equilibrium analysis as set forth in FHWA-NHI-10-024 Volume I and FHWA-NHI-10-025 Volume II GEC 11 Design of Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes as referenced in paragraph 1.03, subparagraph C.1. The minimum factors of safety shall be as follows: Normal Service (Static) 1.4 Seismic 1.1 Rapid Drawdown (if applicable) 1.2 K. Seismic Stability. Seismic loading shall be evaluated in accordance with AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) methodology as referenced in paragraph 1.03, subparagraph C.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Retaining Wall Installation Contractor Qualifications. In order to demonstrate basic competence in the construction of precast modular block walls, the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall document compliance with the following: 1. Experience. a. Construction experience with a minimum of 30,000 square feet (2,800 square meters) of the proposed precast modular block retaining wall system. b. Construction of at least 10 precast modular block (small block) retaining wall structures within the past three years. c. Construction of at least 50,000 square feet (4,650 square meters) of precast modular block (small block) retaining walls within the past three years. 2. Retaining Wall Installation Contractor experience documentation for each qualifying project shall include: a. Project name and location b. Date (month and year) of construction completion c. Contact information of Owner or General Contractor d. Type (trade name) of precast modular block system built e. Maximum height of the wall constructed Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -8 f. Face area of the wall constructed 3. In lieu of the requirements set forth in items 1 and 2 above, the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor must be a certified Precast Modular Block Retaining Wall Installation Contractor as demonstrated by satisfactory completion of a certified precast modular block retaining wall installation training program administered by the precast modular block manufacturer. B. Retaining Wall Design Engineer Qualifications and Statement of Experience. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall submit a written statement affirming that he or she has the following minimum qualifications and experience. 1. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall be licensed to practice in the jurisdiction of the project location. 2. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall be independently capable of performing all internal and external stability analyses, including those for seismic loading, compound stability, rapid draw-down and deep-seated, global modes of failure. 3. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall affirm in writing that he or she has personally supervised the design of the retaining walls for the project, that the design considers all the requirements listed in paragraph 1.06 and that he or she accepts responsibility as the design engineer of record for the retaining walls constructed on the project. 4. The Retaining Wall Design Engineer shall affirm in writing that he or she has personally designed in excess of 100,000 face square feet (9,000 face square meters) of modular block earth retaining walls within the previous three years. 5. In lieu of these specific requirements, the engineer may submit alternate documentation demonstrating competency in Precast Modular Block retaining wall design. C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the design services of any engineer or engineering firm who, in the sole opinion of the Owner, does not possess the requisite experience or qualifications. QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner’s Representative shall review all submittals for materials, design, Retaining Wall Design Engineer qualifications and the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor qualifications. B. The General Contractor shall retain the services of an Inspection Engineer who is experienced with the construction of precast modular block retaining wall structures to perform inspection and testing. The cost of inspection shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. Inspection shall be continuous throughout the construction of the retaining walls. C. The Inspection Engineer shall perform the following duties: 1. Inspect the construction of the precast modular block structure for conformance with construction shop drawings and the requirements of this specification. 2. Verify that soil or aggregate fill placed and compacted in the reinforced, retained and foundation zones of the retaining wall conforms with paragraphs 2.04 and 2.05 of this section and exhibits the shear strength parameters specified by the Retaining Wall Design Engineer. 3. Verify that the shear strength of the in-situ soil assumed by the Retaining Wall Design Engineer is appropriate. 4. Inspect and document soil compaction in accordance with these specifications: a. Required dry unit weight b. Actual dry unit weight c. Allowable moisture content d. Actual moisture content Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -9 e. Pass/fail assessment f. Test location – wall station number g. Test elevation h. Distance of test location behind the wall face 5. Verify that all excavated slopes in the vicinity of the retaining wall are bench-cut as directed by the project Geotechnical Engineer. 6. Notify the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor of any deficiencies in the retaining wall construction and provide the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor a reasonable opportunity to correct the deficiency. 7. Notify the General Contractor, Owner and Retaining Wall Design Engineer of any construction deficiencies that have not been corrected timely. 8. Document all inspection results. 9. Test compacted density and moisture content of the retained backfill with the following frequency: a. At least once every 1,000 square feet (90 square meters) (in plan) per 9-inch (230 mm) vertical lift, and b. At least once per every 18 inches (460 mm) of vertical wall construction. D. The General Contractor’s engagement of the Inspection Engineer does not relieve the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor of responsibility to construct the proposed retaining wall in accordance with the approved construction shop drawings and these specifications. E. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall inspect the on-site grades and excavations prior to construction and notify the Retaining Wall Design Engineer and General Contractor if on-site conditions differ from the elevations and grading conditions depicted in the retaining wall construction shop drawings. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall inspect the materials upon delivery to ensure that the proper type, grade, and color of materials have been delivered. B. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall store and handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as specified herein and in a manner that prevents deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, UV exposure or other causes. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the work. C. Geosynthetics 1. All geosynthetic materials shall be handled in accordance with ASTM D4873. The materials should be stored off the ground and protected from precipitation, sunlight, dirt and physical damage. D. Precast Modular Blocks 1. Precast modular blocks shall be stored in an area with positive drainage away from the blocks. Be careful to protect the block from mud and excessive chipping and breakage. Precast modular blocks shall not be stacked more than three units high in the storage area. E. Drainage Aggregate and Backfill Stockpiles Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -10 1. Drainage aggregate or backfill material shall not be piled over unstable slopes or areas of the project site with buried utilities. 2. Drainage aggregate and/or reinforced fill material shall not be staged where it may become mixed with or contaminated by poor draining fine-grained soils such as clay or silt. PART 2 - MATERIALS PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK RETAINING WALL UNITS A. All units shall be wet-cast precast modular retaining wall units conforming to ASTM C1776. B. All units for the project shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. The manufacturer shall be licensed and authorized to produce the retaining wall units by the precast modular block system patent holder/licensor and shall document compliance with the published quality control standards of the proprietary precast modular block system licensor for the previous three years or the total time the manufacturer has been licensed, whichever is less. C. Concrete used in the production of the precast modular block units shall be first-purpose, fresh concrete. It shall not consist of returned, reconstituted, surplus or waste concrete. It shall be an original production mix meeting the requirements of ASTM C94 and exhibit the properties as shown in the following table: Concrete Mix Properties Freeze Thaw Exposure Class (1) Minimum 28-Day Compressive Strength (2) Maximum Water Cement Ratio Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size Aggregate Class Designation (3) Air Content (4) Moderate 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) 0.45 1 inch (25 mm) 3M 4.5% +/- 1.5% Severe 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) 0.45 1 inch (25 mm) 3S 6.0% +/- 1.5% Very Severe 4,500 psi (30.0 MPa) 0.40 1 inch (25 mm) 4S 6.0% +/- 1.5% Maximum Water-Soluble Chloride Ion (Cl-) Content in Concrete, Percent by Weight of Cement(5,6) 0.15 Maximum Chloride as Cl- Concentration in Mixing Water, Parts Per Million 1000 Maximum Percentage of Total Cementitious Materials By Weight (7,9) (Very Severe Exposure Class Only): Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans Conforming to ASTM C618 25 Slag Conforming to ASTM C989 50 Silica Fume Conforming to ASTM C1240 10 Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag, and Silica Fume(8) 50 Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans and Silica Fume(8) 35 Alkali-Aggregate Reactivity Mitigation per ACI 201 Slump (Conventional Concrete) per ASTM C143(10) 5 inches +/- 1½ inches (125 mm +/- 40 mm) Slump Flow (Self-Consolidating Concrete) per ASTM C1611 18 inches – 32 inches (450 mm – 800 mm) (1)Exposure class is as described in ACI 318. “Moderate” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and occasional exposure to moisture. “Severe” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture. “Very Severe” describes concrete that is exposed to freezing and thawing cycles and in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to deicing chemicals. Exposure class should be specified by owner/purchaser prior to order placement. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -11 (2)Test method ASTM C39. (3)Defined in ASTM C33 Table 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Concrete. (4)Test method ASTM C231. (5)Test method ASTM C1218 at age between 28 and 42 days. (6)Where used in high sulfate environments or where alkali-silica reactivity is an issue, water soluble chloride shall be limited to no more than trace amounts (from impurities in concrete- making components, not intended constituents.) (7)The total cementitious material also includes ASTM C150, C595, C845, C1157 cement. The maximum percentages shall include: (a) Fly ash or other pozzolans in type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157. (b) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157. (c) Silica fume, ASTM C1240, present in a blended cement. (8)Fly ash or other pozzolans and silica fume shall constitute no more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of the cementitious materials. (9)Prescriptive limits shown may be waived for concrete mixes that demonstrate excellent freeze/thaw durability in a detailed and current testing program. (10)Slump may be increased by a high-range water-reducing admixture. D. Each concrete block shall be cast in a single continuous pour without cold joints. With the exception of half-block units, corner units and other special application units, the precast modular block units shall conform to the nominal dimensions listed in the table below and be produced to the dimensional tolerances shown. Block Type Dimension Nominal Value Tolerance 28” (710 mm) Block Height 18” (457 mm) +/- 3/16” (5 mm) Length 46-1/8” (1172 mm) +/- 1/2” (13 mm) Width* 28” (710 mm) +/- 1/2” (13 mm) * Block tolerance measurements shall exclude variable face texture E. Individual block units shall have a nominal height of 18 inches (457mm +/-5 mm). F. With the exception of half-block units, corner units and other special application units, the precast modular block units shall have two, circular dome shear knobs that are 10 inches (254 mm), 7.5 inches (190 mm), or 6.75 inches (171 mm) in diameter and 4 inches (102 mm) or 2 inches (51 mm) in height. The shear knobs shall fully index into a continuous semi-cylindrical shear channel in the bottom of the block course above. The Peak interlock shear between any two vertically stacked precast modular block units, with 10-inch (254 mm) diameter shear knobs, measured in accordance with ASTM D6916 shall exceed 6,500 lb/ft (95 kN/m) at a minimum normal load of 500 lb/ft (7kN/m). as well as an ultimate peak interface shear capacity in excess of 11,000 lb/ft (160 kN/m). The peak interlock shear between any two vertically stacked precast modular block units, with 7.5 inch (190 mm) or 6.75 inch (171 mm) diameter shear knobs, measured in accordance with ASTM D6916 shall exceed 1,850 lb/ft (27 kN/m) at a minimum normal load of 500 lb/ft (7kN/m) as well as an ultimate peak interface shear capacity in excess of 10,000 lb/ft (146 kN/m). Test specimen blocks tested under ASTM D6916 shall be actual, full-scale production blocks of known compressive strength. The interface shear capacity reported shall be corrected for a 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) concrete compressive strength. Regardless of precast modular block configuration, interface shear testing shall be completed without the inclusion of unit core infill aggregate. G. The 28 inch (710 mm) precast modular block units shall be cast with a 13 inch (330 mm) wide, continuous vertical core slot that will permit the insertion of a 12 inch (305 mm) wide strip of Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -12 geogrid reinforcement to pass completely through the block. When installed in this manner, the geogrid reinforcement shall form a non-normal load dependent, positive connection between the block unit and the reinforcement strip. The use of steel for the purposes of creating the geogrid to block connection is not acceptable. H. Without field cutting or special modification, the precast modular block units shall be capable of achieving a minimum radius of 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m). I. The precast modular block units shall be manufactured with an integrally cast shear knobs that establishes a standard horizontal set-back for subsequent block courses. The precast modular block system shall be available in zero horizontal set-back facing batter. The precast modular block units shall be furnished with the required shear knobs that provide the facing batter required in the construction shop drawings. J. The precast modular block unit face texture shall be a fieldstone facade and selected by the owner from the available range of textures available from the precast modular block manufacturer. Each textured block facing unit shall be a minimum of 5.76 square feet (0.54 square meters) with a unique fieldstone texture pattern that repeats with a maximum frequency of once in any 15 square feet (1.4 square meters) of wall face. K. The block color shall be selected by the owner from the available range of colors available from the precast modular block manufacturer and approved by the Town of North Andover. L. All precast modular block units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper installation of the unit, impair the strength or performance of the constructed wall. PMB units to be used in exposed wall construction shall not exhibit chips or cracks in the exposed face or faces of the unit that are not otherwise permitted. Chips smaller than 1.5 inch (38 mm) in its largest dimension and cracks not wider than 0.012 inch (0.3 mm) and not longer than 25 percent of the nominal height of the PMB unit shall be permitted. PMB units with bug holes in the exposed architectural face smaller than 0.75 inch (19 mm) in its largest dimension shall be permitted. Bug holes, water marks, and color variation on non-architectural faces are acceptable. PMB units that exhibit cracks that are continuous through any solid element of the PMB unit shall not be incorporated in the work regardless of the width or length of the crack. M. Preapproved Manufacturers. 1. Redi-Rock Retaining Wall Systems as licensed by Redi-Rock International, LLC, 05481 US 31 South, Charlevoix, MI 49720 USA; telephone (866) 222-8400; website www.redi- rock.com. 2. VERSA-LOK® Retaining Wall Systems 6348 Hwy. 36 Blvd, Suite 1 Oakdale, MN 55128; telephone (651) 770-3166; website https://www.versa-lok.com/. 3. Stone Strong, LLC 13460 Chandler Road, Suite 100 Omaha, Nebraska 68138; telephone (877)-501-5652; website www.stonestrong.com. N. Substitutions. Technical information demonstrating conformance with the requirements of this specification for an alternative precast modular block retaining wall system must be submitted for preapproval at least 14 calendar days prior to the bid date. Acceptable alternative PMB retaining wall systems, otherwise found to be in conformance with this specification, shall be approved in writing by the owner 7 days prior to the bid date. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to provide no response to submissions made out of the time requirements of this section or to submissions of block retaining wall systems that are determined to be unacceptable to the owner. O. Value Engineering Alternatives. The owner may evaluate and accept systems that meet the requirements of this specification after the bid date that provide a minimum cost savings of 20 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -13 percent to the Owner. Construction expediency will not be considered as a contributing portion of the cost savings total. GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT A. Geogrid reinforcement shall be a woven or knitted PVC coated geogrid manufactured from high- tenacity PET polyester fiber with an average molecular weight greater than 25,000 (Mn > 25,0000) and a carboxyl end group less than 30 (CEG < 30). The geogrid shall be furnished in prefabricated roll widths of certified tensile strength by the manufacturer. The prefabricated roll width of the geogrid shall be 12 inches (300 mm) +/- 1/2 inch (13 mm). No cutting of geogrid reinforcement down to the 12-inch (300 mm) roll width from a larger commercial roll width will be allowed under any circumstances. B. The ultimate tensile strength (Tult) of the geogrid reinforcement shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D6637. C. Geogrid – Soil Friction Properties 1. Friction factor, F*, shall be equal to 2/3 Tan ɸ, where ɸ is the effective angle of internal friction of the reinforced fill soil. 2. Linear Scale Correction Factor, α, shall equal 0.8. D. Long-Term Tensile Strength (Tal) of the geogrid reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with Section 3.5.2 of FHWA-NHI-10-024 and as provided in this specification. 1. The creep reduction factor (RFCR) shall be determined in accordance with Appendix D of FHWA-NHI-10-025 for a minimum 75-year design life. 2. Minimum installation damage reduction factor (RFID) shall be 1.25. The value of RFID shall be based upon documented full-scale tests in a soil that is comparable to the material proposed for use as reinforced backfill in accordance with ASTM D5818. 3. Minimum durability reduction factor (RFD) shall be 1.3 for a soil pH range of 3 to 9. E. Connection between the PMB retaining wall unit and the geogrid reinforcement shall be determined from short-term testing per the requirements of FHWA NHI-10-025, Appendix B.4 for a minimum 75-year design life. F. The minimum value of Tal for geogrid used in design of a reinforced precast modular block retaining wall shall be 2,000 lb/ft (29 kN/m) or greater. G. The minimum length of geogrid reinforcement shall be the greater of the following: 1. 0.7 times the wall design height, H. 2. 6 feet (1.83 m). 3. The length required by design to meet internal stability requirements, soil bearing pressure requirements and constructability requirements. H. Constructability Requirements. Geogrid design embedment length shall be measured from the back of the precast modular block facing unit and shall be consistent for the entire height of a given retaining wall section. I. Geogrid shall be positively connected to every precast modular block unit. Design coverage ratio, Rc, as calculated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Figure 11.10.6.4.1-2 shall not exceed 0.50. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -14 J. Preapproved Geogrid Reinforcement Products. 1. Miragrid XT Geogrids as manufactured by TenCate Geosynthetics of Pendergrass, Georgia USA and distributed by Manufacturers of the Redi-Rock Retaining Wall System. K. Substitutions. No substitutions of geogrid reinforcement products shall be allowed. GEOTEXTILE A. Nonwoven geotextile fabric shall be placed as indicated on the retaining wall construction shop drawings. Additionally, the nonwoven geotextile fabric shall be placed in the v-shaped joint between adjacent block units on the same course. The nonwoven geotextile fabric shall meet the requirements Class 3 construction survivability in accordance with AASHTO M 288. B. Preapproved Nonwoven Geotextile Products 1. Mirafi 140N 2. Propex Geotex 451 3. Skaps GT-142 4. Thrace-Linq 140EX 5. Carthage Mills FX-40HS 6. Stratatex ST 142 DRAINAGE AGGREGATE AND WALL INFILL A. Drainage aggregate (and wall infill for retaining walls designed as modular gravity structures) shall be a durable crushed stone conforming to No. 57 size per ASTM C33 with the following particle- size distribution requirements per ASTM D422: U.S. Standard Sieve Size % Passing 1-½” (38 mm) 100 1” (25 mm) 95-100 ½” (13 mm) 25-60 No. 4 (4.76 mm) 0-10 No. 8 (2.38 mm) 0-5 REINFORCED FILL A. Material used as reinforced backfill material in the reinforced zone (if applicable) shall be a granular fill material meeting the requirements of USCS soil type GW, GP, SW or SP per ASTM D2487 or alternatively by AASHTO Group Classification A-1-a or A-3 per AASHTO M 145. The backfill shall exhibit a minimum effective internal angle of friction, ϕ = 34 degrees at a maximum 2 percent shear strain and meet the following particle-size distribution requirements per ASTM D422. U.S. Standard Sieve Size % Passing 3/4 in (19 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.76 mm) 0-100 No. 40 (0.42 mm) 0-60 No. 100 (0.15 mm) 0-10 No. 200 (0.07 mm) 0-15 Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -15 B. The reinforced backfill material shall be free of sod, peat, roots or other organic or deleterious matter including, but not limited to, ice, snow, or frozen soils. Materials passing the No. 40 (0.42 mm) sieve shall have a liquid limit less than 25 and plasticity index less than 6 per ASTM D4318. Organic content in the backfill material shall be less than 1 percent per AASHTO T-267 and the pH of the backfill material shall be between 5 and 8. C. Soundness. The reinforced backfill material shall exhibit a magnesium sulfate soundness loss of less than 30 percent after four cycles, or sodium sulfate soundness loss of less than 15 percent after five cycles as measured in accordance with AASHTO T-104. D. Reinforced backfill shall not be comprised of crushed or recycled concrete, recycled asphalt, bottom ash, shale, or any other material that may degrade, creep or experience a loss in shear strength or a change in pH over time. LEVELING PAD A. The precast modular block units shall be placed on a leveling pad constructed from crushed stone or unreinforced concrete. The leveling pad shall be constructed to the dimensions and limits shown on the retaining wall design drawings prepared by the Retaining Wall Design Engineer. B. Crushed stone used for construction of a granular leveling pad shall meet the requirements of the drainage aggregate and wall infill in section 2.04 or a preapproved alternate material. C. Concrete used for construction of an unreinforced concrete leveling pad shall satisfy the criteria for AASHTO Class B. The concrete should be cured a minimum of 12 hours prior to placement of the precast modular block wall retaining units and exhibit a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa). DRAINAGE A. Drainage Pipe 1. Drainage collection pipe shall be a 4-inch (100 mm) diameter, 3-hole perforated, HDPE pipe with a minimum pipe stiffness of 22 psi (152 kPa) per ASTM D2412. 2. The drainage pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1248 for HDPE pipe and fittings. B. Preapproved Drainage Pipe Products 1. ADS 3000 Triple Wall pipe as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL A. All work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA safety standards, state and local building codes and manufacturer’s requirements. B. The General Contractor is responsible for the location and protection of all existing underground utilities. Any new utilities proposed for installation in the vicinity of the retaining wall, shall be installed concurrent with retaining wall construction. The General Contractor shall coordinate the work of subcontractors affected by this requirement. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -16 C. New utilities installed below the retaining wall shall be backfilled and compacted to a minimum of 98 percent maximum dry density per ASTM D698 standard proctor. D. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure that safe excavations and embankments are maintained throughout the course of the project. E. All work shall be inspected by the Inspection Engineer as directed by the Owner. EXAMINATION A. Prior to construction, the General Contractor, Grading Contractor, Retaining Wall Installation Contractor and Inspection Engineer shall examine the areas in which the retaining wall will be constructed to evaluate compliance with the requirements for installation tolerances, worker safety and any site conditions affecting performance of the completed structure. Installation shall proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. Fill Soil. 1. The Inspection Engineer shall verify that reinforced backfill placed in the reinforced soil zone satisfies the criteria of this section. 2. The Inspection Engineer shall verify that any fill soil installed in the foundation and retained soil zones of the retaining wall satisfies the specification of the Retaining Wall Design Engineer as shown on the construction drawings. B. Excavation. 1. The Grading Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades required for construction of the precast modular block retaining wall as shown on the construction drawings. The Grading Contractor shall minimize over-excavation. Excavation support, if required, shall be the responsibility of the Grading Contractor. 2. Over-excavated soil shall be replaced with compacted fill in conformance with the specifications of the Retaining Wall Design Engineer and “Division 31, Section 31 20 00 – Earthmoving” of these project specifications. 3. Embankment excavations shall be bench cut as directed by the project Geotechnical Engineer and inspected by the Inspection Engineer for compliance. C. Foundation Preparation. 1. Prior to construction of the precast modular block retaining wall, the leveling pad area and undercut zone (if applicable) shall be cleared and grubbed. All topsoil, brush, frozen soil and organic material shall be removed. Additional foundation soils found to be unsatisfactory beyond the specified undercut limits shall be undercut and replaced with approved fill as directed by the project Geotechnical Engineer. The Inspection Engineer shall ensure that the undercut limits are consistent with the requirements of the project Geotechnical Engineer and that all soil fill material is properly compacted according to project specifications. The Inspection Engineer shall document the volume of undercut and replacement. 2. Following excavation for the leveling pad and undercut zone (if applicable), the Inspection Engineer shall evaluate the in-situ soil in the foundation and retained soil zones. a. The Inspection Engineer shall verify that the shear strength of the in-situ soil assumed by the Retaining Wall Design Engineer is appropriate. The Inspection Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -17 Engineer shall immediately stop work and notify the Owner if the in-situ shear strength is found to be inconsistent with the retaining wall design assumptions. b. The Inspection Engineer shall verify that the foundation soil exhibits sufficient ultimate bearing capacity to satisfy the requirements indicated on the retaining wall construction shop drawings per paragraph 1.06 I of this section. D. Leveling Pad. 1. The leveling pad shall be constructed to provide a level, hard surface on which to place the first course of precast modular block units. The leveling pad shall be placed in the dimensions shown on the retaining wall construction drawings and extend to the limits indicated. 2. Crushed Stone Leveling Pad. Crushed stone shall be placed in uniform maximum lifts of 6 inch (150 mm). The crushed stone shall be compacted by a minimum of 3 passes of a vibratory compactor capable of exerting 2,000 lb (8.9 kN) of centrifugal force and to the satisfaction of the Inspection Engineer. 3. Unreinforced Concrete Leveling Pad. The concrete shall be placed in the same dimensions as those required for the crushed stone leveling pad. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall erect proper forms as required to ensure the accurate placement of the concrete leveling pad according to the retaining wall construction drawings. PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK WALL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. The precast modular block structure shall be constructed in accordance with the construction drawings, these specifications, and the recommendations of the retaining wall system component manufacturers. Where conflicts exist between the manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications, these specifications shall prevail. B. Drainage components. Pipe, geotextile, and drainage aggregate shall be installed as shown on the construction shop drawings. C. Precast Modular Block Installation 1. The first course of block units shall be placed with the front face edges tightly abutted together on the prepared leveling pad at the locations and elevations shown on the construction drawings. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall take special care to ensure that the bottom course of block units is in full contact with the leveling pad, are set level and true, and are properly aligned according to the locations shown on the construction drawings. 2. Backfill shall be placed in front of the bottom course of blocks prior to placement of subsequent block courses. Nonwoven geotextile fabric shall be placed in the V-shaped joints between adjacent blocks. Drainage aggregate shall be placed in the V-shaped joints between adjacent blocks to a minimum distance of 12 inch (300 mm) behind the block unit. 3. Drainage aggregate shall be placed in 9-inch maximum lifts and compacted by a minimum of three passes of a vibratory plate compactor capable exerting a minimum of 2,000 lb (8.9 kN) of centrifugal force. 4. Unit core fill shall be placed in the precast modular block unit vertical core slot. The core fill shall completely fill the slot to the level of the top of the block unit. The top of the block unit shall be broom-cleaned prior to placement of subsequent block courses. No additional courses of precast modular blocks may be stacked before the unit core fill is installed in the blocks on the course below. 5. Base course blocks for gravity wall designs (without geosynthetic soil reinforcement) may be furnished without vertical core slots. If so, disregard item 4 above, for the base course blocks in this application. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -18 6. Nonwoven geotextile fabric shall be placed between the drainage aggregate and the retained soil (gravity wall design) or between the drainage aggregate and the reinforced fill (reinforced wall design) as required on the retaining wall construction drawings. 7. Subsequent courses of block units shall be installed with a running bond (half block horizontal course-to-course offset). With the exception of 90-degree corner units, the shear channel of the upper block shall be fully engaged with the shear knobs of the block course below. The upper block course shall be pushed forward to fully engage the interface shear key between the blocks and to ensure consistent face batter and wall alignment. Geogrid, drainage aggregate, unit core fill, geotextile and properly compacted backfill shall be complete and in-place for each course of block units before the next course of blocks is stacked. 8. The elevation of retained soil fill shall not be less than 1 block course (18 inch (457 mm)) below the elevation of the reinforced backfill throughout the construction of the retaining wall. 9. If included as part of the precast modular block wall design, cap units shall be secured with an adhesive in accordance with the precast modular block manufacturer’s recommendation. D. Geogrid Reinforcement Installation (if required) 1. Geogrid reinforcement shall be installed at the locations and elevations shown on the construction drawings on level fill compacted to the requirements of this specification. 2. Continuous 12 inch (300 mm) wide strips of geogrid reinforcement shall be passed completely through the vertical core slot of the precast modular block unit and extended to the embedment length shown on the construction plans. The strips shall be staked or anchored as necessary to maintain a taut condition. 3. Reinforcement length (L) of the geogrid reinforcement is measured from the back of the precast modular block unit. The cut length (Lc) is two times the reinforcement length plus additional length through the block facing unit. The cut length is calculated as follows: Lc = 2*L + 3 ft (2*L + 0.9 m) (28” (710 mm) block unit) Lc = 2*L + 5 ft (2*L + 1.5 m) (41” (1030 mm) block unit) 4. The geogrid strip shall be continuous throughout its entire length and may not be spliced. The geogrid shall be furnished in nominal, prefabricated roll widths of 12 inch (300 mm) +/- 1/2 inch (13 mm). No field modification of the geogrid roll width shall be permitted. 5. Neither rubber tire nor track vehicles may operate directly on the geogrid. Construction vehicle traffic in the reinforced zone shall be limited to speeds of less than 5 mph (8 km/hr) once a minimum of 9 inches (230 mm) of compacted fill has been placed over the geogrid reinforcement. Sudden braking and turning of construction vehicles in the reinforced zone shall be avoided. E. Construction Tolerance. Allowable construction tolerance of the retaining wall shall be as follows: 1. Deviation from the design batter and horizontal alignment, when measured along a 10 ft (3 m) straight wall section, shall not exceed 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Deviation from the overall design batter shall not exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm) per 10 ft (3 m) of wall height. 3. The maximum allowable offset (horizontal bulge) of the face in any precast modular block joint shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm). 4. The base of the precast modular block wall excavation shall be within 2 inches (50 mm) of the staked elevations, unless otherwise approved by the Inspection Engineer. 5. Differential vertical settlement of the face shall not exceed 1 ft (300 mm) along any 200 ft (61 m) of wall length. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -19 6. The maximum allowable vertical displacement of the face in any precast modular block joint shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm). 7. The wall face shall be placed within 2 inches (50 mm) of the horizontal location staked. WALL INFILL AND REINFORCED BACKFILL PLACEMENT A. Backfill material placed immediately behind the drainage aggregate shall be compacted as follows: 1. 98 percent of maximum dry density at ± 2 percent optimum moisture content per ASTM D698 standard proctor or 85 percent relative density per ASTM D4254. B. Compactive effort within 3 ft (0.9 m) of the back of the precast modular blocks should be accomplished with walk-behind compactors. Compaction in this zone shall be within 95 percent of maximum dry density as measured in accordance with ASTM D698 standard proctor or 80 percent relative density per ASTM D 4254. Heavy equipment should not be operated within 3 ft (0.9 m) of the back of the precast modular blocks. C. Backfill material shall be installed in lifts that do not exceed a compacted thickness of 9 inches (230 mm). D. At the end of each workday, the Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall grade the surface of the last lift of the granular wall infill to a 3 percent ± 1 percent slope away from the precast modular block wall face and compact it. E. The General Contractor shall direct the Grading Contractor to protect the precast modular block wall structure against surface water runoff at all times through the use of berms, diversion ditches, silt fence, temporary drains and/or any other necessary measures to prevent soil staining of the wall face, scour of the retaining wall foundation or erosion of the reinforced backfill or wall infill. OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE INFILL AND REINFORCED FILL ZONE A. The Retaining Wall Installation Contractor shall make all required allowances for obstructions behind and through the wall face in accordance with the approved construction shop drawings. B. Should unplanned obstructions become apparent for which the approved construction shop drawings do not account, the affected portion of the wall shall not be constructed until the Retaining Wall Design Engineer can appropriately address the required procedures for construction of the wall section in question. COMPLETION A. For walls supporting unpaved areas, a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of compacted, low- permeability fill shall be placed over the granular wall infill zone of the precast modular block retaining wall structure. The adjacent retained soil shall be graded to prevent ponding of water behind the completed retaining wall. B. For retaining walls with crest slopes of 5H:1V or steeper, silt fence shall be installed along the wall crest immediately following construction. The silt fence shall be located 3 ft to 4 ft (0.9 m to 1.2 m) behind the uppermost precast modular block unit. The crest slope above the wall shall be immediately seeded to establish vegetation. The General Contractor shall ensure that the seeded slope receives adequate irrigation and erosion protection to support germination and growth. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 PRECAST MODULAR BLOCK GRAVITY RETAINING WALL 323223 -20 C. The General Contractor shall confirm that the as-built precast modular block wall geometries conform to the requirements of this section. The General Contractor shall notify the Owner of any deviations. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 1 SECTION 331000 WATER UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to North Andover Department of Public Works (DPW) and the Water Department Standards for Materials and Construction. E. Contractor shall register with “Dig Safe” 72 hours prior to construction. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain “Dig Safe” registrations and “Dig Safe” markings. Contractor shall comply fully with utility company requirements. F. The Contractor shall notify Town of North Andover Water Department sufficiently in advance of connecting new fire protection line and domestic water service to existing main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval by the Town of North Andover Water Department and shall conform to the applicable Town of North Andover Standards. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the Town of North Andover and paying all fees associated with the water system installation 1.2 NORTH ANDOVER WATER DEPARTMENT A. The Contractor shall notify North Andover Water Department sufficiently in advance of connecting new fire protection line and domestic water service to existing main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval by the North Andover Water Department and shall conform to the applicable North Andover Standards. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the Town of North Andover and paying all fees associated with the water system installation. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials and do all work necessary to construct the water utilities system, including connections to existing structures and testing, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish and install all utility lines, reducers, and appurtenances to a point 10 ft. from the outer face of a foundation wall, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 2 C. All fire protection lines and structures (valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances, including thrust blocks) shall be furnished and installed by the Fire Protection Contractor. D. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting the water utilities system to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority having jurisdiction. E. Field Measurement 1. Make necessary measurements in the field to assure precise fit of items in accordance with the approved design. 2. Locate water pipe at least 10 feet away, horizontally, from sewer pipes. Where bottom of the water pipe will be at least 12 inches above top of sewer pipe, locate water pipe at least 6 feet away, horizontally, from the sewer pipe. 3. Where water lines cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, fully encase the sewer pipe in concrete for a distance of at least 10 feet each side of the crossing, or provide pressure pipe with no joint located within 3 feet of the crossing. 4. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal, of water pipelines shall be braced with concrete thrust blocks and restraint joints (Mega Lugs or approved equal). 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Section 02 41 13 Utility Line Removal B. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork D. Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing E. Section 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls F. Section 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage G. Section 33 40 00 Stormwater Utilities 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA): C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings C105/A21.5 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Pipe Systems C110/A21.10 Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings C150/A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe C151/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast C500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service C515 Reduced-Wall, Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 3 C550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances C651 Disinfecting Water Mains C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings 1.6 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings A536 Ductile Iron Castings B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube B584 Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s product data: 1. Couplings 2. Pipe and fittings 3. Tapping sleeve and valve 4. Valve box 5. Valves, each type 6. Corporation stop 7. Post indicator valve 8. Hydrants 9. Detectable warning tape B. Shop drawings of backflow preventer cabinet C. Copy of disinfection results 1.8 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as indicated by the standard specification to which the material is manufactured. The Contractor shall furnish to the [Engineer], in duplicate, sworn certificates of such tests. B. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe, fittings, and special castings inspected and/or tested by an independent testing agency at either the manufacturer’s plant or elsewhere. Such inspections and/or tests shall be at the Owner’s expense. C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subject to a careful inspection and a hammer test just before being installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Fitting shall conform to A.W.W.A outlets or compression-types outlets with a minimum of 160 pounds per square inch Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 4 B. Ductile iron (DI) pipe for water mains shall be designed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ductile iron pipe shall be at least thickness Class 52. C. If corrosive soils are found where pipe is installed, pipe shall be encased in polyethylene per ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 D. DI pipe and fittings shall be push-on joint type with bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. E. DI pipe and fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Joints shall have the same pressure rating as the pipe or fitting of which they are a part. F. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. G. Inside of pipe and fittings shall be given a cement lining and bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Interior coating shall be a product acceptable to the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for use in potable water and shall be listed in the most current NSF summary of approved products. H. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall be as specified above except that the ends shall be plain (without bells or beads). The ends shall be cast or machined at right angles to the axis. I. Pipe shall be manufactured in the United States. J. Ductile Iron pipes and fittings, when located on a fire protection line, “FP” on the Drawings, are to be furnished and installed by the fire protection contractor. 2.2 COPPER PIPE A. Copper water service pipe shall be soft, annealed, seamless copper tubing conforming to the NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G requirements and shall be manufactured to meet ASTM B88, Type K. B. Tube shall be clean, smooth, round, straight (when applicable), of proper dimensions, and free of grooving, indentations, cracks, flaws, and other defects that would interfere with normal applications. Normal incised marking is acceptable. C. Joints in the copper service tubing shall be kept to a minimum by use of coiled copper tubing. D. Couplings shall be made of brass as specified in AWWA C800. Couplings shall be NSF/ANSI 61 Annex F and Annex G certified by an ANSI accredited organization and shall be stamped or embossed with a mark or name indicating that the product is manufactured with NO LEAD. E. Where necessary, joints shall be made with three part compression couplings, flared tube fittings (ASA Spec B-16), or an approved equal. F. Bends in copper service pipe, particularly gooseneck bends, shall be made with a bending tool especially designed for that purpose. G. Service fittings shall include a corporation stop with a curb stop service box, with frame and cover extending to the surface. H. The Contractor shall furnish to the [Engineer] satisfactory evidence that the copper tubing and fittings meet the requirements of these Specifications. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 5 2.3 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. When connections to existing water mains are required, a tapping sleeve and valve shall be used, or adequate size and pressure to ensure the continued flow of water through the existing main throughout construction. B. Tapping sleeve and valve shall consist of a split cast iron sleeve tee with mechanical joint ends on the main and a flange on the branch, and a tapping type gate valve with one flange and one mechanical joint end. C. A gate valve and box shall be installed with the tapping sleeve. D. Valve shall conform to the requirements specified below for gate valve. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the outside diameter of the pipe to be tapped. Valve shall have oversized seat to permit the use of full size cutters. 2.4 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. The resilient wedge gate valves shall fully comply with the latest revision of AWWA C509 or AWWA C515, and shall also be UL listed and FM approved. The valves shall be tested and certified to ANSI/NSF 61. B. The valve shall be rated for a minimum of 300 psi and tested to 400 psi. C. Valves shall be Type A2361 as manufactured by Mueller Company, American Flow Control (AFC) Series 3500, or an approved equal. D. The valve shall have an arrow cast on the operation nut showing opening direction. Valves shall open [LEFT/RIGHT]. E. All operating nuts shall be 2 in. square at the base, tapering to 1-15/16 in. square at the top. F. All valves shall have mechanical joint ends, complete with all accessories. Bolts shall be CorTen or approved equal. G. The valve body, bonnet, stuffing box, and disc shall be composed of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, or ASTM A536 ductile iron. The body and bonnet shall also adhere to the minimum wall thickness as set forth in Table 2 of AWWA C509 or C515. Wall thicknesses less than those in Table 2 are not acceptable. H. All bonnet bolts, seal plate bolts, stuffing box bolts, and other bolts in contact with soil (except for MJ bolts) shall be 18-8 Type 304 stainless steel or Everdur bronze. I. The valve disc and guide lugs must be fully encapsulated in SBR ASTM D2000 rubber material. Guide caps of an acetyl bearing material shall be placed over solid guide lugs to prevent abrasion and to reduce the operating torque. Rubber for valve seats shall be new, natural or synthetic, of a compound designated for water service applications. Reclaimed rubber is unacceptable. J. Rubber seats shall be either bonded to or mechanically attached to the gate. When mechanically attached, all exposed hardware shall be 18 - 8 Type 304 stainless steel. K. The valves shall have all internal and external ferrous surfaces coated with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating with 10 mils nominal thickness, and conforming to AWWA C550. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 6 L. Stem shall be of the non-rising type. M. Stem seals shall consist of two “O” rings, one as a dirt seal and one as a pressure seal. N. The upper “O” ring stem seal shall be replaceable with the valve under pressure in the full open position. O. A thrust washer of Teflon or approved equal shall be used directly above the stem collar. P. The valve shall be able to withstand an input torque of 300 foot pounds with no distortion of the stem or other damage to the valve. Q. The flow way shall be fully unobstructed with no pockets in bottom of flow-way to trap sediment or debris. R. All 4 in. and 6 in. gate valves shall be provided with a valve box and cover. Box shall be cast iron and shall be an adjustable, telescoping, heavy-pattern type. 1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic loads to the pipe or valve. 2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to prevent undue settlement. Lower section of box shall be designed to enclose the valve operating nut and stuffing box, and rest on the bonnet or backfill. 3. Boxes shall be capable of vertical adjustment of a minimum of 6 in. without reduction of overlap between sections to less than 4 in. 4. Inside diameter of box shall be a minimum of [5-1/4 in.] and length of box shall be as needed to suit finish ground elevation. 5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially airtight. Top of cover shall be flush with top of box rim. Cover shall have an arrow indicating the direction of opening and the word “WATER” cast into top. S. All valves 8 in. and larger shall be provided with a roadway frame and cover, unless plans call for chamber. 1. Roadway frames and covers shall be North Andover standard, [16 in. by 18 in.] 2. Valves requiring a roadway frame and cover shall be fitted with a standpipe having a diameter of at least 12 in. 3. Standpipes shall be Class 52 ductile iron pipe. 4. Standpipes shall be cut to a length to enable them to fit inside the roadway frame and cover so they do not transmit loads to the pipe or valve. 5. All roadway covers shall be cast with the appropriate markings to signify the type of valve installed. 6. The valve-operating nut shall be centered in the valve tube and visible upon installation. T. All valves shall be manufactured in the United States. U. Valves, valve boxes, [and indicator posts] when located on a fire protection line, “FP” on the Drawings, are to be furnished and installed by the fire protection contractor. 2.5 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINTS A. Restraint devices for nominal pipe sized 4 in. through 48 in. shall consist of multiple gripping wedges incorporated into a follower gland meeting the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 7 B. The device shall have a working pressure rating of 350 psi for 3 in. – 16 in. and 250 psi for 18 in. – 48 in. nominal sizes. C. Gland body, wedges, and wedge actuating components shall be cast from grade 65-45-12 ductile iron material in accordance with ASTM A536. D. All wedge assemblies and related parts shall be processed through a phosphate wash, rinse, and drying operation prior to coating application. The coating shall consist of a minimum of two coats of liquid thermoset epoxy coating with heat cure to follow each coat. E. All casting bodies shall be surface pretreated with a phosphate wash, rinse, and sealer before drying. The coating shall be electrostatically applied and heat cured. The coating shall be a polyester based powder to provide corrosion, impact, and UV resistance. F. The coating system shall be MEGA-BON by EBAA Iron, Inc. or approved equal. 2.6 BACK FLOW DEVICE A. A double check valve assembly shall be installed at each location noted on the Drawings. B. The assembly shall consist of two positive seating check modules with captured springs and rubber seat discs. The check module seats and seat discs shall be replaceable. C. Service of all internal components shall be through a single bronze or stainless steel access cover secured with stainless steel bolts. D. The assembly shall also include two resilient seated isolation valves; four top mounted, resilient seated test cocks. E. The assembly shall meet the requirements of AWWA C510. 2.7 CORPORATION AND CURB STOPS A. Stops shall be manufactured in accordance with the chemical and mechanical requirements of AWWA C800 and ASTM B584. B. All service fittings shall be NSF 61 certified for potable water applications. C. All metal components that come into contact with potable water shall be NO LEAD certified by an ANSI accredited organization and shall be stamped or embossed with a mark or name indicating that the product is manufactured from a low-lead alloy, as specified above. D. Stops shall be ball valve style. Curb stops shall have compression connections at inlets and outlets as required to suit the type of pipe or tubing to be connected. E. The inlet for all corporation stops shall be an AWWA (CC) tapered thread. The outlet shall be suitable for compression type connections and shall be of the type required to suite the pipe or tubing to be connected. F. Stops shall open [RIGHT/CLOCKWISE, LEFT/COUNTER CLOCKWISE]. G. Corporation stops shall be subject to a sustained hydraulic pressure of 200 psi and tested in both the open and closed positions for leakage and ease of turning. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 8 H. All taps greater than 1 in. shall require the use of a tapping saddle. Service clamps shall be installed with all corporation stops 2 in. and larger in size. I. Stops shall be manufactured in the United States. Manufacturers include Mueller Co., Ford Meter Box Co., and E.J. Prescott, Inc. 2.8 HYDRANTS A. Hydrants shall conform to the “standard dry barrel hydrants” AWWA C502. B. Hydrants shall be designed for 150 psi service and for installation in a 5 ft. covered trench. C. Hydrants shall open clockwise and must be marked with an arrow and the word OPEN to indicate the direction of turn of the stem to open the hydrant. D. Hydrants shall have one steamer connection, 4-1/2 in. diameter and two 2-1/2 in. hose nozzles, all with National Standard Thread (NST). E. Hydrant inlet opening on shoe shall have mechanical joints for accepting 6 in. ductile or cast iron pipe. F. Hydrants shall have a compression type main valve, opening against and closing with water pressure. The main valve opening at the base of the hydrant shall have a minimum area of 39 sq. in. (5 in. minimum diameter circle). G. Each hydrant shall have “traffic” type ground line construction (breakaway bolts NOT acceptable) and permit 360 degree movement of the upper barrel to allow for any alignment without shutting down service and/or removing flange bolts and nuts. H. Hydrant operating nut shall be 1-1/2 in., flat to point, pentagonal. I. Hydrants shall be hydrostatically tested as specified in AWWA C502. J. The length of the hydrant barrel shall be such that, when installed with the proper depth of cover on the branch pipeline, the hydrant will be set with the normal ground line of barrel within 3 in. of the actual finished ground grade surface elevation. K. Connecting pipe and pipe nipples between the main line tee and hydrant shall be 6 in. ductile iron conforming to the requirements for ductile iron pipe. L. Hydrants shall be provided by the fire protection contractor. 2.9 EMBEDMENT MATERIALS A. Ductile iron water pipe shall use materials defined in AWWA C600, Sec. 3.5, Backfilling and shall conform to MassDOT Specifications M1.01.0. B. Backfill material shall be of good quality and free from cinders, frozen material, ashes, refuse, boulders, rocks, or organic material. C. Pipe bedding shall be washed and screened sharp gravel, well graded in sizes from 1/4 in. to 1- 1/2 in., inclusive. It shall be clean, hard, durable, and free from dust, clay, or organic matter. It shall be well compacted in place. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 9 2.10 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPE A. Tape shall consist of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with no less than a 0.35 mil solid aluminum foil core. Solid foil core shall be encased between a 100% virgin polyethylene film and clear protective film which allows a full view of the foil and printed message. All detectable marking tapes shall be permanently printed. B. Color shall conform to North Andover standards. C. Tape shall be [BLUE] with the words [“WATER LINE BELOW”] printed consistently on it. D. Manufactured from durable and resistant elements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all parts of the Project where water utilities are to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Construction Manager, with copy to the [Engineer], any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 HANDLING AND CUTTING DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the fact that the cement pipe lining is relatively brittle. Every care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid damaging the pipe, fittings, and linings, scratching or marring machined surfaces, and abrasion of the pipe coating or lining. B. Any fitting or pipe showing a crack and any fitting or pipe which has received a severe blow that may have caused an incipient fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen, shall be marked as rejected and removed at once from the work. C. In any pipe showing a distinct crack, and in which it is believed that there is no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portions of the pipe, if so approved, may be cut off by and at the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid, so that the pipe used will be perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at least 12 in. from the visible limits of the crack. D. Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with an approved power operated cutter. Hammer and chisel or hydraulic squeeze cutters are not acceptable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Ductile iron pipe may be cut using an abrasive cut-off saw, rotary wheel cutter, milling wheel saw, or guillotine pipe saw. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks caused by cutting. Cut ends shall be beveled with a heavy file or grinder to remove all sharp edges. Beveling with a saw blade is not acceptable. E. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of pipes or fittings will render them unfit for use. The Contractor shall use the utmost care in handling and installing lined and coated pipe and fittings to prevent damage. Protective guards shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 10 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not indicated on the Drawings, the [Engineer]’s approval shall be obtained for proposed locations before installation. B. Each pipe and fitting shall be carefully cleared of all debris, dirt, and other foreign materials, before being laid and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation, until accepted in the complete work. C. At all times when pipe laying is not actually in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by temporary watertight plugs or by other approved means. If water is in the trench when work is resumed, the plug shall not be removed until all danger of water entering the pipe is eliminated. D. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean, disinfected, and flushed again following completion of backfill and passing of leakage and pressure testing. E. All pipes and fittings shall have no less than 5 ft. and no more than 6 ft. of cover unless otherwise indicated or approved. No pipe shall be laid in the same trench with gas pipes, sewer pipes, or any other facility of a public service company, no within 5 feet of any open excavation or vault, nor within 10 ft. of any septic structure or leaching field. F. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600, Laying Condition Type Four. G. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. H. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade. I. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. J. Water service line shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C800 and as indicated on the Drawings. K. Push-on joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the pipe and joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated. The plain end of the pipe to be entered shall than be inserted in alignment with the bell of the pipe to which it is to be jointed and pushed home with a jack or by other approved means. After jointing the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to make certain that the rubber gasket is located correctly. L. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets. M. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal, of water pipelines shall be braced with concrete thrust blocks and/or restraint joints (Megalugs, Star, or approved equal). Concrete thrust blocks shall be used only where they will bear on undisturbed earth. N. Warning tape shall be installed along the whole length of the installed pipe and shall be placed on the top of the embedment material as indicated on the Drawings. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 11 3.4 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINTS A. Mechanical joint restraint shall require conventional tools and installation procedures per AWWA C600 while retaining full mechanical joint deflection after assembly. B. Proper actuation of the gripping wedges shall be ensured with torque limiting twist off nuts. 3.5 TAPPING SLEEVE AND VALVE A. Tapping sleeve and valve shall be installed in accordance with the valve manufacturer’s recommendations. The tapping sleeve shall be bolted around the existing water main and bolts tightened. Valve shall be bolted to the flanged outlet of the sleeve with the valve open, the tapping machine bolted on, and the tap made. The cutter shall then be withdrawn, the valve closed, and the tapping machine removed. 3.6 TESTING A. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the [Engineer], the Department of Public Works (DPW), Water Department, and the Plumbing Inspector, and received by them not less than [five days] before the date of test. B. The Contractor shall notify the Water Department and DPW sufficiently in advance of connecting new main to existing main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval by the Water Department and shall conform to the applicable North Andover Specifications. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the town of North Andover and paying all fees (if required) associated with the water system installation. D. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, pumps, taps, chemicals, and other necessary equipment to conduct hydrostatic pressure tests, measured leakage tests, and laboratory bacteriological analysis on mains laid and/or lined under this contract in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600, ASTM C969, and ASTM C1244. E. In the event that the work fails to meet the required standards as stated herein, the Contractor shall perform such excavation, repair, re-laying of pipe, re-chlorinating, and all other work necessary to correct the work and shall repeat the tests as often as may be necessary and until such time as the required standards are met. F. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing, generally through complete or partial backfilling. Where any section of the water utilities system is provided with concrete thrust blocks, the test shall not be made until at least five days have elapsed since concrete was placed. G. If high-early-strength cement is used in the concrete thrust blocks, the test shall not be made until at least two days have elapsed since the concrete was placed. H. Prior to testing, the pipe line, or section thereof, to be tested shall be thoroughly flushed and all air expelled. All air shall be expelled by appropriate methods, including the use of corporation stops installed by the Contractor, at no additional cost, at high points along the water main. If hydrants or blowoffs are not available at high points for releasing air, the Contractor shall make the necessary excavations, do the necessary backfilling, make the necessary taps at such points, and shall plug said holes after completion of the test. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 12 1. The section under test shall be maintained full of water for a period of 24 hours prior to the concurrent pressure and leakage tests being applied. 2. After all air has been expelled and the corporation stops closed, the test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. The test equipment shall be installed by the Contractor in such a manner that all water entering the section will be measured and the pressure in the section indicated and they shall be kept in use during all tests. 3. For system operating pressures of 200 psi or less, perform the hydrostatic test at a pressure of no less than 100 psi above the normal operating pressure without exceeding the rating of the pipe and appurtenances. For system operating pressures in excess of 200 psi, perform the hydrostatic test at a pressure that is 1.5 times the normal operating pressure, but no more than the design rating of the pipe and appurtenances. 4. The pressure shall be maintained for two hours. 5. Valves shall not be operated in either direction at a differential pressure exceeding the rated valve working pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the rated working pressure or differential pressure of the valves when the pressure boundary of the test section included closed, resilient-seated gate valves or butterfly valves. I. If the Contractor cannot achieve the specific pressure and maintain it for a period of two hours, the section under test shall be considered as having failed to pass the pressure test. J. During the test, the line will be examined by the [Engineer] for visible leaks and breaks. Any defects in the works shall be repaired, and any defective materials shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor as and where directed by the Engineer. All visible leaks are to be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage. K. Conduct a leakage test concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage is defined as the volume of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipeline to maintain pressure within plus or minus 5 psi of the test pressure after it is filled and purged of air. Measure the volume of water using a calibrated container or meter. L. No pipeline installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that shown in the following table. Allowable Leakage (gal/hr) per 1,000 ft. of pipeline Avg. Test Pressure (psi) Nominal Pipe Diameter (in.) 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 350 0.42 0.56 0.84 1.12 1.40 1.69 1.97 2.25 300 0.39 0.52 0.78 1.04 1.30 1.56 1.82 2.08 250 0.36 0.47 0.71 0.95 1.19 1.42 1.66 1.90 200 0.32 0.43 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.48 1.70 175 0.30 0.40 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.39 1.59 150 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.29 1.47 125 0.25 0.34 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.18 1.34 100 0.23 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 *If testing against closed metal-seated valves, an additional leakage per closed valve of 0.0078 gal/hour per inch of nominal valve size shall be allowed for the leakage test only. M. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test procedures and listing test results shall be submitted to the [Engineer]. The report shall be signed by the Contractor’s Superintendent. 3.7 DISINFECTION A. After completion of all water main related construction, except water service connection installation, all water mains, valves, hydrants, hydrant connections, and other appurtenances Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 13 installed under this Contract shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651, Section 4.4.3 (Continuous Feed Method), as modified herein before being placed in service. B. All water mains shall be thoroughly flushed to clear the pipe of debris and sediment prior to disinfection. The flushing rate shall be at least 2.5 ft./sec for mains smaller than 20 inches in diameter. The flushing velocity in pipes greater than 20 inches in diameter may be at a lower rate, as indicated by the [Engineer]. The following table lists the required opening to flush pipelines to obtain a velocity of 2.5 ft./sec and is taken from AWWA C651. Required Opening to Flush Pipelines* to Produce 2.5 ft./sec Velocity Pipe Size (in) Req’d Flushing Rate (gal/min) Hydrant Outlets Required to be Opened Inch Number Size 4 100 15/16 1 2-1/2 6 220 1-3/8 1 2-1/2 8 390 1-7/8 1 2-1/2 10 610 2-5/16 1 2-1/2 12 880 2-13/16 2 2-1/2 14 1,200 3-1/4 2 2-1/2 16 1,565 3-5/8 2 2-1/2 *With 40 psi residual pressure, a 2-1/2 in. hydrant outlet nozzle will discharge approximately 1,000 gal/min and a 4-1/2 in. hydrant nozzle will discharge approximately 2,500 gal/min. C. Disinfection of mains shall be accomplished only by crews who have had experience with chlorine or other disinfecting agents. Crews responsible for the repair of mains shall be aware of potential health hazards and shall be trained to carefully observe prescribed construction practices and disinfection procedures. D. Taps for flushing, chlorination, and sampling shall be installed by Contractor at no additional expense. E. Prepare a chlorine solution that will be continuously fed into the potable water that is used to fill the new water mains. 1. The chlorine solution shall be applied to the new water mains with a chemical feed pump designed to feed chlorine solutions. 2. Completely fill the new water mains with chlorinated, potable water to remove any air pockets. The point of application shall be no more than 10 ft. downstream from the beginning of the new water mains. 3. The chlorine solution shall be of sufficient strength to provide a minimum residual chlorine concentration of 25 milligrams per liter (mg/L) in the filled water mains as given in the table below. Pipe Diameter (in.) 100% Chlorine (lbs.) 1% Chlorine Solution (gal) 4 0.013 0.16 6 0.030 0.36 8 0.054 0.65 10 0.085 1.02 12 0.120 1.44 16 0.217 2.60 F. New valves and hydrants shall be operated to ensure their proper disinfection. G. Isolation valves shall be maintained in a closed position to prevent chlorinated water from entering the existing water distribution system. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 14 H. Chlorinated water shall remain in the main for a minimum of 24 hours. I. The minimum residual chlorine concentration at the end of the 24 hour holding period shall not be less than 10 mg/L. J. After the 24 hour retention period, chlorinated water shall be flushed from every hydrant branch on the main until the chlorine concentration leaving the main is no higher than that generally in the system or less than 1 mg/L. K. Chlorinated water shall be discharged in a manner that will not adversely affect flora and fauna or drainage courses and shall conform to applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations. L. Chlorinated water that is flushed from the mains shall be neutralized by the addition of a dechlorinating agent so that the residual chlorine concentration is zero. M. The location of the discharge for the dechlorinated water shall be approved by the Department of Public Works. 3.8 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTS A. A minimum of 24 hours after final flushing and before water main is placed in service, the Contractor shall collect a sample or samples for testing of the bacteriological quality of the water from the water main at approved locations. B. No hose or fire hydrant shall be used in the collection of samples. C. A sampling tap shall consist of a standard corporation stop installed in the main with a PVC gooseneck assembly. D. Samples for bacteriological testing shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulfate and furnished by the state certified laboratory that will perform the tests. E. Unless otherwise directed, the minimum number of samples for bacteriological analysis shall be as follows: 1. One sample every 1,000 linear feet of newly installed water mains. 2. One sample at the end of the new installed water mains. 3. One sample at each branch. F. Samples shall be analyzed for the presence of Coliform bacteria and heterotrophic plate count (HPC) bacteria. G. The disinfection procedure shall be considered satisfactory only if the results of all tests confirm the following: 1. The absence of coliform bacteria in all samples taken 2. HPC bacteria are 10 or less colony forming units per milliliter (cfu/mL) in all samples taken (unless the water supplier has established a stricter HPC limit from baseline data for their water distribution system, in which case the results of the HPC bacteria tests shall meet the stricter limit). H. The new water mains may be placed in service if the results of the disinfection procedure are satisfactory and the Water Department has granted permission. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER UTILITIES 331000 - 15 I. If the initial disinfection procedure fails to produce satisfactory results, the new water mains shall be flushed and resampled as described above. If the test results from the resampling also fail to produce satisfactory results, the entire disinfection procedure shall be repeated. J. The contractor shall submit to the Department for review and approval the means and methos of conducting these tests at least seven days prior to performance. After the new mains have passed all the test, the Water Department will be on site to charge the main 3.9 AS-BUILTS A. As-built plans shall be furnished to the Department in duplicate by the contractor or owner at the completion of the project. The plans in particular will depict exact distances between gate valves, ties to gate valves, both in the main and on hydrant branches. Curb box location referenced to the house or building that it serves by at least 2 ties from permanent points. Curb tie drawing shall include distance between main and curb stop. B. The Contractor shall provide the Designer with as-builts of all the newly installed system. The stamped and signed as-built plan shall be based on a field survey performed by a certified professional land surveyor. The as-built shall include locations and depths to all pipes, fittings, and fixtures, and shall be shown on a site plan and in AutoCAD format. The Contractor shall also supply the Engineer with the model/serial number of all tapping sleeves and water meters installed as part of the project. 1. Rejection: The as-built will be rejected if the design AutoCAD files are modified or updated and submitted as the as-built. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 1 SECTION 333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to North Andover Department of Public Works (DPW) Standards for Materials and Construction. E. Contractor shall register with “Dig Safe” 72 hours prior to construction. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain “Dig Safe” registrations and “Dig Safe” markings. Contractor shall comply fully with utility company requirements. 1.2 NORTH ANDOVER DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS (DPW) A. The Contractor shall notify North Andover DPW sufficiently in advance of connecting new main to existing main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval by the North Andover DPW and shall conform to the applicable North Andover Specifications. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the town of North Andover and paying all fees associated with the sewer system installation. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials and do all work necessary to construct the sewer system, including connections to existing structures and testing, as indicated on the Drawing and as specified. B. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, sewer lines shall be installed to a point 10 ft. from the outer face of a foundation wall. C. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting sanitary sewerage system to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Section 02 41 13 UTILITY LINE REMOVAL B. Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 2 C. Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK D. Section 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING E. Section 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS F. Section 33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES G. Section 33 40 00 STORMWATER UTILITIES 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A48 Gray Iron Castings A74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings A615 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A888 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications C270 Mortar for Unit Masonry C443 Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets C478 Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings C828 Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines C969 Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines C990 Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants C1227 Precast Concrete Septic Tanks C1244 Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill C1277 Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings C1613 Precast Concrete Grease Interceptor Tanks D2729 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe - Dimensions D3034 Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals F477 Elastomeric Seals for Joining Plastic Pipe F1417 Installation Acceptance of Plastic Non-pressure Sewer Lines Using Low- Pressure Air Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 3 F2649 Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Grease Interceptor Tanks C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) QQ-A-200/8 Alluminum Alloy 6061 Bar, Rod, Shapes, Tube, and Wire, Extruded D. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 301 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications 310 Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications E. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications) 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s product data: 1. Precast Structures 2. Castings 3. Nonshrink Grout 4. Cement Concrete 5. PVC Pipe and Fittings 6. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES A. Sanitary sewer manholes shall be constructed according to the specifications of North Andover and as shown on the Drawings. B. Manholes and access risers shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO HS-20 loading, as specified in the AASHTO Specifications. C. Manholes shall be reinforced precast concrete unless specified by the [Engineer] or approved as a change by the [Engineer]. D. Precast concrete structures shall be Type II cement unless specifically authorized in writing, conform to ASTM C478, and shall be similar to those produced by the manufacturers in the table below. Manufacturer Concrete Systems Inc., Hudson, NH E.F. Shea Concrete Products, Amesbury, MA Oldcastle Infrastructure, Rehoboth, MA E. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints. F. [[Joints between sections shall be made with preformed rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443 as shown on the Drawings.]] Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 4 G. [[Joints between sections shall be sealed with a preformed flexible joint sealant conforming to the requirements of ASTM C990. The manufacturer of the precast units shall supply the joint sealant which shall be produced from blends of butyl rubber, refined hydrocarbon, resins, and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and solvent free.]] 1. [[The sealant shall have an approximate corss section of [3/8] in. by [3-1/2] in. for single strip application or [3/8] in. by [3/8] in. square, or [3/8] in. diameter cord for multiple cord usage application. Use six cords minimum for multiple cord applications.]] H. Each section shall have no more than two suitable lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. I. Precast base shall be shaped to receive the ends of pipe sections which are to be connected to the structure. J. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe, and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. K. Pipe shall be joined to wall of concrete manhole with [hydraulic cement, nonshrink grout or flexible manhole sleeve], as shown on the Drawings. L. Wall sections shall be a minimum of [4 in.] thick, as shown on the Drawings. M. Manholes shall have a minimum inside diameter of [4 ft.] as shown on the Drawings. The diameter of manholes shall be based on manufacturer’s recommendations for the proposed pipe layout shown on the plans. No change orders shall be accepted for upsizing of manholes based on the final layout of piping. N. Manholes shall have shaped brick inverts. O. Manhole sections shall contain manhole steps accurately positioned and imbedded in the concrete when the section is cast, in accordance with AASHTO M199. These steps shall be extruded aluminum, conforming to Fed Spec. QQ-A-200/8, or polypropylene plastic reinforced with 3/8 in. diameter steel rod. 1. Steps shall be drop-front, anti-skid design, 12 in. on center and 10 in. minimum width. Projection of front edge of step shall be greater than or equal to 5 in. from access riser wall. 2. Steps shall be embedded 3-1/2 in. into access riser wall or dosing tank wall. Those portions of steps to be embedded in access riser wall shall receive a heavy coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. Coating shall be thoroughly dry before steps are embedded in the access riser or dosing tank wall. 3. Steps in precast sections shall be embedded at time of casting. P. The date of manufacturer and the name or trademark of the manufacturer shall be clearly marked on the inside of the barrel. 2.2 CASTINGS A. All frames and covers shall be cast iron, heavy duty, conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35 and shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO HS-20 loading. B. All castings shall be made in the United States. C. Manhole frames and covers shall be of noiseless, non-rocking design with pick holes. The word [“Sewer”] shall be cast on cover in [3 in.] letters, as applicable. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 5 D. Standard manhole covers and frames shall have a minimum total weight of [475 lbs.] with a clear opening of [24 in.] unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. All frames and grates shall be free from blow holes, shrinkage, distortion or other defects. They shall be smooth and well cleaned by shotblasting and fitted together in a satisfactory manner. F. All frames and covers shall conform to the MassDOT Specifications M 8.03.0. 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (NONPRESSURE) A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) nonpressure pipe and fittings for gravity sewers shall conform to ASTM D3034, SDR 35 minimum wall thickness. B. Pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths of 14 ft. or 20 ft. C. PVC shall be bell-and-spigot type with joints made using an integral bell and rubber gasketed joint. Each integral bell joint shall conform to ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. D. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be imprinted with an “assembly stripe” to which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes. E. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gauge to ensure the proper location in the coupling grooves. 2.4 CAST IRON PIPE (NONPRESSURE) A. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A888, or ASTM A74. B. Castings shall be sound, true to pattern, and compact close grain that permits drilling and cutting by ordinary methods and its interior surface shall be reasonably smooth and free from defects. C. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the [Engineer]. D. Hubless couplings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI 310 or ASTM C1277. E. Hubless coupling gaskets shall conform to ASTM C564. 2.5 EMBEDMENT MATERIALS A. Bedding, haunching, and initial backfill shall be Class I, II, or III soils conforming to ASTM D2321. 1. Class I materials shall be angular crushed stone or rock, dense or open graded with little or no fines (1/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. in size). 2. Class II materials shall be clean, coarse grained materials such as gravel, coarse sands, and gravel/sand mixtures (1-1/2 in. maximum in size). 3. Class III materials shall be coarse grained materials with fines including silty or clayey gravels or sands. Gravel or sand shall comprise more than 50 percent of Class III materials (1-1/2 in. maximum size). B. Embedment materials shall be free from lumps of frozen soil or ice. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 6 2.6 MORTAR A. Mortar shall be a Portland cement mortar conforming to ASTM C270, Type M. B. Mortar shall contain a waterproofing admixture similar to those given below. Product Manufacturer Hycrete Hycrete hycrete.com 14 Spielman Rd. Fairfield, NJ 07004 866-492-7383 ADI-CON CW PLUS W.R. Meadows https://www.wrmeadows.com/ 300 Industrial Drive P.O. Box 338 Hampshire, IL 60140 800-342-5976 Eucon Euclid Chemical - www.euclidchemical.com/ 19215 Redwood Road Cleveland, OH 44110 800-321-7628 2.7 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Grout shall be cement based, nonmetallic, nonshrink grout that meets performance requirements of ASTM C1107. B. Grout shall be similar to those given below. Product Manufacturer MasterFlow 885 BASF Construction Chemicals - www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us 23700 Chagrin Blvd. Beachwood, OH 44122 800-722-8899 5 Star Grout Five Star Products – www.fivestarproducts.com 60 Parrott Drive Shelton, CT 06484 800-243-2206 MascoGrout Mason Supply Corp – www.masco.net 2637 SE 12th Avenue Portland, OR 97202 503-234-4321 2.8 BRICK A. Brick for support of cast-iron cover and frame shall be any of the following types: 1. Common brick meeting the physical requirements of ASTM C32, Grade SW. 2. Clay brick meeting the physical requirements of ASTM C32, Grade MS. B. Brick for sewer manhole invert channel shall conform to ASTM C32, Grade SS. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 7 2.9 GREASE INTERCEPTOR A. Grease interceptor shall conform to ASTM C1613 or ASTM F2649. B. Grease interceptor shall be a precast concrete or HDPE structure. C. Precast concrete structures shall have an internal volume of not less than [5,500] gallons, a liquid depth of [4 ft.], and shall meet the following: 1. Concrete design strength shall be 4,000 PSI minimum after 28 days 2. All reinforcement shall be in conformance with the applicable sections of ASTM A615 or ASTM C1227. 3. Designed for AASHTO HS-20 loading. 4. Watertight structure with tongue and groove joints sealed with butyl resin or preformed rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443 or ASTM C990. 5. Exterior: Bituminous coating, two coats. 6. Wall thickness [6 in.] minimum 7. [6 in.] diameter inlet and outlet. 8. Each section of the grease interceptor shall have no more than two suitable lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. 9. Precast grease interceptor shall be manufactured with wall opening to receive the ends of pipes which are to be connected to the structure. Pipe openings in base shall be the minimum size required to receive the pipe, and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. D. Exterior surfaces of precast concrete shall receive a heavy shop-applied coating of bituminous waterproofing equal to: Product Manufacturer H.B. Tnemecol Series 46-465 Tnemec Company http://www.tnemec.com 6800 Corporate Dr. Kansas City, MO 64120 816-483-3400 Ebony Bay Oil Company https://www.bayoillubricants.com/ 38 Plainfield St. Chicopee, MA 01013 413-737-7728 MasterSeal HLM 5000 Master Builders Solutions by BASF www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 800-433-9517 E. HDPE interceptors shall conform to the following: 1. Grease Interceptors shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations using pipe that meets AASHTO M252 Type S, AASHTO M294 Type S, or ASTM F2306. 2. The inlet and outlet of the unit shall utilize 8 in. SDR 32.5 HDPE pipe. A weir plate shall be installed with an orifice centrally located to control flow into the last chamber. At the weir plate, a vertical half-round pipe shall be installed to minimize contaminants through the orifice. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 8 3. Connections to the inlet and outlet shall utilize couplers with the same joint performance as the main sewer pipe. 4. Material for pipe and fittings used to produce the Grease Interceptor shall be HDPE conforming to the minimum requirements of cell classification 424420C for 4 in. through 10 in. diameters, and 435400C for 12 in. through 60 in. diameters as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350. The pipe material shall be evaluated using the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306, respectively. 2.10 HOLDING TANK A. Holding tanks shall be a precast concrete structure with an internal volume of not less than [4,000 gallons], a liquid depth of [4 ft.], and shall meet the following: 1. Shall be constructed in tandem with a secondary holding tank. 2. Designed for HS-20 loading. 3. Does not leak through its sides, bottoms, seams, or top. 4. In compliance with 314 CMR 18.08. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect all parts of the Project where SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM is to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Construction Manager, with copy to the [Engineer], any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. B. Post installation, [Engineer] will visually inspect all gravity sewer pipe installed to verify alignment and ensure the pipe is free from obstruction and debris. When the full diameter of the pipe is visible between adjacent manholes, the segment of piping is deemed properly aligned and free of sags and debris. If the segment of pipe fails the visual inspection the pipe shall be cleaned and/or replaced and retested. 3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements 1. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not given on the Drawings, the Town’s and the [Engineer]’s approval shall be obtained for proposed locations before installation. 2. Sewer pipe shall be laid at a minimum of ten feet from the water main. Should local conditions prevent a lateral separation of ten feet, a sewer may be laid closer than ten feet from a water main if: a. Approved by DPW b. It is laid in a separate trench. c. The elevation of the top (crown) of the sewer will be at least 18 in. lower than the bottom (invert) of the water main. 3. Sewer pipe shall be laid at a minimum of 5 ft. horizontally from a drainage main and/or 18 in. vertically from a drainage main. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 9 4. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 5. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade. 7. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets. 8. No pipe or fittings shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 9. Where necessary, watertight plugs or other approved means shall be employed to close ends of pipeline when laying is not in progress. 10. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. B. PVC Pipe and Fittings 1. PVC pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Buried pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ASTM F1668. 3. Gasket shall not be removed from gasket groove for any reason. C. Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 1. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Support horizontal pipe and fittings at sufficiently close intervals to maintain alignment and prevent sagging or grade reversal. Support each length of pipe by an approved hanger located not more than 18 in. from each joint and every 10 ft. horizontally. Support terminal ends of all horizontal runs or branches and each change of direction or alignment with an approved hanger. 3. Installations requiring multiple joints within a 4 ft. developed length shall be supported at every other (alternating) hub or coupling. 4. Vertical components shall be secured at each stack base and at sufficiently close intervals to keep the system in alignment and to adequately support the pipe and its contents, using approved metal clamps or hangers. 5. Maximum deflection should not exceed 1/2 in. per ft. of pipe. For more than five degrees of deflection, fitting should be used. 6. Cast iron pipe and fittings should be connected with shielded hubless coupling manufactured in accordance with CISPI 310 or ASTM C1277. 7. Soil supporting the pipe shall be sufficiently level so that support is provided all along the full length of the pipe. If the base is not sufficiently flat, it shall be overexcavated and backfilled to grade with select soil that can be leveled to become a suitable base. 8. Soil must be placed and compacted under the haunches. Sidefill shall be placed and distributed in one lift up to the spring line on both sides of the pipe to prevent sideshift. 9. A soil arch shall be densely compacted up over the pipe, springing from good abutments or rigid trench sidewalls. In so doing, the pipe and loose soil envelope in which it is packed shall not crushed or compacted. 3.3 MANHOLES A. All manholes shall be built in accordance with the Details and in the locations shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Structures shall be constructed of precast concrete. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 10 C. All masonry shall be installed by personnel experienced and skilled in this work, and any person not deemed to be such by the [Engineer] shall be removed and replaced by a person so qualified. D. Manholes shall be constructed as soon as the pipe laying reaches the location of the manhole. Should pipe laying continue without making provision for the completion of the manhole, the [Engineer] shall have the authority to stop the pipe laying operations until the manhole is completed. E. The Contractor shall accurately locate each manhole and set accurate templates to conform to the required line and grade. Any manhole which is mislocated or oriented improperly shall be removed and rebuilt in its proper location, alignment, and orientation at the Contractor’s expense. F. Unless otherwise specified, all manholes shall be constructed on a 12 in. layer of compacted bedding material. The excavation shall be properly dewatered to provide a dry condition while placing bedding material and setting the base. G. Brick invert channels shall be constructed in all manholes to provide a smooth channel for sewage flow through the structure, and shall correspond in shape to the lower half of the pipe. At changes of directions, the inverts shall be laid out in curves of the longest possible radii tangent to the centerline of the sewer pipes. Brick shelves shall be constructed to the elevation of the highest pipe crown and sloped to drain toward the flow channel. Only red sewer brick shall be used for any invert, brick shelves, and manhole frame adjustments. Brick shall comply with ASTM Standard Specification for Sewer Brick (made from clay or shale), Designation C32, for Grade SS. H. Special care shall be taken in laying brick inverts. Joints shall not exceed 3/16 inch in thickness and each brick shall be carefully laid in full cement mortar joints on bottom, side, and end in one operation. No grouting or working in of mortar after laying of the brick will be permitted. Bricks forming the shaped inverts in manholes shall be laid on edge. I. Invert channels shall be built for future extensions where shown on the Drawings and where directed by the [Engineer]. Inverts shall not be built above ground. All inverts shall be built with the manhole in place (i.e. at the design elevation) and with all pipes installed. J. Precast manholes shall be installed only after Shop Drawings have been approved. K. The top grade of the precast concrete section shall be set sufficiently below finished grade to permit a maximum of [five] and a minimum of [two] courses of [8 in.] brick, laid in the flat position, to be used as risers to adjust the grade of the manhole frame. Manhole frames shall be set on a grout pad to make a water-tight fit. L. Frames and Covers for manholes shall be of the type and size indicated on the Drawings. Frames shall be well bedded in mortar and shall be set accurately to the correct alignment and grade. M. The entire exterior surface of all manholes shall be coated with two coats of an approved bitumastic material to produce a dry film thickness of 0.07 in. (seven mils) per coat. 3.4 GREASE INTERCEPTOR A. The grease interceptor shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Installation of HDPE grease interceptor shall utilize a Class I (ASTM D2321) structural backfill material or flowable fill (CLSM –Controlled Low Strength Material). Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 11 C. Units shall be installed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. D. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the subgrade is compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D558 density. The subgrade shall be a minimum of 6 in. in depth. A granular materials shall be used to create a level surface for placing the precast concrete unit. E. Backfilling shall be completed as soon as possible after the structure has been placed. No liquid shall be placed in the tank prior to backfill. F. Backfill material shall be granular and free from large stones, rocks, and pavement. Expansive soil material shall not be used as backfill around the structure. G. Backfilling shall be achieved by lifts (layers) to the required compaction. H. Follow up inspections for settlements are required. Should settlement occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary repairs. 3.5 TESTING – GRAVITY SYSTEM A. General Requirements 1. The entire sewer system, including piping and manholes, shall be tested for leakage. Pipes shall undergo deflection testing, leakage testing, and televised inspection. Pipes may be tested by the use of either water or low-pressure air. 2. Pipeline installation and backfilling is to be completed before pipeline testing takes place. Vacuum testing of manholes shall be completed immediately following assembly of manhole and prior to backfilling. 3. Testing shall be done from manhole to manhole. The maximum length of pipe tested shall not exceed 700 ft. If testing is not feasible between manholes due to live sewer service connections, the Contractor shall conduct low pressure air testing at each pipe joint. 4. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the [Engineer] and the DPW inspector, and received by them not less than five days before the date of test. 5. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. 6. Piping system shall be flushed clean and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed before piping is tested. 7. If the test section fails any of the tests, the contractor shall repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall submit to the [Engineer] a written statement stating that the work has been completed in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. B. Deflection Test 1. Flexible pipe, including “semi-rigid” pipe, is required to show no more than five percent deflection. 2. Pipe shall be tested using Standard Mandrel test no sooner than 30 days after backfilling and compacting of line segment, but prior to final acceptance to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances. Testing shall conform to ASTM D3034. 3. Mandrels shall be go/no go mandrels specifically designed for the pipe material and size being tested. Mandrels that do not specifically state the size and type of piping for which it is applicable shall not be allowed. 4. Other testing methods, such as electronic deflectometers or laser profilers, must be submitted for review and approval by the [Engineer] and the North Andover DPW prior to use. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 12 C. Leakage Tests 1. Compensating for Groundwater Pressure a. Where ground water exists, install pipe nipple at same time sewer line is placed. Use 1/2 in. capped pipe nipple approximately 10 in. long. Make installation through manhole wall on top of sewer line where line enters manhole. b. Immediately before performing line acceptance test, remove cap, clear pipe nipple with air pressure, and connect clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically and allow water to rise in tube. After water stops rising, measure height in feet of water over invert of pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 ft./psi to determine ground water pressure to be used in line testing. Add this pressure to all pressures given below. 2. Exfiltration and infiltration testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C969 except as otherwise noted. 3. Exfiltration a. When groundwater is less than 2 ft. above the crown of the pipe at the upstream end of the test section, an exfiltration test shall be made. b. Total exfiltration shall not exceed 50 gal per inch of pipe diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at minimum test head of 2 ft. above crown of pipe at upstream manhole or 2 ft. above groundwater elevation, whichever is greater. c. Plug all pipe outlets discharging into the upstream manhole as well as the outlet end of the test section. d. Ensure that the downstream end is properly plugged and secured. e. Fill the test section with water at the upstream end to a level 2-1/2 ft. above the highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or groundwater table, whichever is higher. f. The water level in the pipe should be held steady for a minimum of three hours and up to 72 hours to ensure that all of the trapped air is removed. g. After the stabilization period, refill the water level to the level determined in part e and begin the test. Take water level reading to determine drop of water surface, in inches, for a test period of not less than one hour and no more than 24 hours. Calculate water loss (1 in. of water in 4 ft. diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons) or measure quantity of water required to keep water at same level. Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to Table 1. h. Leakage for each manhole shall not exceed one gal/vertical ft. of manhole per 24 hours. If the water level is measured in the manhole for the exfiltration test, the leakage associated with the manhole shall be subtracted from the overall leakage of the test section to establish a pass or fail grade for the pipe. i. If the measured leakage is less than or equal to the allowable leakage for the project, the section of pipeline is acceptable. If the test section fails, it should be inspected, repaired if needed, and retested in accordance with the previous steps. 4. Infiltration a. When groundwater is 2 ft. or more above the crown of the pipe an infiltration test shall be made. b. Total infiltration shall not exceed 50 gal per inch of pipe diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. c. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. d. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole. e. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes. f. Take five readings of accumulated volume over a period of two hours and use average infiltration. Average must not exceed that calculated for two hours from allowable leakage according to Table 1. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 13 g. If the average leakage is less than or equal to the allowable leakage for the project, the section of pipeline is acceptable. If the test section fails, it should be inspected, repaired if needed, and retested in accordance with the previous steps. 5. Low-Pressure Air a. Low-pressure air testing shall be performed in accordance with the procedures described in ASTM C828 or ASTM F1417, except as otherwise noted. For making low-pressure tests, the Contractor shall use equipment specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose of testing sewer pipelines using low-pressure air. The equipment shall be provided with a regulator valve or air safety valve so set that the internal air pressure in the pipeline cannot exceed 8 psig. b. Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 27 in. average inside diameter for which groundwater is less than 2 ft. above the crown of the pipe at the upstream end. c. After manhole-to-manhole section of sanitary sewer main has been backfilled and cleaned, and prior to any service lines being connected to new line, plug line at each manhole with pneumatic plugs, inflated to 25 psig. i) For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow two hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug concrete pipe. ii) Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the pipe to be tested. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal testing pressures without requiring external bracing or blocking. d. Low pressure air shall be introduced into this sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches 4 psig. A minimum of two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize. After the stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure in the pipe), the air hose from the control panel to the air supply shall be disconnected. Pressure shall be at 3.5 psig before beginning the test. e. To determine air loss, measure time interval for pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig. Time must meet or exceed that listed in Table 2 below for pipe diameter and length. f. When the sewer section to be tested contains more than one size pipe, the maximum allowable time shall be based on the largest diameter pipe in the section, and shall be the time shown in the table reduced by 30 seconds. g. Repair and retest any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements. 6. Manhole Vacuum Testing a. Manholes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1244. b. Manhole testing shall not apply to existing manholes or to existing manholes which have been converted to drop manholes by the Contractor. Manhole to pipe connection shall be a flexible connector and joints shall be grouted from the outside only. All lift holes shall be plugged inside and out with nonshrink grout. c. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged. The Contractor shall securely brace the plugs in order to keep them from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed at the inside of the top of the manhole and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. d. A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches of mercury shall not be less than that shown in Table 3 below. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 14 7. Promptly following satisfactory completion of the leakage testing, a report fully describing test procedures and listing test results shall be submitted to the [Engineer] and to the governmental agencies having jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractor’s superintendent. 8. Upon successful completion of the tests, plug or caps installed for testing shall be removed. 9. If, in the judgement of the [Engineer], it is impractical to follow the foregoing procedure exactly for any reason, modification in the procedure shall be made as necessary and accepted, but in any event the Contractor shall be responsible for the ultimate tightness of the line within the above leakage and pressure requirements. TABLE 1 Water Test Allowable Leakage Diameter of Riser or Stack in Inches Volume per Inch of Depth Allowance Leakage* Inch Gallons Pipe Size in Inches Gallons/Minute per 100 ft. 1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039 2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053 2.5 4.9087 .0212 13 0.0066 3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079 4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099 5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118 6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138 8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0158 27 0.0177 30 0.0197 36 0.0237 42 0.0276 For other diameters, multiply square of diameters by value of one in. diameter Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours *Allowable leakage rate shall be reduced to 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours, when sewer is identified as located within a 25-year flood plain. TABLE 2 Low Pressure Air Test Time Allowed for Pressure Loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig Pipe (in) Specification Time for Lengths Below (Min: Sec) Time for Longer Length (Sec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft 6 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33 0.854 x L (ft) 8 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:56 15:12 1.519 x L (ft) 10 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45 2.374 x L (ft) 12 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39 28:30 31:20 34:11 3.419 x L (ft) 15 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43 31:10 35:37 40:04 44:31 48:58 53:25 5.342 x L (ft) 18 17:00 19:14 25:39 32:03 38:28 44:52 51:17 57:42 64:06 70:31 76:56 7.692 x L (ft) 21 19.50 26:11 34:54 43:38 52:21 61:05 69:48 78:32 87:15 95:59 104:42 10.47 x L (ft) 24 22:48 34:11 45:35 56:59 68:23 79:47 91:10 102:34 113:58 125:22 136:46 13.67 x L (ft) 27 28:51 43:16 57:42 72:07 86:33 100:58 115:24 129:49 144:14 158:40 173:05 17.3 x L (ft) 30 35:37 53:25 71:14 89:02 106:51 124:39 142:28 160:16 178:05 195:53 213:41 21.36 x L (ft) 33 43:06 64:38 86:11 107:44 129:17 150:50 172:23 193:55 215:28 237:01 258:34 25.85 x L (ft) Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 SANITART SEWERAGE 333000 - 15 TABLE 3 Vacuum Testing Time (Seconds) for Manholes Depth (feet) Manhole Diameter (Inches) 48 60 72 0-8 20 26 33 10 25 33 41 12 30 39 49 14 35 46 57 16 40 52 67 18 45 59 73 20 50 65 81 22 55 72 89 24 59 78 97 26 64 85 105 28 69 91 113 30 74 98 121 3.6 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the sewers by flushing with water or other means to remove dirt, stones, and other material. Prior to acceptance, all pipelines shall be video inspected. Three copies of the final inspection shall be submitted to the [Engineer] for their records. The inspection shall be recorded on DVD media. 3.7 AS-BUILTS The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with as-builts of all the newly installed lines and structures. The stamped and signed as-built plan shall be based on a field survey performed by a certified professional land surveyor, and include swing tie locations, sizes, and depths to all pipes and structures, and shall be shown on a site plan and provided in AutoCAD format (.DWG file). Rejection: The as-built will be rejected if the design AutoCAD files are modified or updated and submitted as the as-built. END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 0 SECTION 334000 STORMWATER UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. All work shall conform to North Andover Department of Public Works (DPW) Standards for Materials and Construction. E. Contractor shall register with “Dig Safe” 72 hours prior to construction. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain “Dig Safe” registrations and “Dig Safe” markings. Contractor shall comply fully with utility company requirements. 1.2 NORTH ANDOVER DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS (DPW) A. The Contractor shall notify DPW sufficiently in advance of connecting new main to existing main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval by the DPW and shall conform to the applicable North Andover Specifications. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the [Municipality] and paying all fees associated with the stormwater utilities system installation. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials and do all work necessary to construct the storm drainage system, including connections to existing structures and testing, as indicated on the Drawing and as specified. B. Provide personnel and equipment necessary, and perform tests required to demonstrate that the work of this section has been completed in accordance with specified requirements and with governmental authority having jurisdiction C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, storm drainage lines, structures, and appurtenances shall be installed to a point 10 ft. from the outer face of a foundation wall. D. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting Municipal Drainage System to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority having jurisdiction. E. The Contractor shall clean and video inspect existing storm drainage system prior to construction commencement Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 1 F. Compliance with the MassDEP Stormwater Management Policy G. Compliance with Town of North Andover Conservation Commission and Planning Board Approval resolutions, including Order of Conditions 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Section 02 41 13 Utility Line Removal B. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork C. Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing D. Section 31 25 00 Erosion & Sedimentation Control E. Section 32 12 00 Flexible Paving F. Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving G. Section 33 10 00 Water Utilities H. Section 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewerage I. Section 33 44 36 OIL & STORMWATER SEPARATORS 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M105 Gray Iron Castings M190 Asphalt-Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches M199 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections M243 Field-Applied Coating of Corrugated Metal Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches M252 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe M294 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe, 12 in. to 60 in. Diameter M306 Drainage, Sewer, Utility, and Related Castings B. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A48 Gray Iron Castings A536 Ductile Iron Castings C32 Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale) C33 Concrete Aggregates Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 2 C62 Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe C270 Mortar for Unit Masonry C443 Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets C478 Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings C990 Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) C1479 Precast Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe Using Standard Installations D448 Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction D1784 Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds D1785 Poly(Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 D2241 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) D2321 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications D3034 Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3350 Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials D6913 Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe F667 3 in. – 24 in. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings F2418 Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Wall Stormwater Collection Chambers F2764 6 to 60 in. Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Double and Triple Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Sanitary Sewer Applications F2922 Polyethylene (PE) Corrugated Wall Stormwater Collection Chambers D. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): QQ-A-200/8 Aluminum Alloy 6061 Bar, Rod, Shapes, Tube, and Wire, Extruded SS-C-153C (AF) Cement, Bituminous, Plastic (Asbestos Free) E. Massachusetts Department of Transportation (MassDOT): Highway Division Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (MassDOT Specifications) Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 3 F. Town of North Andover Department of Public Works Standards and Specifications G. Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MassDEP), Massachusetts Stormwater Handbook and Stormwater Standards 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Product Data: 1. Castings 2. Precast Structures 3. Oil and Sediment Separator 4. Area Drains 5. Trench Drains 6. Grout 7. Cement Concrete 8. PVC Pipe and Fittings 9. RCP Pipe and Fittings 10. DI Pipe and Fittings 11. HDPE Pipe, Perforated Pipe, and Fittings 12. Washed Stone (gradation curve) 13. Outlet Protection Mats and Securing System 14. Cleanouts 15. Downspout Boots B. The Contractor shall submit full catalog cuts of the manufacturer product data. All data shall include properties of the pipes, fittings, and the layout of all components associated with the infiltration system. 1. Contractor shall submit prior to the start of construction of Stormwater Infiltration systems, rain gardens, swales, any stormwater basin(s), the following: a. Descriptions of equipment and materials to be used and the procedure to be followed during installation, operation, maintenance and removal relative to the proposed sequence of excavation, construction and backfilling. b. Schedule for work from start of Pond Construction through final stabilization c. Plans showing temporary drainage routing & discharge locations while stormwater ponds are being constructed through full final stabilization and/or when grass/ seed mix established in basin. d. Copy of any applicable discharge permit. e. Details regarding schedule and procedure for soil erosion protection throughout construction and stabilization of stormwater ponds. f. Compliance with the Department of Environmental Protection Order of Conditions MassDEP File XXXXXX issued by the North Andover Conservation Commission [insert date]. g. Compliance with Plan titled “BMP Erosion & Sediment Control Exhibit”, prepared by Samiotes Consultants, dated XXXXXX C. Dewatering Submittals Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 4 1. If required for completion of the work, Drawings and supporting engineering calculations for the proposed surface water control, dewatering systems, sediment control systems and treatment systems (as applicable) including the following: a. Arrangements, sizes, capacities, locations and depths of all elements of the proposed systems. b. Descriptions of equipment and materials to be used and the procedure to be followed during installation, operation, maintenance and removal relative to the proposed sequence of excavation, foundation construction and backfilling. c. Discharge locations as established by the applicable permits. d. Copy of any applicable discharge permit. e. Details regarding schedule and procedure for cleaning sedimentation systems. f. Anticipated peak and average discharge rates g. Compliance with the Department of Environmental Protection Order of Conditions MassDEP File [xxxx] issued by the town of North Andover Conservation Commission [insert issued date]. h. Compliance with Plan titled “BMP Erosion & Sediment Control Exhibit”, prepared by Samiotes Consultants, dated xxxxxxx 1.7 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Critical Inspection Points in the Sequence: 1. Upon installation of all soil erosion and sedimentation control devices (phased in accordance to Phasing Plan developed by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer and Town Conservation Commission prior to commencement of construction), the Contractor shall notify and coordinate a site inspection with the Engineer and Conservation Commission prior to grubbing for each phase 2. Verify the actual contributing drainage area (CDA) boundaries and that the CDA is adequately stabilized and/or secondary erosion control measures installed around perimeter of all rain gardens, stormwater ponds/ basins, and infiltration chambers. Inlets into infiltrating stormwater systems to be blocked during installation and through full stabilization stormwater ponds/ basins 3. Bottom of Hole: Once stormwater pond or infiltration system is excavated/ shaped; [engineer] to inspect bottom of basin prior to placement of soils or stone 4. Bio-retention soils and/or stone shall be on site to be inspected by [engineer] prior to be placed 5. Engineer to inspect as stormwater ponds soils and/or stone being placed in basin 6. Engineer to inspect as stormwater infiltration/detention chambers are being placed; and stone backfilled 7. Engineer to inspect after stormwater ponds final grading & permanent stabilization is being installed 8. Compliance with the Department of Environmental Protection Order of Conditions MassDEP File XXXXX issued by the town of North Andover Conservation Commission [issued date] PART 2 - PRODUCTS ********************************************************************************************************************** Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 5 2.1 MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS A. Manholes, catch basins, and other structures shall be reinforced precast concrete unless specified by the [Engineer] or approved as a change by the [Engineer]. B. Manholes, catch basins, and other structures shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO HS-20 loading, as specified in the AASHTO Specifications. C. Precast concrete structures shall be Type II cement unless specifically authorized in writing, conform to ASTM C478, and shall be similar to those produced by the manufacturers in the table below. Manufacturer Concrete Systems Inc., Hudson, NH E.F. Shea Concrete Products, Amesbury, MA Oldcastle Infrastructure, Rehoboth, MA D. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints. E. Joints between sections shall be made with mortar, preformed rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443, or preformed flexible joint sealant conforming to ASTM C990. 1. [[The manufacturer of the precast units shall supply the joint sealant. The joint sealant shall be produced from blends of butyl rubber, refined hydrocarbon, resins, and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and be solvent free.]] 2. [[The sealant shall have an approximate cross section of [3/8 in.] by [3-1/2 in.] for single strip application or [3/8 in.] by [3/8 in.] square or [3/8 in.] diameter cord for multiple cord usage application. Use [six] cords minimum for multiple cord applications.]] F. Each section shall have no more than two suitable lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. G. Precast base shall be shaped to receive the ends of pipe sections which are to be connected to the structure. H. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe, and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. I. Drain pipe shall be joined to wall of concrete manhole or catch basin with nonshrink grout or flexible manhole sleeve, at the Contractor’s option. J. Wall sections shall be a minimum of [4 in.] thick, as shown on the Drawings. K. Manholes and catch basins shall be a minimum inside diameter of [4 ft.], as shown on the Drawings. Manholes over [8 ft.] in depth shall have a minimum inside diameter of [5 ft.]. The diameter of manholes shall be based on manufacturer’s recommendations for the proposed pipe layout shown on the plans. No change orders shall be accepted for upsizing of manholes based on the final layout of piping. L. Manholes shall have shaped brick inverts. M. Manhole sections shall contain manhole steps accurately positioned and imbedded in the concrete when the section is cast, in accordance with AASHTO M199. These steps shall be extruded aluminum, conforming to Fed. Spec QQ-A-200/8, or polypropylene plastic reinforced with 3/8 in. diameter steel rod. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 6 1. Steps shall be drop-front, anti-skid design, [12 in.] on center. Projection of front edge of step shall be greater than or equal to 5 in. from access riser wall. 2. Steps shall be embedded 3-1/2 in. into access riser wall dosing tank wall. Those portions of steps to be embedded in access riser wall shall receive a heavy coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. Coating shall be thoroughly dry before steps are embedded in the access riser or dosing tank wall. 3. Steps in precast sections shall be embedded at time of casting. N. The date of manufacturer and the name or trademark of the manufacturer shall be clearly marked on the inside of the barrel. O. Weirs for outlet control shall be [6 in.] wide concrete block or cast-in reinforced concrete crest with a length of [5ft.] as indicated on Drawings. 2.2 DRYWELLS A. Drywells which are not excavated pits shall be precast concrete similar to "Precast Drywell", manufactured by E. F. Shea New England Concrete Products, Inc. B. Holes in sections to receive piping may be cast into concrete or drilled. C. Diameter of hole shall be 2 in. to 4 in. larger than outside diameter of entering pipe. D. Drywell shall conform to AASHTO HS-20 loading, as specified in the AASHTO Specifications. E. Crushed stone fill shall consist of clean, [double, single] washed stone. 2.3 OIL AND SEDIMENT SEPARATOR A. Oil and Sediment Separator Structure shall have [1,500] gallon minimum capacity with an approximate interior dimension of approximately [5 ft. 5 in.] high, [5 ft.] wide, [10 ft.] long, and with [two] baffle walls. B. Precast concrete items specified above shall be designed for AASHTO HS-20 loading, 1 ft. to 5 ft. cover, and have steel reinforcement in accordance with ASTM A615, Grade 60, 1 in. Minimum Cover. C. Concrete Structures shall have a concrete minimum strength of 5,000 psi after 28 days. D. Concrete Structures shall be constructed with tongue and groove joints between sections. Joints between sections shall be sealed with butyl resin. E. Precast items mentioned above shall be manufactured with wall openings to receive the ends of pipes which are to be connected to structure. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe, and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. 2.4 OIL INTERCEPTOR HOOD A. All proposed catch basins shall be constructed with oil hoods. Oil hoods shall conform to North Andover Standards. B. Catch basin hoods shall protrude no more than 12 in. beyond the end of pipe into the structure, with a minimum distance of 6 in. for pipes less than 12 in. in diameter. Hoods shall be similar to Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 7 Ground Water Rescue Inc. Eliminator, Best Management Practices Inc. Snout, or Nyloplast Envirohood. 2.5 ACCESS RISER A. Access Riser shall be precast concrete construction. B. Precast concrete access risers shall conform to ASTM C478. C. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints. D. Joints between sections shall be made with flexible water tight rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443. E. Each section shall have no more than two suitable lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. 2.6 CASTINGS A. Castings shall conform to North Andover standards. B. All frames and covers shall be cast iron, heavy duty, conforming to AASHTO M105 or ASTM A48, Class 35B, and shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO HS-20 loading. C. All frames and grates shall be of uniform quality, free from blow holes, shrinkage, distortion, or other defects. They shall be smooth and well cleaned by shotblasting and fitted together in a satisfactory manner. Round frames and covers shall have a continuously machined bearing surface to prevent rocking and rattling. D. All frames and covers shall conform to MassDOT Specifications M8.03.0. E. Castings shall conform to AASHTO M306 and shall be marked with the name of the producing foundry and country of manufacture, preceded by the words “Made in”, the AASHTO or ASTM designation number, class by a number followed by a letter indicating the minimum tensile strength and size of test bar, and heat identification and cast date. F. Manhole frame and cover shall have a circular clear opening of [24 in.] and a total frame and cover weight of at least [475 lbs.] with the word [“DRAIN”] centered on the cover. G. Upon completion of all hardscape and paving work, all covers shall be cleared of foreign material (i.e. bituminous material, concrete, mortar, and other deleterious material). After cleaning, the covers shall be removed and build-up of material inside the frame cleared to ease future removal of covers. 2.7 TRENCH DRAIN A. Channel shall be sloped, with recesses for granting lockdown devices molded into the channel wall. Recesses shall be formed from the same material as the channel. Channel shall also include a manufacturer’s applied integral cast-in-metal rail edge design. B. Grate shall be heavy duty, slotted cast iron or ductile iron, H-20 loading, and ADA compliant. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 8 2.8 AREA DRAINS A. Area drains shall be PVC inline drain system with [18 in.] internal diameter and [36 in.] sump. The outlet to the structure shall accommodate a [6 in.] PVC pipe. B. The grate shall be [18 in.] ductile iron domed grate or [18 in.] ductile iron HS-10 pedestrian grate per ASTM A536 Grade [70-50-05]. See plans for locations of grate types. C. Outlet pipes shall have a hood installed. 2.9 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts, outside the building, shall be threaded cleanouts compatible with the pipe. B. Cleanout shall be cast iron at grade or 4 in. below grade, as specified on the Drawings. 2.10 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS A. Downspout boots shall be made of cast iron and in accordance with ASTM A48. B. Downspout boots shall have no boxed corners, welded seams or choke points. C. The finish and coating of the downspout boot shall match the downspout. D. Downspout boots shall be equipped with the manufacturer’s standard stainless steel fasteners for mounting onto the building wall and a flexible rubber adaptor for connection to the underground drainage piping. E. Downspout boots shall be sized properly to transition between the downspout and the underground drainage piping. 2.11 SUBSURFACE INFILTRATION SYSTEM A. The subsurface infiltration system shall be made from polypropylene or polyethylene chambers conforming to ASTM F2418 or ASTM F2922 and shall be designed in accordance with ASTM F2787. Chambers shall be similar to those produced by the manufacturers in the table below. Manufacturer Cultec, Inc., Brookfield, CT ADS / Stormtech, Ludlow, MA Contech Engineered Solutions, Palmer, MA B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3350 and AASHTO designations M252 or M294. HDPE pipe shall be designated as AASHTO Type ‘S’ and shall have a full circular dual-wall cross-section, with an outer corrugated pipe wall and an essentially smooth inner wall (waterway). C. HDPE perforated pipe shall conform to AASHTO M294 and MP7-97 Class II perforations. D. Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Fabricated fittings shall be welded at all accessible interior and exterior junctions. E. Chamber rows shall provide continuous, unobstructed internal space with no internal support panels in order to provide ease of access for inspection and maintenance functions. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 9 F. Inspection ports shall be installed and constructed per project plans. Note that inspection ports shall only be installed along the isolator row to allow for inspection of the sediment build up over time. G. The chambers shall be open-bottomed. H. All chamber rows shall be terminated with an end cap. End cap placement on end of chamber will vary depending on chamber model. I. End caps may incorporate cutting guides to allow easy field cutting for various diameters of pipe. Cutting guides shall be located at both the top and bottom of each end cap. J. Rejection 1. The subsurface stormwater storage system may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 2.12 SUBSURFACE INFILTRATION SYSTEM A. Leaching galleys shall be precast, concrete structures approximately [8 ft. x 4 ft. x 4 ft.] 1. Precast concrete shall be a minimum of 5000 psi at 28 days. 2. Reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A615. B. Galleys shall conform to AASHTO HS-20 loading, as specified in the AASHTO Specifications. C. Rejection 1. The subsurface stormwater storage system may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 2.13 POLYETHYLENE LINERS A. Polyethylene liners shall consist of: Thickness 40 Mil ASTM D1777 Weight 18.5 oz/sq yd ASTM D751 Tensile Strength (grab method) 680 lbs ASTM D5034 Tear Strength 140 lbs ASTM D5884 Bursting Strength 1300 PSI ASTM D3786 Puncture Resistance 350 lbs ASTM D4833 Low Temperature Cold Crack -85 F ASTM D2136 Permeability <2.65 x 1012 cm/sec ASTM D4491 UV Resistance >90% Strength retained after 2000 hrs ASTM G-154 2.14 FILTER FABRIC A. Geotextile fabric which shall be between the chamber bottom and stone foundation located along the entire length of the Isolator row shall be woven AASHTO M288 Class 1 fabric for sediment Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 10 capture, filtration, and scour protection. ***[woven filter fabric as part of isolator row. Delete if no isolator row as part of infiltration system design]**** B. Geotextile fabric required for use between infiltration chambers and stone foundation shall be non-woven, meeting AASHTO M288 Class 2 requirements. C. The geotextile fabric shall consist of only long chain polymeric filaments or yarns, such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polyamide, or polyvinylidene-chloride formed into a stable network such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to each other. The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals and free of defects or flaws which significantly affect its physical and/or filtering properties. D. NonWoven Geotextile fabric shall meet the following Properties: Mechanical Properties Test method Unit Minimum Average Roll Value MD CD Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 Lbs (N) 120 (534) 120 (534) Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D4632 % 50 50 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D4533 Lbs (N) 50 (223) 50 (223) CBR Puncture Strength ASTM D6241 Lbs (N) 310 (1380) Maximum Opening Size Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTMD4751 U.S. SIEVE (mm) 70 (0.212) Minimum Test Values Permittivity ASTMD4491 Sec-1 1.7 Flow rate ASTMD4491 Gal/min/ft2 (l/min/m2) 135 (5500) Minimum Test Value UV Resistance (at 500 hours) ASTMD4355 % strength retained 70 Physical Properties Unit Roll Sizes Roll Dimensions (Width x Length) Ft (m) 12.5 x 360 (3.8 x 110) 15 x 360 (4.5 x 110) Roll Area Yd2 (m2) 500 (418) 600 (502) E. NonWoven Geotextile fabric shall consist of: Mirafi 140N Geotex 401 No. 410 Non-Woven Tencate Geosynthetics Americas 365 South Holland Drive Pendergrass, Georgia 30567 Propex 4019 Industry Drive Chattanooga, TN 37416 Concord, NH 03302 Cultec, Inc. 878 Federal Rd, P.O. Box 280 Brookfield, Connecticut 06804 Or approved equal. 2.15 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (NON PRESSURE) A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) non-pressure pipe for gravity drainage shall conform to ASTM D3034, SDR 35 minimum wall thickness or ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 when specified on the Drawings. B. Pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths of 14 ft. or 20 ft. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 11 C. PVC joints shall be made using an integral bell and spigot type rubber gasketed joint. Each integral bell joint shall conform to ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. D. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be imprinted with an “assembly stripe” to which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes. E. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gauge to ensure the proper location in the coupling grooves. F. Perforations, when applicable, shall be AASHTO Class II. G. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type compatible with the pipe and conforming to ASTM D3034. 2.18 SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPE (PRESSURE) A. Where indicated on the Drawings, pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe conforming to the relevant portions of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241. B. Pipe shall be class 150 (DR 18) and joints are to be elastomeric ring, bell and spigot type conforming to ASTM D3139. 2.19 SCHEDULE 80 PIPE A. Schedule 80 pipe shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound, conforming to ASTM D1784. B. Schedule 80 pipe shall be manufactured in strict accordance to the requirements of ASTM D1785 for physical dimensions and tolerances. 2.20 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS (NONPRESSURE) A. HDPE Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3350 and AASHTO designations M294 or M252. HDPE pipe shall be designated as AASHTO Type S and shall have a full circular dual-wall cross- section with an outer corrugated pipe wall and a smooth inner liner. B. Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Fabricated fittings shall be welded at all accessible interior and exterior junctions. 1. 4 in. through 10 in. (100 to 250 mm) shall meet AASHTO M252, Type S. 2. 12 in. through 60 in. (300 to 1500 mm) shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2648. C. Manning’s “n” value for use in design shall not be less than 0.010. D. Perforations, when applicable, shall be AASHTO Class II. E. Joints shall be silt tight and nonrated watertight. Gaskets shall be made of polyisoprene meeting the requirements of ASTM F477 with the addition that the gaskets shall not have any visible cracking when tested according to ASTM D1149 after 72 hour exposure in 50 ppm ozone at 104- degrees Fahrenheit. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 12 2.21 HDPE JUNCTION BOX A. Junction box shall be constructed of an impact modified copolymer polypropylene conforming to the material requirements of ASTM F2764 with an eccentric cone reducer manufactured from polyethylene material conforming to ASTM D3350 cell class 213320C. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. B. Top cone and structure shall meet the loading requirements of AASHTO M306. 2.22 HDPE FLAT PIPE A. Flat drain shall be [12 in.] and shall conform to ASTM D7001. B. Outside dimensions shall be [1.5 in.] thick by [12.5 in.] wide. C. All pipes shall have internal bracing adjoining each long wall to prevent crushing. D. All pipe and fittings shall be made of polyethylene with a minimum cell classification of 424420C as defined and described in ASTM D3350. E. Perforations shall be as follows: Nominal Pipe Size, in. (mm) 12 (300) Slot Length (Avg), in. (mm) 1.125 (29) Slot Width (Avg), in. (mm) .125 (3.2) Water Inlet Area (Approx.), in2/ft 15 2.23 CAST IRON PIPE (NONPRESSURE) A. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A888, or ASTM A74. B. Castings shall be sound, true to pattern, and compact close grain that permits drilling and cutting by ordinary methods and its interior surface shall be reasonably smooth and free from defects. C. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) or receive prior approval of the [Engineer]. D. Hubless couplings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI 310 or ASTM C1277. E. Hubless coupling gaskets shall conform to ASTM C564. 2.24 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP) A. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) buried to a depth with greater than 42 in. of cover shall conform to ASTM C76, Class III, Wall B. RCP buried to a depth with less than 42 in. of cover shall conform to ASTM C76, Class V, Wall B. Pipe of 24 in. or less in diameter shall be tongue and groove type. Pipe greater than 24 in. shall be either tongue and groove or bell and spigot type, at the Contractor’s option. B. RCP shall be joined using flexible rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443. C. Pipe may be supplied with or without lifting holes, at the Contractor’s option. Lifting holes shall be conical, arranged to lie at top of pipe as installed. Precast concrete plugs, shaped to fit lifting holes, shall be supplied with pipe. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 13 2.25 EMBEDMENT MATERIALS A. Bedding, haunching, and initial backfill shall be Class I, II, or III soils conforming to ASTM D2321. 1. Class I materials shall be angular crushed stone or rock, dense or open graded with little or no fines (1/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. in size). 2. Class II materials shall be clean, coarse grained materials such as gravel, coarse sands, and gravel/sand mixtures (1-1/2 in. maximum in size). 3. Class III materials shall be coarse grained materials with fines including silty or clayey gravels or sands. Gravel or sand shall comprise more than 50 percent of Class III materials (1-1/2 in. maximum size). B. Crushed stone fill shall consist of clean, washed stone passing a 1-1/2 in. sieve. C. Embedment materials shall be free from lumps of frozen soil or ice. 2.26 WASHED STONE A. Where indicated, stone used shall be 3/4 in. – 1-1/2 in. single washed stone. The stone shall be free from shale, clay, organic materials, and debris with stone sizes conforming to No. Four stone as specified by ASTM D448. Not more than 0.5 percent of satisfactory material passing a No. 200 Sieve will be allowed to adhere to the stone. B. Laboratory testing results shall be submitted to the [Engineer] for approval. Testing must be performed in accordance with ASTM D6913. 2.27 DOUBLE WASHED STONE A. Where indicated, stone used shall be 3/4 in. – 1-1/2 in. double washed stone. The stone shall be free from shale, clay, organic materials, and debris with stone sizes conforming to No. Four stone as specified by ASTM D448. Not more than 0.5 percent of satisfactory material passing a No. 200 Sieve will be allowed to adhere to the stone. B. Laboratory testing results shall be submitted to the [Engineer] for approval. Testing must be performed in accordance with ASTM D6913. 2.28 PEA GRAVEL A. Pea gravel shall be clean, bank run gravel with stone sizes conforming to No. Six stone as specified by ASTM D448. Not more than 0.5 percent of satisfactory material passing a No. 200 Sieve will be allowed to adhere to the stone. B. Laboratory testing results shall be submitted to the [Engineer] for approval. Testing must be performed in accordance with ASTM D6913. 2.29 RIP RAP STONE A. Individual rock fragments shall be dense, sound, and free from cracks, seams, and other defects conducive to accelerated weathering. Except as otherwise specified, the rock fragments shall be angular to subrounded. The least dimension of an individual rock fragment shall be not less than one-third the greatest dimension of the fragment. B. Rip rap shall be sourced in conformance to ASTM D4992 and shall meet gradation requirements of ASTM D5519, Method A or B. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 14 2.30 CHANNEL LINING STONE A. Stones for channel lining shall be sound, approved quality angular blocks, as nearly rectangular or cubical as practicable. Rounded stones or relatively thin slabs will not be acceptable. At least 75 percent of the volume shall consist of stones weighing at least 200 pounds each, the remainder of the stones shall be so graded that when placed with the larger stones a compact mass will result. 2.31 RIPRAP STONE A. Individual rock fragments shall be dense, sound, and free from cracks, seams, and other defects conducive to accelerated weathering. Except as otherwise specified, the rock fragments shall be angular to subrounded. The least dimension of an individual rock fragment shall be not less than one-third the greatest dimension of the fragment B. Rip rap shall be sourced in conformance to ASTM D4992 and shall meet gradation requirements of ASTM D5519, Method A or B 2.32 BRICK A. Brick for support of casting shall be any of the following types: 1. Common brick meeting the physical requirements of ASTM C62, Grade SW. 2. Clay brick meeting the physical requirements of ASTM C32, Grade MS. 2.33 PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A. Mortar shall be a Portland cement mortar conforming to ASTM C270, Type M. B. Mortar shall contain a waterproofing admixture similar to those given below. Product Manufacturer Hycrete Hycrete hycrete.com 14 Spielman Rd. Fairfield, NJ 07004 866-492-7383 ADI-CON CW PLUS W.R. Meadows https://www.wrmeadows.com/ 300 Industrial Drive P.O. Box 338 Hampshire, IL 60140 800-342-5976 Eucon Euclid Chemical www.euclidchemical.com/ 19215 Redwood Road Cleveland, OH 44110 800-321-7628 2.34 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Grout shall be cement based, nonmetallic, nonshrink grout that meets performance requirements of ASTM C1107. B. Grout shall be similar to those given below. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 15 Product Manufacturer MasterFlow 885 BASF Construction Chemicals www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us 23700 Chagrin Blvd. Beachwood, OH 44122 800-722-8899 5 Star Grout Five Star Products www.fivestarproducts.com 60 Parrott Drive Shelton, CT 06484 800-243-2206 MascoGrout Mason Supply Corp www.masco.net 2637 SE 12th Avenue Portland, OR 97202 503-234-4321 2.35 BITUMINOUS PAINT A. Bituminous paint shall be a bituminous base product conforming to AASHTO M190 or AASHTO M243, similar to those manufactured by Wohl Coatings. 2.36 ASPHALT MASTIC CEMENT A. Asphalt mastic cement shall be a fibered, pitch-base or asphalt-base compound conforming to Fed. Spec. SS-C-153 (Asbestos Free). 2.37 JUTE MESH A. Jute mesh shall be a uniform, plain weave cloth of undyed and unbleached single jute yarn with an open area of 60-65 percent. The yarn shall be of a loosely twisted construction and it shall not vary in thickness more than one-half its normal diameter. Jute mesh shall be furnished in rolled strips and shall meet the following requirements: B. Width - 48 in., plus or minus 1 in. 78 warp-ends per 48 in. of cloth width (minimum) 41 weft-ends per linear yard (minimum) Weight shall average 1.22 pounds per linear yard with a tolerance of plus or minus five percent. C. Staples shall be U-shaped and shall be approximately 6 in. long and 1 in. wide. Machine made staples shall be of No. 11 gauge or heavier steel wire. Handmade staples shall be made from 12 in. lengths of No. 9 gauge or heavier steel wire. 2.38 COIR FIBER LOGS A. Coir fiber logs shall be manufactured from coir fibers and be wrapped in a twisted coir netting. Coir fiber logs shall be 12 in. minimum in diameter, 10 ft. long (plus or minus 0.5 ft.) and weigh approximately 50-70 lbs. 2.39 RAIN GARDEN A. Soils which have a USDA soil textural classification of sand, loamy sand, sandy loam, loam, or an infiltration rate of at least 1 in. per hour are preferable for rain gardens. Soils with slower Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 16 infiltration rates shall be amended or modified to increase infiltration. Soils which have infiltration rates of 1/2 in. per hour or less shall require the installation of an underdrain. 1. Amended or modified soils shall be 50 percent sand or stone aggregate (conforming to ASTM C33), 30 percent compost and 20 percent topsoil (15 to 25 percent fines passing the No. 200 sieve). 2. Soil mix shall be uniform, free of stones, stumps, roots, or similar objects larger than 2 in. and clay content shall not exceed five percent. Compost shall be processed from yard waste in accordance with MassDEP Guidelines and shall not contain biosolids. B. Plants shall be hardy native plants which are tolerant of both wet and dry conditions. See Landscape Architect’s plans for details. C. The materials and manufacture of any appurtenances, such as tile, underdrain, or mulch shall be as shown and specified on the construction plan. D. Underdrain, if needed, must be 6 in., schedule 40 PVC. Perforations must be 3/8 in. in diameter and must be located 4 in. on center, every 90 degrees around the pipe. The far end of the underdrain must be fitted with a removable cap perforated with seven holes 3/8 in. in diameter. E. Mulch shall be double-shredded hardwood or approved pine straw substitute, placed to a depth of 3 in. Mulch shall be aged a minimum of six months. No dyed mulch shall be accepted. F. Stone shall be washed river rock, large gravel, or small rip-rap, 3 in. to 5 in. in diameter. Cobble/stone shall be used at downspouts, inlets, outlets, and along hardscape edges as needed to dissipate flow and prevent soil erosion. Filter fabric shall be used under stone, but shall not extend past the edges of the rain garden. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all parts of the Project where stormwater utilities are to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Construction Manager, with copy to the Designer, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 UNFAVORABLE WEATHER A. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may be expected, unless work can be completed to subgrade or piping can be installed and backfilled the same day B. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete or piping is delayed, as approved by the design engineer C. No work shall be installed on frozen ground D. Infiltration systems/ detention systems stone backfill to be installed in temperatures above 32°F Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 17 3.3 DRYWELLS A. A drywell shall consist of either an excavated pit or a perforated concrete structure with an inside diameter of 5 ft. to 12 ft. If an excavated pit, the drywell shall be filled with clean aggregate greater than 1-1/2 in. up to 3 in. Fill shall be surrounded by filter fabric. B. Drywells shall be designed to treat the runoff volume generated by the 3.25 in./24 hour (two year) Stormwater Quality Design Storm (NOAA). Drywells shall be placed only in soil where the permeability allows a percolation rate of at least 0.50 in./hour. The drywell shall be designed to empty within three days of filling under normal conditions. C. The bottom of the drywell shall be at least 3 ft. above seasonal high water table or bedrock. The depth of the drywell shall be 3 ft. to 12 ft. D. Drywells shall not be placed in a public way or a public easement, and shall not be placed into service until the drainage area is stabilized. Drywells shall be sited a minimum of 10 ft. away from the building. Excavated material shall be placed away from the excavated sides to prevent wall instability during excavation and backfilling. Large tree roots shall be trimmed flush with the sides to prevent puncturing or tearing of filter fabric during installation. The side walls shall be roughened where sheared and sealed by heavy equipment. E. The following requirements apply to dry wells that do not utilize a concrete structure. 1. The bottom, sides and top of the well surface shall be lined with filter fabric. The fabric shall be wrapped and tied with wire or nylon twine or otherwise tightly secured around the horizontal inflow pipe where the pipe protrudes through the fabric. Fabric shall be wrapped over the top of the aggregate fill with a minimum of 12 in. of overlap in any direction. Fabric shall be overlapped 6 in. in “shingle” fashion when more than one section is required to enclose the aggregate. 2. The dry well shall be filled to within 12 in. of the finished surface elevation, leaving sufficient depth for topsoil placement (in areas where surface stabilization is accomplished through the use of vegetation). 3. Drainage aggregate shall be placed in lifts of no more than 12 inches and compacted using plate compactors. Voids between the fabric and excavation sides due to boulders or other obstacles shall be filled with natural soils to ensure fabric conformity to excavation sides. 3.4 MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS A. Manholes and catch basins shall be set to the required elevation and shall be plumb and vertical, with each section in true alignment. B. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. C. Drain pipe shall extend, around its entire circumference, to inside surface of wall of structure to which it is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using a flexible manhole sleeve. D. Brick shall be employed to bring cast iron frame, cover, and grate to required elevation. Brick and concrete blocks shall be soaked in water before laying. All joints in brick structures shall be thoroughly flushed full of mortar and no joint on the inside face shall be greater than 1/8 in. After the bricks are laid, the joints shall be pointed on the outside. Completed brick installation shall be coated with at least a 3/4 in. thickness of mortar on outside to provide a fully sealed and watertight collar between the top of the manhole section and the cover or grate frame. The joints Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 18 in precast units shall be wetted and completely mortared immediately prior to settling a section. No structure shall be backfilled until all mortar has completely set. E. Before installation of castings, chipped and scraped areas shall be touched up with one coat of bituminous paint. F. Cast iron frame shall be set concentric with manhole opening in full bed of mortar. A thick ring of mortar extending to the outer edge of brick or concrete shall be placed all around the bottom flange of the cast iron frame. Mortar surface shall be smooth and shall be sloped to shed water away from the frame. G. Waterproofing shall be added to the mortar for underground masonry in accordance with the water proofing manufacturer’s directions. Other additives will not be permitted in the mortar. H. Portland cement-based mixtures used on this work shall receive a minimum of three days of moist curing, which shall start immediately after the material has been placed. Suitable means shall be employed to protect cement-based mixtures from too rapid drying and damage from cold weather and frost. I. Rim elevations shown on the drawings are approximate and manhole and catch basin covers and frames shall be adjusted to final grades at no cost. J. Manholes shall have concrete bench formed to provide a smooth channel between all inlet and outlet pipes. Top of benching shall be level with the crown of the pipes. 3.5 OIL INTERCEPTOR HOOD A. Oil interceptor hood shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. B. Oil hood shall be installed immediately after the catch basin is connected to the outlet piping. 3.6 JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Junction box shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and ASTM D2321. B. Excavate location to the depth required and provide a stone base. Stone base shall be a minimum of 6 in. or as indicated on the Drawings. Junction box shall be set in place and leveled then connected to pipes. C. Backfill material shall be crushed stone meeting the requirements of ASTM D231. Bedding and backfill shall be well placed and compacted uniformly in accordance with ASTM D2321. D. The maximum burial depth of the HDPE junction box is 15 ft. with the use of Class I compacted material as defined by ASTM D2321. 3.7 PIPE AND CLEAN OUT INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Piping shall be installed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Where exact locating dimensions are not given on the Drawings, the [Engineer]’s approval shall be obtained for proposed location before installation. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 19 2. Cleanouts shall be installed where horizontal changes in roof drain piping occur and no manhole is proposed. 3. Pipes and fittings shall be installed in conformance to the manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM D2321. 4. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 5. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade. 7. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets. 8. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 9. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at end of each day’s work. 10. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. B. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP) 1. In addition to any deficiencies covered by ASTM C76, pipe which has any of the following visual defects will not be accepted. a. Pipe which has been patched to repair porous spots, cracks, or other defects, when such patching was not approved by the [Engineer]. b. Exposure of the reinforcement when such exposure would indicate that the reinforcement is misplaced. c. Pipe that has been damaged during shipment or from handling, even if previously approved before shipment. 2. Concrete pipe, at delivery to the job site, shall have cure and reach the design strength as indicated by ASTM C76 and ASTM C361, and be at least three days (72 hours) old. 3. Concrete pipe installation shall conform to ASTM C1479 and Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA manual. 4. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell. 5. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected and approved. 6. Lifting holes in concrete pipe shall be at top of pipe as installed. Holes shall be sealed with precast concrete plugs. Before plugs are installed, entire contact surface between plug and pipe shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Plug shall be driven home before mastic has set up. 7. Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets. 8. Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other accessories and methods recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe has been properly drawn up and joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the pipe immediately before joint is made up. Jointing materials shall be inspected and defects repaired before joint is completed. C. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. As soon as excavation is complete to normal grade, line trench with filter fabric as shown on the Drawings with sufficient material for 1 foot overlap at top course. 2. Compact and grade to provide firm, uniform, and continuous support for the pipe. 3. The pipe shall not be driven down to grade by striking it. 4. Perforated pipe shall be installed with top print line or location stripe at the 12 o’clock position so that perforations are placed down. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 20 5. Blocking under the pipe shall not be permitted. 6. Crushed stone shall be placed evenly on each side of the pipe to mid-diameter and hand tools shall be used to force the crushed stone under the haunches of the pipe to five firm continuous support for the pipe. 3.8 SOIL BORINGS A. Soil borings shall be taken along the pipe line at intervals no greater than 300 ft. to confirm bearing capacity of the soils. 3.9 STORMWATER INFILTRATION SYSTEMS ********************************************************************************************************************** NOTE: There are 3 “STORMWATER INFILTRATION SYSTEMS” sections which correspond to the 3 sections in Part 2 – PRODUCTS. Keep the one(s) which are applicable to your project and delete the remainder. The first, below, is for the Stormtech HDPE chambers and similar systems. ********************************************************************************************************************** A. The Contractor shall coordinate inspections of the systems with the [Engineer]. Inspections shall be carried out at the following stages: 1. Inspection of bottom of bed, prior to placing filter fabric and stone. 2. Upon installation of drainage components prior to covering the system with stone and sand. 3. Prior to backfilling over system. B. The Contractor shall give the [Engineer] 48 hours notice of inspection requirements. C. Failure of the Contractor to coordinate inspections will result in refusal of certification and/or exhumation/reinstallation of the system components at the Contractor’s expense. D. Infiltration systems shall be designed to treat the runoff volume generated by the 2-year and 10- year 24-hour storms. The infiltration system shall be designed to drain within three days of filling under normal conditions, and completely dewater between storms. E. Infiltration systems shall be placed only in soil where the permeability allows a percolation rate of at least 0.17 in./hour. Percolation rates shall be field verified prior to completion of design, when feasible. F. An appropriate number of observation wells, access ports, or manholes shall be installed to enable inspections and maintenance. G. Chamber products must be designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s minimum requirements. Failure to do so shall void the manufacturer’s limited warranty. H. The contractor shall install all drainage structures, pipe and chambers in the locations shown on the design engineer’s drawings and/or as approved by the Owner. Pipe shall be of the type and sizes specified on the drawings and shall be laid accurately to line and grade. Structures shall be accurately located and properly oriented. I. Excavate bed and prepare subgrade as indicated on Drawings. Place nonwoven geotextile over prepared soils and up excavation walls. Install underdrains if required, as indicated on Drawings. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 21 J. Place clean, crushed angular stone foundation, 6 in. minimum. Compact to achieve a flat surface. Install manifolds and lay out woven scour geotextile at inlet rows at each end cap. Place a continuous piece (no seams, double layer) along entire length of isolator rows. K. Align the first chamber and end cap of each row with inlet pipes. Contractor may choose to postpone stone placement around end chambers and leave ends of rows open for easy inspection of chambers during the backfill process. Install chambers by overlapping chamber end corrugations. Chamber placement shall not exceed the reach of the construction equipment used to place the stone. Maintain a minimum of 6 in. spacing between rows. End caps shall be installed with the curved face of the end cap facing outward. L. Two continuous layers of woven geotextile fabric shall be placed between the foundation stone and the isolator row chambers. The fabric shall lie flat and extend the entire width of the chamber feet. A strip of nonwoven geotextile fabric shall be draped over the row of chambers. M. Initial embedment shall be spotted along the centerline of the chamber evenly anchoring the lower portion of the chamber. No equipment shall be operated on the bed at this stage of the installation. Dump trucks shall not dump stone directly onto the bed. N. Chambers shall be evenly backfilled. Stone column height shall never differ by more than 12 in. between adjacent chamber rows or between chamber rows and perimeter. Perimeter shall be fully backfilled, with stone extended horizontally to the excavation wall. O. Only after chambers have been backfilled to top of chambers and with a minimum 6 in. of cover stone on top of chambers shall small dozers be used over the chambers for backfilling remaining cover stone. Small dozers and skid loaders shall push material parallel to rows only. P. Nonwoven geotextile shall be installed over stone. Geotextile shall overlap 24 in. minimum where edges meet. Each lift shall be compacted as specified in the Drawings. 3.10 STORMWATER INFILTRATION SYSTEMS ********************************************************************************************************************** NOTE: There are 3 “STORMWATER INFILTRATION SYSTEMS” sections which correspond to the 3 sections in Part 2 – PRODUCTS. Keep the one(s) which are applicable to your project and delete the remainder. The second, below, is for the precast concrete galleys and similar systems. Should test pits be required, add the appropriate language, timing, and dimensions to the spec. An example is given below: “After excavation and prior to installation the Contractor shall arrange for [two] [10 ft.] deep test pits to be performed within the footprint of the system. The Contractor shall coordinate inspection of the test pits with the [Engineer]. A minimum of 48 hours written notice shall be provided for the proposed test pits. Backfilling of the test pits shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.” ********************************************************************************************************************** A. The Contractor shall coordinate inspections of the systems with the [Engineer]. Inspections shall be carried out at the following stages: 1. Inspection of bottom of bed, prior to placing filter fabric and stone. 2. Upon installation of drainage components prior to covering the system with stone and sand. 3. Prior to backfilling over system. B. The Contractor shall give the [Engineer] 48 hours notice of inspection requirements. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 22 C. Failure of the Contractor to coordinate inspections will result in refusal of certification and/or exhumation/reinstallation of the system components at the Contractor’s expense. D. Infiltration systems shall be designed to treat the runoff volume generated by the 2-year and 10- year 24-hour storms. The infiltration system shall be designed to drain within three days of filling under normal conditions, and completely dewater between storms. E. Infiltration systems shall be placed only in soil where the permeability allows a percolation rate of at least 0.17 in./hour. Percolation rates shall be field verified prior to completion of design, when feasible. F. An appropriate number of observation wells, access ports, or manholes shall be installed to enable inspections and maintenance. G. Subsurface infiltration system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, approved engineering drawings, specifications and calculations. Location, dimensions, elevations, pipe sizes and access manholes shall be per plan. H. Contractor shall excavate the installation area to the specified subgrade elevation. Subgrade soils shall be graded to a consistent level bed, free from deleterious materials such as organics, trash and debris. Subgrades shall be compacted to a 95 percent density. I. For detention/retention systems, contractor shall place a waterproof membrane sandwiched between fabric pads (non-woven geotextile similar to PROPEX 801) over complete base and sides of the excavation walls. Membrane / fabric pads shall be wrapped so as to contain the required crushed stone base section specified and to isolate the exterior perimeter of the structures from the native material backfill. Fabric shall be wrapped over the top of the concrete leaching galleys a minimum of 4 ft. Fabric shall be installed in such fashion so as to create a waterproof wrap whereas the corner folds overlap and are folding into an upward position to prevent water from entering. J. A minimum of 6 in. of 3/4 in. crushed stone base placed in a 95 percent compacted level grade shall be installed on top of the filter fabric in the bottom of the excavation. K. Precast concrete (or cast in place) inlet splash pads shall be installed to the specified grade and locations per plan. L. Precast concrete structures shall be installed in a level and plumb fashion so as to minimize the gap between structures to no more than an average of 1/4 in. and no greater than 1/2 in. gap. Unless noted, all structure bottom and top elevations shall be equal to within 1/2 in. M. Backfill around and on top of structures shall consist of select native material, structural fill or structural stone per plan specifications. Fills shall be placed in 9 in. lifts at 95 percent compaction. All fill shall not contain any deleterious materials or stones larger than 3 in. in diameter within 6 in. of system top. N. During installation of infiltration/detention system, siltation controls shall be installed around the open excavation at the end of the day if the hole/system is to be left open and not backfilled and brought to sub grade the same day O. Partially installed infiltration/detention systems or excavated beds to be protected from erosion & sediment at all times, failure to do so may lead to contamination of the system and require removal / replacement of stone, bedding, and / or infiltration BMP’s Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 23 P. Filter fabric (when in place as part of the system) should be wrapped around the system, and straw wattles placed around the full perimeter of the open excavation at the end of each day 3.11 STORMWATER INFILTRATION SYSTEMS ********************************************************************************************************************** NOTE: There are 3 “STORMWATER INFILTRATION SYSTEMS” sections which correspond to the 3 sections in Part 2 – PRODUCTS. Keep the one(s) which are applicable to your project and delete the remainder. The third, below, is for the StormTank Modules and similar systems. ********************************************************************************************************************** A. The Contractor shall coordinate inspections of the systems with the [Engineer]. Inspections shall be carried out at the following stages: 1. Inspection of bottom of bed, prior to placing filter fabric and stone. 2. Upon installation of drainage components prior to covering the system with stone and sand. 3. Prior to backfilling over system. B. The Contractor shall give the [Engineer] 48 hours notice of inspection requirements. C. Failure of the Contractor to coordinate inspections will result in refusal of certification and/or exhumation/reinstallation of the system components at the Contractor’s expense. D. Infiltration systems shall be designed to treat the runoff volume generated by the 2-year and 10- year 24-hour storms. The infiltration system shall be designed to drain within three days of filling under normal conditions, and completely dewater between storms. E. Infiltration systems shall be placed only in soil where the permeability allows a percolation rate of at least 0.17 in./hour. Percolation rates shall be field verified prior to completion of design, when feasible. F. An appropriate number of observation wells, access ports, or manholes shall be installed to enable inspections and maintenance. G. Prepare the material to be assembled. Required materials per module include two platens, eight columns, one side panel (perimeter modules only), and one 1 lb. rubber mallet. 1. Place a platen on a firm, level surface and insert the eight columns into the platen receiver cups. Firmly tap each column with a rubber mallet to ensure the column is seated. Install the top platen by aligning the receiver cups with the columns and alternating taps with a rubber mallet at each structural column until all columns are firmly seated. 2. If side panels are required (perimeter modules only), insert the side panel into the bottom platen prior to seating the edge column into the receiving cups. Firmly seat the top platen on the side panel with a rubber mallet. H. Modules shall be installed per manufacturer’s installation instructions. I. Leveling bed, backfill, and compactible fill shall conform to ASTM D2321 Class I or Class II as per manufacturer’s recommendations for acceptable fill materials. J. Install geotextile fabric and per geotextile fabric manufacturer’s recommendations. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 24 1. An impermeable liner may be incorporated to prevent infiltration. If specified, the liner must be installed per liner manufacturer recommendations. K. Mark the footprint of the modules for placement. Module starting point shall be square prior to Module placement to ensure proper layout of units. Care shall be taken to note any connections, ports, or other irregular units to be placed. L. The modules shall be installed as shown in the submittal drawings with the short side of perimeter modules facing outward, except as otherwise required. 1. The top/bottom platens shall be in alignment in all directions. 2. For double stack configurations, install the bottom module first. DO NOT INTERMIX VARIOUS MODULE HEIGHTS ACROSS LAYERS. 3. Insert stacking pins (two per module) into the top platen of the bottom module. 4. Place the upper module directly on top of the bottom module in the same direction, making sure to engage the pins. M. Install the modules to completion, taking care to avoid damage to the geotextile and/or liner material. N. During installation of infiltration/detention system, siltation controls shall be installed around the open excavation at the end of the day if the hole/system is to be left open and not backfilled and brought to sub grade the same day O. Partially installed infiltration/detention systems or excavated beds to be protected from erosion & sediment at all times, failure to do so may lead to contamination of the system and require removal / replacement of stone, bedding, and / or infiltration BMP’s P. Filter fabric (when in place as part of the system) should be wrapped around the system, and straw wattles placed around the full perimeter of the open excavation at the end of each day 3.12 STORMWATER DETENTION SYSTEMS A. Follow Manufacturers installation guide B. During installation of infiltration/detention system, siltation controls shall be installed around the open excavation at the end of the day if the hole/system is to be left open and not backfilled and brought to sub grade the same day C. Partially installed infiltration/detention systems or excavated beds to be protected from erosion & sediment at all times, failure to do so may lead to contamination of the system and require removal / replacement of stone, bedding, and / or infiltration BMP’s D. Filter fabric (when in place as part of the system) should be wrapped around the system, and straw wattles placed around the full perimeter of the open excavation at the end of each day 3.13 STORMWATER BASINS A. All subsoil, deleterious material, and stumps beneath the basin system shall be removed for a distance of 1 ft. from the finished grade and replaced with septic sand meeting ASTM C33. B. After final grading, all surfaces within the basins shall be scarified using appropriate methods so as to mitigate any compaction to the soils. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 25 3.14 TRENCH DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Excavate the area for channel placement wide and deep enough to accommodate the standard channel size and a minimum of 4 in. concrete encasement on both sides as well as underneath the channel. B. Channel sections are installed from the outlet end of the system, working from the large numbers to the smaller numbers. Insert channels from above and allow the ends to interlock. Channel sections shall be placed on brick, rebar basket, low slump concrete grout slurry, or suspended to obtain correct finish elevation. Cutting will be made, if required, by masonry or concrete saw. Temporarily place grate in channel to avoid compression during concrete placement. C. Protect grates and channel interior during pouring of concrete. Place concrete in a manner that will not dislodge the channels. Concrete shall be at finished level or 1/8 in. above the top of the channel to ensure efficient drainage and adequate channel edge protection. D. Following final set of concrete, remove grate protection, place grates in final protection and engage locking bolts in correct location. E. The end sections shall be installed in a careful workmanship-like manner. 3.15 JUTE MESH A. Jute mesh shall be placed within 48 hours after finish grading or topsoiling of an area is completed. If seeding or planting is specified, within 24 hours after seeding of an area is completed. The jute mesh shall be placed in a manner that will minimize disturbance of the underlying soil. All equipment and application processes shall be approved by the Owner prior to use. B. The surface shall be smoothed and all gullies and potholes backfilled prior to applying jute mesh. All rocks or clods larger than 2 in. in size and all sticks and other foreign material that will prevent contact of the jute mesh with the surface shall be removed. If the surface is extremely dry, the Owner may require watering prior to placement. C. Jute mesh shall be placed uniformly, in contact with the underlying soil, at the locations shown on the Drawings. The top edge of each strip shall be anchored by placing a tight fold of mesh vertically in a 6 in. deep slot or trench in the soil and tamping and stapling in place. Edges of adjacent strips shall be lapped 6 in. with a row of staples at a maximum interval of 3 ft. in the lapped area. Bottom edges shall be lapped 12 in. over the next lower strip, if applicable, or buried as specified for top edges. D. Check slots shall consist of separate 4 ft. strips of jute mesh placed at right angles to the direction of water flow immediately prior to placing the general covering of jute mesh. Check slots shall be anchored by burying the top edge of the strip as described above. E. Check slots shall be spaced so that one check slot, or junction slot of the jute mesh occurs every 75 ft. on gradients of less than four percent and every 50 ft. on gradients of more than four percent. On slope drains, a check slot or an end slot shall occur every 25 ft. unless otherwise specified. F. Edges of jute mesh shall be buried around the edges of catch basins and other structures. G. Jute mesh shall be held in place by wire staples driven vertically into the soil. The mesh shall be fastened at intervals not more than 3 ft. apart in three rows for each strip of mesh, with one row Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 26 along each edge and one row alternately spaced in the middle. All ends of the mesh and check slots shall be fastened at 6 in. intervals across their width. H. The Contractor shall maintain the areas covered by jute mesh until final acceptance of the project. Prior to final acceptance, any damaged areas shall be reshaped as necessary, reseeded, if applicable; and the jute mesh satisfactorily repaired or replaced. 3.16 COIR FIBER LOGS A. Clear the installation area of any debris, trees, rock, or large obstructions. Coir logs are designed to contact soil, so any stumps or potential obstructions shall be removed. B. Dig a small trench in the location where the coir logs are to be placed. C. Place the coir logs in the trench and backfill with soil so that coir logs are tightly packed against the slope. Adjacent coir logs shall be positioned so that the ends fit tightly against one another. Ends shall be secured with coir twine. Mattress coir fiber shall be used to fill any spacing between logs. D. Anchor the coir logs into position by driving stakes every 3.5 ft. along the down-slope face of the coir log. Do not stake directly through coir logs. 3.17 RAIN GARDEN A. General Requirements 1. Construction operations shall be carried out in a manner and sequence where erosion, air and water pollution are minimized and are within legal limits. 2. The completed job shall present a professional appearance and shall conform to the line, grades and elevations shown on the drawings or as staked in the field. 3. All operations shall be carried out in a safe and skillful manner. Safety and health regulations shall be observed and appropriate safety measures used. The Contractor shall assure that all state laws concerning buried utilities have been met. 4. All objectionable materials, such as trees, stumps, roots, brush, weeds, and trash shall be removed from designated work area. 5. Rain garden shall be located at least 10 ft. from building foundations and shall be sized to accommodate the first 1 in. of rainfall with 6 in. of ponding above the mulch layer. See Drawings for details. B. Site Preparation 1. Remove or eliminate existing vegetation. 2. Where topsoil is present, topsoil that is removed from disturbed areas shall be stockpiled. 3. Maintaining infiltration during construction is essential to building a functioning rain garden. Protect rain garden from compaction and sedimentation during all phases of construction. Where rough grading is required, maintain one foot of cover over final bottom elevation of rain garden until completed. 4. Direct significant sources of runoff away from the rain garden during construction. 5. All upstream areas shall be stabilized prior to final construction of rain garden C. Construction 1. Avoid compaction in infiltration area during construction, including compaction from foot traffic. Where equipment use is necessary, all efforts shall be made to keep equipment out Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 27 of active infiltration area. Where that is not possible, low impact earth moving equipment shall be used to prevent compaction of underlying soils. 2. Where possible, prevent surface water from entering the rain garden during construction. Where accumulation of fine materials or surface ponding has occurred, remove deposited materials and score underlying soils to a depth of 6 in. 3. Planting medium shall not be exposed to sediment laden water during construction. All rain gardens shall include a pre-treatment forebay consisting of a gravel trench and a grass filter strip. Upstream runoff shall be stabilized (e.g. hay bales or other barriers) prior to reaching rain garden. If possible, installation of filter media shall not occur until the majority of upstream areas are stabilized. 4. Make certain an impermeable layer does not exist prior to planting on sites where compaction has occurred, particularly where construction equipment has been used to construct the rain garden or on new construction. In situations where compaction during construction has occurred, break up impermeable layer before planting. 5. Complete final grading to achieve proposed design elevations, loosen the subsoil leaving space for soil amendments as specified on plan. 6. The planting medium shall be inspected after every significant rainfall event (0.5 in. or more in a 24 hour period) for the first 6 months to ensure proper function. The top several inches of the filter shall be replaced with fresh material when water ponds on the surface for more than 72 hours. The removed sediments shall be legally disposed of off-site. 7. If soil media or subgrade is over compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the soil media and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Engineer and replace contaminated soil media with new soil media a. Rejection: Rain garden/bioretention basin construction shall be rejected if soil media or subgrade is over compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids 3.18 CLEANING AND INSPECTION – GRAVITY SYSTEM A. All new drainage piping and drainage structures will be inspected and cleaned using an approved method at the completion of construction. B. Contractor shall be aware of flow conditions, and be able to identify potential access problems to storm access points. C. Clean designated storm lines using approved methods and equipment. D. Remove internal obstructions such as roots or gaskets by trenchless techniques when obstruction encountered prevents further pipe cleaning. E. Provide special attention during cleaning operation to assure almost complete removal of roots from joints. F. Procedures to remove internal obstructions may include use of equipment such as rodding machines, root saws, bucket machines and winches using root cutters, porcupines, and jet machines equipped with hydraulically driven cutters. G. If cleaning of entire section cannot be successfully performed from one manhole, set up equipment at other manhole and attempt cleaning again. H. If successful cleaning cannot be performed or equipment fails to traverse entire storm line section, it will be assumed that major blockage exists. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 STORMWATER UTILITIES 334000 - 28 I. Temporarily suspend cleaning effort and immediately notify [Engineer]. J. Upon removal of obstruction, complete cleaning operation. K. Employ satisfactory precautions to protect storm line from damage that might be inflicted by improper use of cleaning equipment. L. Immediately notify [Engineer] if fresh soil, pieces of pipe, or other visible signs of potential problems occur during cleaning operation. M. Ensure that water pressure created does not cause damage due to flooding of property being served by storm section(s) involved. N. Flush debris downstream and remove. O. Do not discharge sewage or solids removed from downstream manholes onto streets, or into ditches, catch basin, or storm drains. P. A video inspection of the entire drainage system, up to and including the connection to the municipal system, is required upon cleaning. Three copies of the final inspection will be submitted to the [Engineer] for their records. The inspection shall be recorded on DVD media. 3.19 AS-BUILTS A. The Contractor shall provide the Designer with as-builts of all the newly installed system. The stamped and signed as-built plan shall be based on a field survey performed by a certified professional land surveyor and include locations, sizes, and depths of all pipes (inverts), structures (including rim elevations), pipe inlets/outlets, and fixtures. Infiltration/ Detention systems shall have extent of system, elevations, and inverts. All swales, rain gardens, bioretention systems, weirs, or any other stormwater depression, catchment, or conveyance system shall show bottom spot grades, contours, tops, outlets/inlets. The as-built plan shall be shown on a site plan and in AutoCAD format, and digital copy provided in a .DWG file. 1. Rejection: The as-built will be rejected if the design AutoCAD files are modified or updated and submitted as the as-built END OF SECTION Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 1 SECTION 334443 WATER QUALITY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and Contract Conditions as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, will be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section D. Coordinate work with trades affecting, or affected by, work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to ensure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. E. All work shall conform to Town of North Andover Department of Public Works Standards for Materials and Construction. F. Compliance with the Department of Environmental Protection Order of Conditions MassDEP File 188-1833 issued by the North Andover Conservation Commission 10/28/24. Requirements that are in the Order of Conditions that are in conflict with this Section shall take precedence over this specification. A copy of the Order is included in Appendix. G. Compliance with Plan titled “BMP Erosion & Sediment Control Exhibit”, prepared by Samiotes Consultants, dated August 16, 2024. 1.2 NORTH ANDOVER DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS (DPW) A. All work shall conform to the applicable Town Specifications. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the Town of North Andover and paying all fees associated with the stormwater utilities system installation. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all on-site inspection fees. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials and do all work necessary to construct the stormwater utilities complete, including connections to existing structures and testing, as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified. 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Section 311000 – SITE PREPARATION. B. Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 2 C. Section 331000 – WATER UTILITIES. D. Section 33 30 00 – SANITARY SEWERAGE E. Section 33 40 00 – STORMWATER UTILITIES F. Section 33 44 43 – MEMBRANE FILTER UNITS 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of precast concrete separator indicated; include materials of fabrication, dimensions, rated capacities, operating characteristics, size, and location of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Include materials of construction, dimensions, rated capacities, retention capacities, location, and size of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and accessories. C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other: 1. Hydrodynamic separators 2. Membrane Filtration Systems 3. External bypass manholes and pipes, include size, location, and elevation of each 4. Piping connections; including size, location, and elevations of each 5. Interface with underground structures and utility services 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect separators, fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. B. Handle separators according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions. C. Shipping of components shall not be initiated until a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi is attained or five calendar days after fabrication has expired, whichever occurs first. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the Town of North Andover Standard Specifications as well as the following general specifications: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). B. All components will be subject to inspection by the Designer at the place of manufacture and/or installation. All components are subject to being rejected or identified for repair if the quality of materials and manufacturing do not comply with the requirements of this specification. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 3 Components which have been identified as defective may be subject for repair where final acceptance of the component is contingent on the discretion of the Designer. C. The manufacturer shall guarantee the WQU components against all manufacturer originated defects in materials or workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date the components are delivered to the owner for installation. The manufacturer shall upon its determination repair, correct or replace any manufacturer originated defects advised in writing to the manufacturer within the referenced warranty period. The use of WQU components shall be limited to the application for which it was specifically designed. D. The WQU manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer of Record a “Manufacturer’s Performance Certification” certifying that each WQU is capable of achieving the specified removal efficiencies listed in these specifications. The certification shall be supported by independent third-party research. E. Submissions for WQU(s) require review and approval by the Engineer of Record, for hydraulic performance, impact to project designs, equivalent treatment performance, and any required project plan and report (hydrology/hydraulic, water quality, stormwater pollution) modifications that would be required by the approving jurisdictions/agencies. Any applicable modifications to the project estimates of cost, bonding amount determinations, plan check fees for changes to approved documents, and/or any other regulatory requirements resulting from the product substitution shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.9 GENERAL PRODUCT INFORMATION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Membrane Filtration System, complete and operable as shown and as specified herein, in accordance with the requirements of the plans and contract documents. The water quality treatment flow shall be as determined and approved by the Engineer of Record. The Membrane Filtration System removes pollutants from stormwater runoff through the unit operations of sedimentation, floatation, and membrane filtration. B. The Membrane Filtration System shall be of a type that has been installed and in use for a minimum of five (5) consecutive years preceding the date of installation of the system. The manufacturer shall have been, during the same consecutive five (5) year period, engaged in the engineering design and production of systems deployed for the treatment of storm water runoff and which have a history of successful production, acceptable to the Engineer of Record and/or the approving Jurisdiction. C. Product Substitutions: Any proposed product substitution to this specification must be submitted for review and approved by the Engineer of Record. Review package should include third party reviewed performance data for both flow rate and pollutant removal. Contractor to coordinate with the Engineer of Record any applicable modifications to the project for changes to approved documents, and/or any other regulatory requirements resulting from the product substitution 1.10 REFERENCE STANDARDS American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Reference Specifications: Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 4 ASTM C891: Standard Specification for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures ASTM C478: Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C858: Standard Specification of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures ASTM C857: Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures ASTM C990: Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Manholes Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants ASTM D4101: Standard Specification for Copolymer steps construction ASTM D4097: Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER QUALITY UNIT (HYDRODYNAMIC SEPARATORS) A. Housing unit of stormwater treatment device shall be constructed of pre-cast or cast-in-place concrete, no exceptions. Precast concrete components shall conform to applicable sections of ASTM C 478, ASTM C857 and ASTM C858 and the following: 1. Concrete shall achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square-inch (psi). 2. Unless otherwise noted, the precast concrete sections shall be designed to withstand lateral earth and AASHTO HS-20 traffic loads. 3. Cement shall be Type III Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150. 4. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. 5. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed billet-steel bars, welded steel wire or deformed welded steel wire conforming to ASTM A615, A185, or A497. 6. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints. 7. Joints between sections shall be made with preformed butyl rubber joint sealant conforming to ASTM C443. 8. Each section shall have no more than two suitable lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. 9. Precast base shall be manufactured with wall openings to receive the ends of pipes, which are to be connected to structure. 10. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. 11. Drainpipe shall be joined to wall of concrete manhole or catch basin flexible manhole sleeve. 12. Shipping of components shall not be initiated until a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi is attained or five calendar days after fabrication has expired, whichever occurs first. B. Access system(s) conform to the following: 1. Manhole castings shall be designed to withstand AASHTO HS-20 loadings and manufactured of cast-iron conforming to ASTM A48 Class 30. C. Castings 1. Castings shall be as specified by the WQU manufacturer. 2. Castings to be compliant with Section 334000 Storm Drainage System 3. Castings shall also bear the name of the WQU manufacturer. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 5 D. Water quality unit shall be manufactured by one of the following or approved equal by Town of North Andover Water Department. 1. Contech ® Engineered Solutions. 2. Hydro International ® 3. Imbrium ® E. Internal bypass is required 2.2 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION (HYDRODYNAMIC SEPARATORS) A. Performance of the WQU shall be based on independent full-scale laboratory and/or field testing. The laboratory testing used as the basis of product performance shall be undertaken in accordance with testing protocols approved or endorsed by the Stormwater Equipment Manufacturers Association (SWEMA), acceptable State agency (such as a Department of Environmental Protection), or the Engineer of Record. B. Performance of the WQU shall be based on the Treatment Flow Rate without internally bypassing and without re-suspension and washout of captured pollutants. C. The WQU will be sized to either achieve an annual reduction in the total suspended solid load in accordance with Table 1 or treat a flow rate designated by the Approving Authority in which the project is located. Both methods should be sized using a particle size distribution having a mean particle size (d50) of 50 microns unless otherwise stated. D. The WQU will be capable of capturing and retaining 100 percent of pollutants greater than or equal to 1/8 in. regardless of the pollutant’s specific gravity (i.e.: floatable and neutrally buoyant materials) for flows up to the device’s rated-treatment capacity. The WQU will be designed to retain all previously captured pollutants addressed by this subsection under all flow conditions. E. The WQU will be designed with a sump chamber for the storage of captured sediments and other negatively buoyant pollutants in between maintenance cycles. The contractor shall provide data documenting the WQU sump capacity is adequate based on the performance parameters in Table 1. In order to not restrict the Owner’s ability to maintain the WQU, the minimum dimension providing access from the ground surface to the sump chamber shall be 12 inches in diameter. F. The WQU will convey the flow from the peak storm event of the drainage network, in accordance with required hydraulic upstream conditions as defined by in Table 1. If a substitute WQU is proposed, supporting documentation will be submitted that demonstrates equal or better upstream hydraulic conditions compared to that specified herein. This documentation will be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of the work. All costs associated with preparing and certifying this documentation shall be born solely by the Contractor. G. Testing of the water quality unit shall be performed according to the standard testing procedures specified by: 1. UNH Stormwater Center 2. EPA Environmental Verification Program 3. Alden Laboratories, Holden, MA 4. NJCAT 5. Other testing reports as approved by the Engineer of Record Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 6 H. Varied results are to be expected from different testing agencies. Comparisons of test from different Testing Agencies will be considered. Studies that analyze Suspended Sediment Concentration (SSC) without also analyzing TSS are not sufficient to validate TSS removal claims for regulatory purposes. I. Water Quality Unit Performance Parameters Stormwater management systems will be design to remove 80% of the average annual post- construction load of Total Suspended Solids (TSS). This Standard is met when: 1. Suitable practices for source control and pollution prevention are identified in a long-term pollution prevention plan, and thereafter are implemented and maintained. 2. Structural stormwater best management practices are sized to capture the required water quality volume determined in accordance with the Massachusetts Stormwater Handbook; and 3. Pretreatment is provided in accordance with the Massachusetts Stormwater Handbook. 2.3 MEMBRANE FILTER UNIT A. The device shall be an all concrete structure (including risers), constructed from precast concrete riser and slab components or monolithic precast structure(s). Precast concrete vault shall be provided according to ASTM C857 and C858 and manholes shall be provided according to ASTM C478. Both structure types shall be installed to conform to ASTM C891 and to any required state highway, municipal or local specifications; whichever is more stringent. All precast concrete components shall be manufactured to a minimum live load of HS-20 truck loading or greater based on local regulatory specifications, unless otherwise modified or specified by the design engineer B. Gaskets and/or sealants shall be used to seal between concrete joints. Joints shall be sealed with preformed joint sealing compound conforming to ASTM C990 C. Cartridge Deck: The deck insert shall be bolted and sealed inside the precast concrete chamber. The insert shall serve as: (a) a horizontal divider between the lower treatment zone and the upper treated effluent zone; (b) a deck for attachment of filter cartridges such that the membrane filter elements of each cartridge extend into the lower treatment zone; (c) a platform for maintenance workers to service the filter cartridges; (c) a conduit for conveyance of treated water to the effluent pipe 1. Fiberglass: In cylindrical configurations, the fiberglass portions of the filter device shall be constructed in accordance with the following standard: ASTM D4097: Contact Molded Glass Fiber Reinforced Chemical Resistant Tanks 2. Aluminum: In rectangular configurations, the aluminum cartridge deck shall be ¼” thick, 5052-H32 Aluminum with all welds to be 100% continuous waterproof weld using 5356 filler D. Membrane Filter Cartridges: Filter cartridges shall be comprised of reusable cylindrical membrane filter elements connected to a perforated head plate. The number of membrane filter elements per cartridge shall be a minimum of eleven 2.75-inch (70-mm) or greater diameter elements. The length of each filter element shall be a minimum 15 inches (381 mm). Each cartridge shall be fitted into the cartridge deck by insertion into a cartridge receptacle that is permanently mounted into the cartridge deck. Each cartridge shall be secured by a cartridge lid that is threaded onto the receptacle, or similar mechanism to secure the cartridge into the deck. The maximum treatment flow rate of a filter cartridge shall be controlled by an orifice in the cartridge lid, or on the individual cartridge itself, and based on a design flux rate (surface Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 7 loading rate) determined by the maximum treatment flow rate per unit of filtration membrane surface area. The maximum design flux rate shall be 0.21 gpm/ft2 (0.142 lps/m2) E. Each membrane filter cartridge shall allow for manual installation and removal. Each filter cartridge shall contain no less than 7 ft2 of surface area per inch of length and have filtration membrane surface area and dry installation weight as follows (if length of filter cartridge is between those listed below, the surface area and weight shall be proportionate to the next length shorter and next length longer as shown below Filter Car- tridge Length (in) Minimum Filtration Membrane Surface Area (ft2 / m2) Maximum Filter Cartridge Dry Weight (lbs / kg) 15 / 381 106 / 9.8 10.0 / 4.5 27 / 686 190 / 17.7 14.5 / 6.6 40 / 1016 282 / 26.2 19.5 / 8.9 54 / 1372 381 / 35.4 25.0 / 11.4 F. Backwashing Cartridges: The filter device shall have a weir extending above the cartridge deck, or other mechanism, that encloses the high flow rate filter cartridges when placed in their respective cartridge receptacles within the cartridge deck. The weir, or other mechanism, shall collect a pool of filtered water during inflow events that backwashes the high flow rate cartridges when the inflow event subsides. All filter cartridges and membranes shall be reusable and allow for the use of filtration membrane rinsing procedures to restore flow capacity and sediment capacity; extending cartridge service life G. Maintenance Access to Captured Pollutants: The filter device shall contain an opening(s) that provides maintenance access for removal of accumulated floatable pollutants and sediment, removal of and replacement of filter cartridges, cleaning of the sump, and rinsing of the deck. Access shall have a minimum clear height over all of the filter cartridges (length of cartridge + 6 inches), or be accessible by a hatch or other mechanism that provides vertical clear space over all of the filter cartridges such that the cartridges can be lifted straight vertically out of the receptacles and deck for the entire length of the cartridge H. Baffle: The filter device shall provide a baffle that extends from the underside of the cartridge deck to a minimum length equal to the length of the membrane filter elements. The baffle shall serve to protect the membrane filter elements from contamination by floatables and coarse sediment. The baffle shall be flexible and continuous in cylindrical configurations, and shall be a straight concrete or aluminum wall in rectangular configurations I. Sump: The device shall include a minimum 24 inches (610 mm) of sump below the bottom of the cartridges for sediment accumulation, unless otherwise specified by the design engineer. Depths less than 24 inches may have an impact on the total performance and/or longevity between cartridge maintenance/replacement of the device J. Steps: Steps shall be constructed according to ASTM D4101 of copolymer polypropylene, and be driven into preformed or pre-drilled holes after the concrete has cured, installed to conform to Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 8 applicable sections of state, provincial and municipal building codes, highway, municipal or local specifications for the construction of such devices K. Double-Wall Containment of Hydrocarbons: The cylindrical precast concrete device shall provide double-wall containment for hydrocarbon spill capture by a combined means of an inner wall of fiberglass, to a minimum depth of 12 inches (305 mm) below the cartridge deck, and the precast vessel wall L. The device shall be able to be used as a bend structure with minimum angles between inlet and outlet pipes of 90-degrees or less in the stormwater conveyance system M. Frame and covers must be manufactured from cast-iron or other composite material tested to withstand H-20 or greater design loads, and as approved by the local regulatory body. Frames and covers must be embossed with the manufacturer or the Membrane Filtration System brand name N. If provided shall meet designated loading requirements or at a minimum for incidental vehicular traffic O. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall function to remove pollutants by the following unit treatment processes; sedimentation, floatation, and membrane filtration P. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall remove oil, debris, trash, coarse and fine particulates, particulate bound pollutants, metals and nutrients from stormwater during runoff events Q. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall typically utilize an external bypass to divert excessive flows. Where an internal bypass is utilized, systems shall be equipped with a floatables baffle, and bypass water shall not pass through the treatment sump or cartridge filtration zone R. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall treat 100% of the required water quality treatment flow based on a maximum design flux rate (surface loading rate) across the membrane filter cartridges not to exceed 0.21 gpm/ft2 (0.142 lps/m2). S. At a minimum, the Membrane Filtration System filter shall have been field tested and verified with a minimum 25 qualifying storm events and field monitoring conducted according to the TARP Tier II or TAPE field test protocol, and have received NJCAT verification T. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall have demonstrated a minimum median TSS removal efficiency of 85% and a minimum median SSC removal efficiency of 95%. U. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall have demonstrated the ability to capture fine particles as indicated by a minimum median removal efficiency of 75% for the particle fraction less than 25 microns, an effluent d50 of 15 microns or lower for all monitored storm events, and an effluent turbidity of 15 NTUs or lower V. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall have demonstrated a minimum median Total Phosphorus removal of 55%, and a minimum median Total Nitrogen removal of 50%. W. The Membrane Filtration System filter shall have demonstrated a minimum median Total Zinc removal of 50%, and a minimum median Total Copper removal of 75%. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER QUALITY UNIT A. The contractor shall exercise care in the storage and handling of the WQU components prior to and during installation. Any repair or replacement costs associated with events occurring after delivery is accepted and unloading has commenced shall be borne by the Contractor. B. The WQU shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and related sections of the contract documents. The manufacturer shall provide the contractor installation instructions and offer on-site guidance during the important stages of the installation as identified by the manufacturer at no additional expense. A minimum of 72 hours’ notice shall be provided to the manufacturer prior to their performance of the services included under this subsection. C. The contractor shall fill all voids associated with lifting provisions provided by the manufacturer. These voids shall be filled with non-shrinking grout providing a finished surface consistent with adjacent surfaces. The contractor shall trim all protruding lifting provisions flush with the adjacent concrete surface in a manner, which leaves no sharp points or edges. D. The contractor shall removal all loose material and pooling water from the WQU prior to the transfer of operational responsibility to the Owner. E. Installation of castings shall be as specified in Section 334000 STORMWATER UTILITIES. 3.2 MEMBRANE FILTER UNIT A. Prevent damage to materials during storage and handling B. The installation of the precast concrete device should conform to ASTM C891 and to any state highway, municipal or local specification for the installation of underground precast concrete structures, whichever is more stringent. Selected sections of a general specification that are applicable are summarized below. C. Precast concrete device installation: 1. aggregate base 2. base slab 3. treatment chamber and cartridge deck riser section(s) 4. bypass section 5. connect inlet and outlet pipes 6. concrete riser section(s) and/or transition slab (if required) 7. maintenance riser section(s) (if required) 8. frame and access cover 9. The precast base should be placed level at the specified grade. The entire base should be in contact with the underlying compacted granular material. Subsequent sections, complete with joint seals, should be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations 10. Adjustment of the Membrane Filtration System filter can be performed by lifting the upper sections free of the excavated area, re-leveling the base, and re-installing the sections. Damaged sections and gaskets should be repaired or replaced as necessary to restore original condition and 11. seals. Once the Membrane Filtration System filter has been constructed, any/all lift holes must be plugged with mortar or non-shrink grout Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 10 D. Inlet and outlet pipes should be securely set into the device using approved pipe seals (flexible boot connections, where applicable), and such that any pipe intrusion into the device does not impact the device functionality E. Adjustment units (e.g. grade rings) should be installed to set the frame and cover at the required elevation. The adjustment units should be laid in a full bed of mortar with successive units being joined using sealant recommended by manufacturer. Frames for the cover should be set in a full bed of mortar at the elevation specified F. In some instances the Maintenance Access Wall, if provided, shall require an extension attachment and sealing to the precast wall and cartridge deck at the job site, rather than at the precast facility. In this instance, installation of these components shall be performed according to instructions provided by manufacturer G. Filter cartridges shall be installed in the cartridge deck in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations. Contractor to contact the manufacturer to schedule cartridge delivery and review procedures/requirements to be completed to the device prior to installation of the cartridges and activation of the system H. Manufacturer shall coordinate delivery of filter cartridges and other internal components with contractor. Filter cartridges shall be installed after site is stabilized and/or unit is isolated from construction influent and ready to accept cartridges. Unit is ready to accept cartridges after it has been cleaned out and any standing water, debris, and other materials have been removed. Contractor shall take appropriate action to protect the filter cartridge receptacles and filter cartridges from damage during construction, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and guidance. For systems with cartridges installed prior to full site stabilization, the contractor shall plug inlet and outlet pipes to prevent stormwater and other influent from entering the device. Plugs are to be removed once the site is stabilized and unit is ready to receive stormwater runoff. I. Durability of membranes are subject to good handling practices during inspection and maintenance (removal, rinsing, and reinsertion) events, and site specific conditions that may have heavier or lighter loading onto the cartridges, and pollutant variability that may impact the membrane structural integrity. Membrane maintenance and replacement shall be in accordance with Contech’s recommendations. J. Inspection; which includes trash and floatables collection, sediment depth determination, and visible determination of backwash pool depth; shall be easily conducted from grade (outside the structure). K. Manual rinsing of the reusable filter cartridges shall promote restoration of the flow capacity and sediment capacity of the filter cartridges, extending cartridge service life. L. The filter device shall have a minimum 12 inches (610 mm) of sediment storage depth, and a minimum of 12 inches between the top of the sediment storage and bottom of the filter cartridge tentacles, unless otherwise specified by the design engineer. Variances may have an impact on the total performance and/or longevity between cartridge maintenance/replacement of the device. M. Sediment removal from the filter treatment device shall be able to be conducted using a standard maintenance truck and vacuum apparatus, and a minimum one point of entry to the sump that is unobstructed by filter cartridges. Kittredge Elementary School North Andover, MA Machado Silvetti August 26,2025 WATER QUALITY UNIT 334443 - 11 N. Maintenance access shall have a minimum clear height over all of the filter cartridges (length of cartridge + 6 inches), or be accessible by a hatch or other mechanism that provides vertical clear space over all of the filter cartridges such that the cartridges can be lifted straight vertically out of the receptacles and deck for the entire length of the cartridge. O. After construction and installation, and during operation, the device shall be inspected and cleaned as necessary based on manufacturer’s recommended inspection and maintenance guidelines and the local regulatory agency/body. P. When replacement membrane filter elements and/or other parts are required, only membrane filter elements and parts approved by manufacturer for use with the Membrane Filtration System shall be installed. Q. Filter cartridges shall be able to be maintained without the use of additional lifting equipment. R. Manufacturer shall provide an Owner’s Manual upon request 3.3 AS-BUILTS A. The Contractor shall provide the Designer with as-builts of all the newly installed system. The stamped and signed as-built plan shall be based on a field survey performed by a certified professional land surveyor and include locations, sizes, and depths of all pipes (inverts), structures (including rim elevations), pipe inlets/outlets, and fixtures. The as-built plan shall be shown on a site plan and in AutoCAD format, and digital copy provided in a .DWG file 1. Rejection: The as-built will be rejected if the design AutoCAD files are modified or updated and submitted as the as-built. END OF SECTION